PTR4100 4300

Plate Thermal Recorder
4300
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE
PT-R4300/PT-R4000II
PT-R4000/PT-R4100
2002 10-25 Ver2.0

2002 06-06 Ver1.1
2002 05-23 Ver1.0
Quality Promotion Department

Media Technology Company
For your safety
Caution labels are affixed to potentially hazardous parts or areas of the equipment for the
safety of the operators and maintenance staff. Caution labels are classified into two types
"WARNING" and "CAUTION" depending upon the degree of potential danger as shown
below. Please read, understand and heed the meanings of these labels to prote
yourself and to prevent unforeseen accidents.
: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided

or properly handled, could possibly result in death or serious
injury.
: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided

or properly handled, could possibly result in minor or moderate
injury or equipment damage.
The PT-R4XXX operators must thoroughly read this manual. Do not turn on the
machine’s power supply until all of the precautions have been read and under-
stood. Very serious accidents may occur if this instruction is not observed.
Please keep the following premises and expectations in mind.
This service manual is only intended for engineers trained in service procedures and maintenance
personnel trained by qualified engineers. Readers are therefore expected to already appreciate
the potential hazards presented by this equipment and type of work, as well as understand all the
basic operations needed for equipment maintenance.
When exporting the machine

International transfer of this equipment, any of its parts, components and/or software must be
carried out in compliance with the relevant laws and ordinances of the country of export and the
country of equipment end-use. We do not assume any responsibility or liability for equipment
transferred without regard to proper export/import regulations or procedures.
Limits of responsibility
Please note that equipment specifications are subject to change without notice for updates and
improvements. This may cause inconsistencies between the contents of this manual and the
equipment you currently possess.
We shall not be held responsible for any damage caused by conditions beyond our control such
as customer modification, disassembly or misuse of our products, programs or software, or their
use in a defective or deficient environment.
Although great care has been taken in preparing this manual, if you find that certain points
seem unclear or in error, please contact Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd.
We assume no responsibility or liability for any damage or consequential and/or indirect losses
resulting from any accident or malfunction that might occur during the operation of this
equipment.
Copyright
©1999-2002: Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd.
The copyright for this entire manual belongs to Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Copying, reprinting or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part in any media without our
express consent infringes upon the copyright and the rights of the publisher.
Contents
§ On safety
1. On Safety .................................................................................................................................. § -1
1-1. When using the PT-R4XXX .............................................................................................. § -1
1-2. Precautions for electricity ................................................................................................ § -2
1-3. Precautions for equipment operation ............................................................................... § -8
1-4. Maintenance .................................................................................................................... § -9
1-5. Caution labels on the equipment ................................................................................... § -10
1-6. Using the laser safety .................................................................................................... § -14
1-7. Precautions during transport and installation ................................................................. § -18
A. Outline
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................ A-1
1-1. For maintenance personnel .............................................................................................. A-1
1-2. Laser maintenance and safety ......................................................................................... A-3
1-3. Basic information .............................................................................................................. A-4
2. System overview ........................................................................................................................ A-7
2-1. System setup diagram ...................................................................................................... A-7
2-2. Recommended configurations .......................................................................................... A-7
3. Overall configuration chart and part names ............................................................................... A-8
3-1. Front view of the main unit ................................................................................................ A-8
3-2. Back view of the main unit ................................................................................................ A-8
3-3. Plate conveyor view of the main unit ................................................................................. A-9
3-4. Peripheral device connectors ........................................................................................... A-9
3-5. Inside of front cover ........................................................................................................ A-10
3-6. Inside of rear cover ......................................................................................................... A-10
4. Electrical wiring ........................................................................................................................ A-11
4-1. Block diagram ................................................................................................................. A-11
4-2. Function of board ........................................................................................................... A-13
5. Specifications .......................................................................................................................... A-17
5-1. Basic specifications ........................................................................................................ A-17
6. Comparison of PT-R4300, PT-R4000 and PT-R4000II .............................................................. A-19
7. Restriction of the plate size for the PT-R4300/4000/4000II ....................................................... A-24
B. Installation
1. Installation ................................................................................................................................. B-1
1-1. Information required for adjustments during installation .................................................... B-1
1-2. Installation schedule ......................................................................................................... B-2
2. Installation conditions ................................................................................................................. B-3
2-1. Dimensions of delivery path ............................................................................................. B-3
2-2. Dimensions when delivering the machine ......................................................................... B-3
2-3. Dimensions when the machine is installed ....................................................................... B-7
2-4. Installation space and layout position ............................................................................. B-13
2-5. Environmental conditions ............................................................................................... B-18
2-5-1. Temperature and humidity ....................................................................................... B-18
2-5-2. Floor load capacity .................................................................................................. B-19
2-5-3. Floor levelness ........................................................................................................ B-19
2-5-4. Vibrations ................................................................................................................ B-19
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL i

Contents
2-5-5. Room cleanliness .................................................................................................... B-19
2-6. Power requirements ....................................................................................................... B-20
2-7. Cable and hose lengths .................................................................................................. B-21
3. About transportation ................................................................................................................ B-22
3-1. Transporting the main unit using 1a forklift (or similar equipment) .................................. B-22
3-2. Transporting the main unit by hoisting it .......................................................................... B-22
4. Installation procedure ............................................................................................................... B-23
4-1. Packing list check ........................................................................................................... B-23
4-2. Assembly........................................................................................................................ B-23
4-2-1. Installation of the PT-R4300 ..................................................................................... B-23
4-2-2. Removing the transport fixing brackets ................................................................... B-24
4-2-3. Adjusting the levelness ............................................................................................ B-32
4-3. Connection ..................................................................................................................... B-33
4-3-1. Connecting the blower hose and gas suction hose .................................................. B-33
4-3-2. Connecting the blower unit control cable ................................................................. B-34
4-3-3. Connecting an auto loader to the PT-R4300(option) ................................................ B-37
4-4. Start of the machine ....................................................................................................... B-40
4-5. Initial settings ................................................................................................................. B-42
4-5-1. Outline for panel settings ......................................................................................... B-42
4-5-2. Setting the media type ............................................................................................. B-43
4-5-3. Setting the plate ...................................................................................................... B-47
4-5-4. Setting the printing machine information ................................................................. B-50
4-5-5. Setting the exposure conditions ............................................................................... B-55
4-6. Operation check and adjustment .................................................................................... B-57
4-6-1. Checking the registration ......................................................................................... B-57
4-6-2. Confirming plate winding and exposure ................................................................... B-61
4-6-3. Laser calibration ...................................................................................................... B-66
4-7. Exposure adjustment ...................................................................................................... B-67
4-7-1. Adjusting the focus value ......................................................................................... B-68
4-7-2. Adjusting the zoom value ........................................................................................ B-71
4-7-3. Adjusting the light intensity <Reference> ................................................................. B-74
4-7-4. Saving the data ....................................................................................................... B-75
4-7-5. Test exposure .......................................................................................................... B-76
4-7-6. Other test exposure methods .................................................................................. B-80
4-8. Other settings ................................................................................................................. B-83
4-8-1. Setting the exposure maintenance .......................................................................... B-83
4-8-2. User settings ........................................................................................................... B-85
4-9. Exposure check .............................................................................................................. B-97
5. Punch attachment(option) ........................................................................................................ B-98
5-1. Attachment ..................................................................................................................... B-98
5-2. Setting the punch name ................................................................................................ B-100
5-3. Setting the punch name (Main menu) ........................................................................... B-102
5-4. Tilt correction method ................................................................................................... B-104
6. Relocation .............................................................................................................................. B-106
7. Installation check sheet .......................................................................................................... B-111
C. Replacement & Adjustment

1. Main belt replacement ............................................................................................................... C-1
ii PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Contents
2. Encoder replacement ................................................................................................................ C-4
3. Adjusting the automatic balancer weight detection sensors ...................................................... C-7
4. Removing the trailing edge clamps ........................................................................................... C-9
5. Attaching the trailing edge clamps .......................................................................................... C-10
6. Replacement procedure for the trailing edge clamp arm drive motor(M20) ............................. C-13
7. Adjusting the trailing edge clamp arm origin and end sensors ................................................ C-15
8. Adjusting the leading edge clamp open/close sensors ............................................................ C-18
9. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate side edge detection sensors for side
alignment(PH61H, PH61A) ................................................................................................. C-20
10. Adjusting the trailing edge clamp hook sensor ...................................................................... C-26
11. Adjusting the hook lever switch ............................................................................................. C-29
12. Sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of the plate(PH51) .......................................... C-31
13. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate top side detection sensors
(PH29H,PH29A) ................................................................................................................ C-32
14. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the drum vacuum pressure sensor(P1) ............ C-35
15. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate sensor(PH6)
(2 plate wind, or float)(Ser.No.-100) .................................................................................... C-36
16. Balancer weight replacement procedure ............................................................................... C-40
17. Balancer motor unit replacement procedure ......................................................................... C-41
18. Balancer sensor replacement procedure .............................................................................. C-41
19. Path driving motor replacement procedure ........................................................................... C-42
20. Squeeze roller height adjustment .......................................................................................... C-43
21. Loading Guide (1) Replacement and Adjustment .................................................................. C-46
22. PT-R4300 Ball screw for Sub-scanning Replacement Procedure .......................................... C-48
23. Countermeasure against registration deviation in PT-R4300 ................................................. C-53
24. Countermeasures for Registration Deviation on PT-R4300(additional information) ............... C-62
25. Procedure for replacing the PT-R4XXX transfer path spring .................................................. C-65
26. Procedure for replacing the LD block .................................................................................... C-68
27. Procedure for replacing and adjusting the power supply ....................................................... C-71
28. Procedure for replacing and adjusting the pulse motor driver ............................................... C-71
29. Procedure for replacing the AC servo driver(E1A) ................................................................ C-73
30. Procedure for replacing and setting the inverter (U8) for the suction blower ......................... C-74
31. Plocedure for replacing the RCP2 board ............................................................................... C-77
D. Operation panel
1. Screen flow diagram (PT-R4000:Ver) ........................................................................................ D-1
1-1. Main menu (when PT-R8600 is used independently) ....................................................... D-1
1-2. Main menu (when SA-L/MA-L is connected) ................................................................... D-4
1-3. Service menu .................................................................................................................. D-5
2. Startup of the main unit without performing initialization ......................................................... D-10
3. Detailed descriptions of the Service/Maintenance screens ..................................................... D-11
3-1. How to enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen .................................................... D-11
3-2. Service/Maintenance Menu screens ............................................................................. D-12
3-3. Sensor Test screens ...................................................................................................... D-14
3-4. Actuator Test screens .................................................................................................... D-19
3-5. Drum Test screens ........................................................................................................ D-24
3-6. Pulse Motor Test screens .............................................................................................. D-26
3-7. Recording Head Unit Test screens ................................................................................ D-29
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL iii

Contents
3-7-1. Zero Return screen for recording head unit/focus motor/zoom motor ..................... D-31
3-7-2. Positioning screens for recording head unit/focus motor/zoom motor ..................... D-32
3-7-3. Peltier Test screen .................................................................................................. D-33
3-7-4. Laser Calibration screen ........................................................................................ D-34
3-7-5. LD ON screen ........................................................................................................ D-36
3-7-6. Calibration Position screen ..................................................................................... D-38
3-7-7. Moving to Calibration Position screen ..................................................................... D-39
3-7-8. Temperature Display screen ................................................................................... D-40
3-7-9. Laser Power Measurement and Cable Disconnection Check screen ...................... D-41
3-7-10. Iop/-Iop screen ....................................................................................................... D-44
3-8. Input Parameter screen ................................................................................................. D-45
3-8-1. Correction Data Setting screens ............................................................................. D-47
3-8-2. Preset Plate Type Setting screen ............................................................................ D-49
3-8-3. Drum Base Position Setting screen ........................................................................ D-50
3-8-4. Drum Position Setting screen ................................................................................. D-52
3-8-5. Punch Adjustment screen ...................................................................................... D-54
3-8-6. Calibration Sensor Position Adjustment screen ...................................................... D-55
3-8-7. Punch Data Setting screen ..................................................................................... D-56
3-8-8. Recording Head Parameter Setting screens .......................................................... D-57
3-8-9. Drum Parameters Input screen .............................................................................. D-73
3-8-10. Miscellaneous Data Setting screen ........................................................................ D-81
3-8-11. Recording Head Data Control screen ..................................................................... D-82
3-8-12. Clamp Weight Setting screen ................................................................................. D-83
3-8-13. Cassette Data Setting screen ................................................................................. D-84
3-8-14. Password Setting screen ........................................................................................ D-87
3-9. Machine Option Selecting screen .................................................................................. D-88
3-10. I/O Reading and Writing screen ..................................................................................... D-89
3-11. Initialization screens ...................................................................................................... D-90
3-11-1. Data initialization .................................................................................................... D-91
3-11-2. Brand Name Selection screen ................................................................................ D-92
3-11-3. Consumable Timer screen ..................................................................................... D-93
3-12. Special Action screen .................................................................................................... D-95
3-12-1. Machine Initialization screen .................................................................................. D-96
3-12-2. Pickup Clamp, Trailing Edge Clamp Attachment screen ......................................... D-97
3-12-3. ORG-EZ Check screen .......................................................................................... D-98
3-12-4. Front Sensor Offset screen .................................................................................... D-99
3-12-5. Centering Test screen ............................................................................................D-100
3-12-6. Adjust Displacement Sensor screen ...................................................................... D-101
3-12-7. NVRAM Backup screen .........................................................................................D-102
3-12-8. NVRAM Data Restore screen ............................................................................... D-103
3-12-5. Register Test screen .............................................................................................. D-104
3-13. Special Action 2 screens .............................................................................................. D-105
3-13-1. Machine Initialization screen .................................................................................D-106
3-13-2. Balancer Testing screen ........................................................................................ D-107
3-13-3. Mail Testing screen ................................................................................................D-108
3-13-4. Auto Loader Testing screen ...................................................................................D-109
3-13-5. Plate Pad Unit Testing screen ................................................................................D-111
3-13-6. Interleaf Pad Unit Testing screen ...........................................................................D-112
iv PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
3-13-7. Multi Auto Loader Testing screen ...........................................................................D-113
E. Reference
1. Sequence explanations (PT-R4300) .......................................................................................... E-1
1-1. Initialization sequence ...................................................................................................... E-1
1-2. Main processing of initializing ........................................................................................... E-5
1-3. Processing of trans pass initializing .................................................................................. E-6
1-4. Processing of punch sequence ........................................................................................ E-7
1-5. Processing of winding sequence ...................................................................................... E-8
1-6. Discharge sequence ...................................................................................................... E-12
1-7. Drumhigh speed rotating sequence ................................................................................ E-14
1-8. Auto Balance sequence .................................................................................................. E-17
2. Sequence explanations (PT-R4000II) ...................................................................................... E-18
2-1. Initialization sequence .................................................................................................... E-18
2-2. Main processing of initializing ......................................................................................... E-20
2-3. Processing of trans pass initializing ................................................................................ E-21
2-4. Processing of punch sequence ...................................................................................... E-22
2-5. Processing of winding sequence .................................................................................... E-23
2-6. Discharge sequence ...................................................................................................... E-25
2-7. Drumhigh speed rotating sequence ................................................................................ E-27
2-8. Auto Balance sequence .................................................................................................. E-28
3. Parts layout and sensor position .............................................................................................. E-29
3-1. Front side of main unit .................................................................................................... E-29
3-2. Back side of main unit .................................................................................................... E-31
3-3. Left side of main unit ...................................................................................................... E-33
3-4. Rite side of main unit ...................................................................................................... E-35
3-5. Top side of main unit ....................................................................................................... E-37
3-6. Transport unit of main unit .............................................................................................. E-39
3-7. Plate side alignment of main unit .................................................................................... E-40
3-8. Clamp arm unit of main unit ............................................................................................ E-40
3-9. Recording Head unit ....................................................................................................... E-41
3-10. RCP2 board ................................................................................................................... E-43
3-11. RB31 board .................................................................................................................... E-45
3-12. SPX32 board .................................................................................................................. E-46
3-13. LTB16 board ................................................................................................................... E-47
3-14. PIO-PTR4(2) board ........................................................................................................ E-48
3-15. con-ptr4 board ................................................................................................................ E-52
3-16. Laser Head CPU board .................................................................................................. E-55
3-17. Laser Head Driver board ................................................................................................ E-57
3-18. Laser Head Mother board .............................................................................................. E-58
3-19. Laser Head Relay board ................................................................................................. E-60
3-20. Laser Diode Array Block ................................................................................................. E-64
4. Maintenance software RMLight4 .............................................................................................. E-66
4-1. Outline ............................................................................................................................ E-66
4-2. Requirements ................................................................................................................. E-66
4-3. Terminal setting .............................................................................................................. E-67
4-4. Installation of RMLight4 .................................................................................................. E-67
4-5. Connecting the terminal to the main unit ........................................................................ E-67
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL v

Contents
4-6. Procedure for downloading the PT-R firmware ............................................................... E-68
4-7. Procedure for downloading the PT-R panel data ............................................................. E-71
4-8. Uploading or downloading the PT-R’s machine specific value data ................................. E-74
4-8-1. Data types that can be uploaded or downloaded ..................................................... E-74
4-8-2. Procedure for data upload ....................................................................................... E-76
4-8-3. Procedure for data download ................................................................................... E-79
5. Power supplies and interlocks .................................................................................................. E-82
F. Error list
1. Error list (PT-R4300 : Ver.1.0) ..................................................................................................... F-1
2. Error list (PT-R4000 : Ver.3.0X , PT-R4000II : Ver4.0X) ............................................................. F-18
3. Error list (PT-R4100 : Ver.1.0X) ................................................................................................ F-34
G. Supplement
1. Punch List ................................................................................................................................ G-1
2. Recommend parts list ............................................................................................................ G-12
vi PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

§ On safety
§ On Safety
1. On Safety
1-1.When using the PT-R4XXX
• The following descriptions of safety precautions and operating

procedures are intended solely for the benefit of operators and
other personnel using the PT-R4XXX for its originally intended
purposes.
• The intended purposes and usage of the PT-R4XXX are those
described in Introductory Note. We shall not be held liable or
responsible for any damage, losses or malfunctions caused by
using or operating this machine in ways other than those
described in this manual.
• To the best of our knowledge, the various parameters and data
presented in this manual are reliable under the conditions
described. However, we shall not be held legally responsible for
the accuracy or relevance of this information. Furthermore, we
assume no responsibility or liability for any damage or
consequential and/or indirect losses resulting from any accident or
malfunction that might occur during the operation of the PT-
R4XXX.
• The PT-R4XXX was designed and manufactured with special
attention to safety considerations. However, it is impossible either
to eliminate all potential sources of danger from such products or
to anticipate all possible hazards and misuses. It is therefore
critical that you both familiarize yourself, all your operators and
other relevant personnel with all of the noted precautions,
countermeasures and related procedures, and take maximum
care when operating the PT-R4XXX.
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL § -1

§ On Safety
1-2.Precautions for electricity
1) Power supply
• Before connecting the PT-R4XXX power cable to your
switchboard, be sure to confirm that the power supply switch is
turned OFF.
• When the PT-R4300 is installed overseas, perform proper
grounding in accordance with the regulations of the country of
installation.
• If the power for the entire unit cannot be supplied, connect an
exclusive ground wire for the auto loader.
• The PT-R4XXX incorporates high-voltage circuits. Touching any
part of your body to such circuits can cause serious injury and
even death. BE EXTREMELY CAREFUL not to touch these
circuits, especially with wet hands.
• Whenever you install the PT-R4XXX in Japan, be sure to use the
power cable provided with it.
• Power cables are not provided for machines to be shipped abroad.
Depending on the country of installation, be sure to use a power
cable which can handle AC300V or an equivalent rated voltage
and has 3 cable leads of at least 2.0 mm2.
• However, if the diameter of each wire rod is 4 mm or larger, the
power supply cable cannot be connected to the power connecting
section of the PT-R4300.
2) Switching operation of power supply

• Before turning ON the power supply switch to the PT-R4XXX, be
sure to confirm the following:
1) The accessories (e.g. supply cassette) are properly mounted
and connection areas (e.g. supply unit) are connected properly
and securely.
2) Doors are completely closed, and covers are attached properly.
• Be sure to turn OFF the power supply and fix the power supply
switch using a padlock etc. before you start maintenance, cleaning
or repairs. Switching the power switch to “ I ” turns the power ON
and switching it to “ O ” turns the power OFF.
§ -2 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

§ On Safety
PT-R4300
ON
ON
Power supply switch

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON OFF
Power supply switch

PT-R4000/PT-R4000II

§ On Safety
3) Power cables
• If you find anything that might indicate power cable damage such
as unusual deformations or surface flaws, immediately turn OFF
the power switch and the circuit breaker of the switchboard, and
contact our nearest dealer or branch office.
• Do not place heavy objects or articles with sharp edges anywhere
on the power cable or forcefully pull at it.
PT-R4300
4) Processing after power failures

• When a power failure in external electric power occurs,
immediately turn OFF the circuit breaker of the switchboard and
the power switch of the PT-R4XXX.
• If a power failure, which is caused by a utility defect, occurs while
the safety interlock release key is being used, turn OFF the
switchboard breaker of the user’s site.
• Since the PT-R4300 is reset in concurrence with shutdown of the
power supply, turn ON the switchboard breaker, which has been
turned OFF, and perform a normal initialization after the power has
been restored.
• Be sure that nobody is touching the machine when you perform
initialization with the safety interlock release key ON.

§ On Safety
5) Interlocks
• To ensure operator safety, the PT-R4XXX is provided with a
variety of interlocking safety devices. Do not deactivate these
devices except when service engineers are performing
maintenance. Operating the PT-R4XXX when these safety
devices are inactive could result in severe injury and/or damage to
the equipment.
• If a cover is opened during exposure, the respective rollers stop
automatically. Always wait at least five seconds until the rollers
come to a complete stop before touching them.
• Turning ON the safety interlock release key shuts down the power
supply to the laser. However, be aware that power is still supplied
to the moving parts.
While these doors are open, releasing interlocks or performing

control or adjustment procedures other than those specified in this
manual will cause dangerous laser radiation exposure.
Door switch
Door interlock switch
PT-R4300/4100
Front cover interlock switch
Door switch
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
Front cover interlock switch
Door interlock switch
§ On Safety
Drum slow-down
software switch
Back side cover

interlock switch
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
Right side cover

interlock switch
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II

§ On Safety
6) Forced drum stop switch
• The PT-R4XXX is equipped with a forced drum stop switch that

allows you to stop the rotation of the drum in an emergency.
Do not use this switch during normal operation. this switch is only to
be used if the duum needed to be stopped in case of an emergency.
Forced drum stop switch
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300,PT-R4100)

§ On Safety
1-3.Precautions for equipment operation
• Do not turn on the PT-R4XXX’s power supply or start operation

until this manual has been thoroughly read and fully understood.
• All operators must wear appropriate work clothing.
Wear clothing that

will not become
caught in the machinery.
Hands are wet.

Long hair is tied
back.
Cuffs are open.
A necktie or necklace
is dangling.
Cuffs are buttoned.
Unneeded things
are carried.
Safety boots are
Excessively long pants.
recommended.
Slippers or sandals.
• Whenever you notice anything abnormal, report it immediately to

your supervisor or manager so appropriate measures can be
taken quickly.
• The PT-R4XXX cannot be guaranteed to operate continuously
without an operator in attendance. In order to immediately deal
with emergencies, an operator trained for initial corrective action
should always be in attendance.
• Training courses for Dainippon Screen’s products are provided at
any time at the nearest Dainippon Screen Technical Center. We
recommend that all users of the PT-R4XXX receive proper training
before using the equipment. Please contact our branch office or
the dealer for an application for the training courses.
• When the PT-R4XXX0 is not operated for a long period of time, be
sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the switchboard.
• During operation, do not open any protective covers attached to
the equipment. Opening these covers may be hazardous to the
safety of operators and other persons working in the vicinity, and
may also hinder the equipment’s normal functioning.
• Never allow open flames, spark sources, etc. in the vicinity of the
PT-R4XXX.
• Do not operate the PT-R4XXX if you feel in any way sick,
nauseous or unsteady.

§ On Safety
1-4.Maintenance
• Maintenance must always be performed by specially trained and

authorized maintenance engineers.
• Never turn the machine’s power on while maintenance engineers
are working on the equipment.

§ On Safety
1-5.Caution labels on the equipment
• Caution labels are attached to potentially hazardous parts or areas

of this machine for the safety of the operators and maintenance
staff.
• Be sure to observe the following precautions when you perform
operation or maintenance of the PT-R4XXX.
• Be sure to follow the instructions on these labels.
• If a label has faded or fallen off, replace it immediately with a new
one.
• Do not peel or tear off labels or erase their markings.
• For replacement labels, contact your nearest Dainippon Screen
dealer or branch office.
• Do not block the visibility of labels by covering or placing anything
in front of them.
Label indicating the power supply specifications of the PT-R4XXX.
(PT-R4000/4000/4000II/4300/4100)
Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX complies with CDRH

Regulations. (for U.S.A. only)

§ On Safety
Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX is a Class 1 laser product.
(PT-R4000/4000/4000II/4300/4100)
Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX complies with FCC and

VCCIRules.
(PT-R4000/4000/4000II/4300/4100)
Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX complies with CE standards.
(PT-R4000/4000/4000II/4300/4100)

§ On Safety
Label indicating the class, power, and wavelength of laser beam. (n/
a in USA)
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)
Label indicating that this unit contains laser radiation.
(PT-R4000/4000/4000II/4300/4100)
Label showing the location of an ground terminal.
(PT-R4000/4000/4000II/4300/4100)
Label indicating the technical classification of the laser head (for

U.S.A. only).
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)

§ On Safety
Label calling attention to a nearby laser aperture.
(PT-R4000/4000/4000II/4300/4100)
Label warning that opening this cover may expose you to dangerous
laser radiation.
(PT-R4000/4000/4000II/4300/4100)
Label warning that this equipment contains a high leakage current

and mustbe grounded.
(PT-R4000/4000/4000II/4300/4100)

§ On Safety
1-6.Using the laser safety
Notices concerning the safe use of the unit.

These must be following to avoid injuries and accidents.
1) LASER SAFETY
This PT-R4XXX is certified as a Class4 laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation
Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health
and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the recorder does not
produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the PT-R4XXX is completely confined
with in protective housings and external covers. The laser beam can
not escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
2) CDRH REGULATIONS
The Center for Devices and Radiological Heanh (CDRH) of the U.S.
Food and Drug Adminstration implemented regulations for laser
pfoducts on August 2.1976.These regulations apply to laser products
manufactured from August1. 1976.
Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United
States.
The label shown in the figure indicates compliance with the CDRH
regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the
United States.
Ordinafy operation will not release laser radiation into the work
environment. Do not remove any of the safety covers for this product
or release any of its interlock switches.
Laser radiation may cause injuries to your body (e. g. weakened
eyesight, skin cancer).
3) For European model

PT-R4XXX is classified as a CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT in
accordance with IEC Pub 1. 1 825 1984.
Ordinary operation will not release laser radiation into the work
environment. Do not remove any of the safey covers for this product
or release any of its interlock switches.
Laser radiation may cause injuries to your body (e. g. weakened
eyesight, skin cancer).

§ On Safety
• INTERNAL LASER REGULATIONS
Max. radiation power------------------------------32W
Wavelength---------------------------------------830nm
The rating for the semi-conductor laser is 1W X32 pieces and is
classified as Class 1.
• You will not be exposed to laser beam radiation during ordinary

operation.
• If the doors shown in the figure below are opened, the interlock
switches located in the respective positions (six places) are
activated to intercept laser beams.

§ On Safety

§ On Safety

§ On Safety
1-7.Precautions during transport and installation
1) Transport and installation

The PT-R4XXX’s transport and installation must always be handled
by engineers and contractors authorized by Dainippon Screen. We
shall bear no responsibility whatever for any equipment breakage,
damage or malfunctions caused by or during transport or installation
performed by anyone other than the above specified personnel.
Whenever the PT-R4XXX must moved, transferred or re-installed,
please entrust all procedures to our nearest branch office or dealer.
(See list at the end of this manual.)
2) Installation environment
Installing the equipment in the following locations may cause
machine damage or malfunctions. Do not install the machine
anywhere that is exposed or subject to:
• direct sunlight;
• electrical interference such as voltage fluctuations or line noise;
• sudden, drastic temperature changes;
• a nearby heat source;
• high temperature and/or humidity (adequate temperature:21°C to
25°C (73.4°F ± 3.6), adequate humidity: 40 to 70 %RH);
• excessive dirt, grime or dust;
• strong and/or persistent vibration;
• dew condensation;
• nearby flame or spark sources;
• corrosive chemical vapors, mists or gasses;
• limsy or uneven flooring.
High Temperature and humidity Vibration

§ On Safety
3) Grounding connection
• Be sure to connect the ground line before connecting the power
supply, since leakage current is over 3.5 mA in the PT-R4XXX.
• To help prevent electric shocks, be sure to independently ground
the AC outlet in the specified manner (grounding resistance: 100Ω
or less). Wire the power separately from other equipment.
• The cable connecting the machine to the outlet should have
sufficient capacity to prevent voltage drops in either the steady-
state current or the starting current.
To forestall other possible problems in the PT-R4XXX’s electrical
system, always use fuses and circuit breakers that match its
specifications.
Please ask your electrical contractor or authorized personnel to
help select appropriate parts and wiring configurations.
• When the PT-R4300 is installed overseas, perform proper
grounding in accordance with the regulations of the country of
installation.
• If the power for the entire unit cannot be supplied, connect an
exclusive ground wire for the auto loader.
4) Power supply
• Please entrust all wiring, connections and other electrical work to
an authorized electrician.
• The PT-R4XXX requires a dedicated power supply that should not
serve any other machines or devices.
• Always provide circuit breakers for the power supply switchboard.
• The permitted fluctuation range in the power supply voltage is ±
10%.
If you anticipate a greater range of fluctuation than this, stabilize
the power supply with an appropriate voltage regulator.
• Be sure to install the ground leakage breaker in the power supply
switchboard.
• Use the ground leakage breaker for 5 mA leakage (dark current) in
accordance with the rated current of the PT-R4XXX.
• Check that the ground leakage breaker turns ON before starting
operation after weekends or vacations.
• However, if the diameter of each wire rod is 4 mm or larger, the
power supply cable cannot be connected to the power connecting
section of the PT-R4300.

A. Outline
A.Outline
1. Introduction
1-1.For maintenance personnel
1) Basic cautions
· Before doing any electrical work, be sure to turn OFF the power supply
switch and fix the power OFF status by using a padlock, etc., in order to
prevent accidents such as electrical shock.
· Pay attention to your surroundings when working with this unit.
· Do not touch any moving parts during operation.
2) About laser safety

· Make sure the interlock safety devices are all in place when the user is
operating this unit.
· Tell the user not to attempt to modify the laser for any reason.
· All responsibility for any changes in safety standards due to changes to
the class of laser used are the responsibility of the party who altered the
machine.
For example, if the user has altered the laser, the user bears
responsibility. If the CS department of a branch office altered the laser,
the CS department bears responsibility.
3) Cautions about chemicals

· Be sure to handle lens cleaners and isopropyl alcohol properly.
4) Cautions concerning static electricity

· Use an anti-static wristband and anti-static bags to prevent the buildup of
static electricity when handling or transporting parts such as circuit
boards or laser diodes, which can easily be damaged by static electricity.
5) About the laser diode

· The PT-R4XXX uses a high-output semiconductor laser. If procedures
and safety guidelines are not followed correctly, the radiation from the
laser diode may injure your eyes. Note that the laser diode can be
damaged by static electricity.
The laser diode is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Damage to

it from static electricity may result in a shortening of the laser’s
service life.
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL A-1

A.Outline
6) Safety measures to prevent static electricity buildup
· Before turning on the power supply, always make sure the power supply
is properly grounded.
· Wear an anti-static wristband to avoid any buildup of static electricity on
your body.
· Wear semiconductor laser radiation shaded safety goggles (glasses) to
protect your eyes.
7) Safety and static electricity buildup prevention equipment

· To maintain safety and prevent the excessive buildup of static electricity,
make sure you have the following tools.
· Anti-static wristband.
Semiconductor laser radiation shaded safety goggles (glasses)
Laser type : Laser Diode
Wavelength : 790 to 850
NOTE!
In the PT-R4300, PT-R4000, and PT-R4000II, there are no operations
that require the use of safety goggles.
A-2 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

A.Outline
1-2.Laser maintenance and safety
1) Under normal conditions

When all of the metal plates encasing the PT-R4XXX are in place, the
entire machine can be thought of as a single area. Anything within that
area is within the laser work area, while anything outside it is outside the
laser work area.
All of the metal plates are fitted with interlock devices that shut off
power to the laser if the plates are removed, preventing the laser from
turning on unexpectedly. This means that only the mildest laser safety
standards, Class 1, are required.
2) While performing maintenance with metal plates removed

After removing the covers and disabling the interlocks, the entire room in
which the PT-R4XXX is housed should be considered a laser work area.
This means that laser safety standards for CLASS 4 units must be
followed.
NOTE!
In the PT-R4300, PT-R4000, and PT-R4000II, there are no exposure
operations that are performed while the metal plates are removed
and the interlocks are released.
3) When working with the laser and related parts

When focusing or optically adjusting the laser, follow the rules indicated
below.
· Do not bring any flammable objects into the laser work area.
· Do not place any objects with a reflective surface near the path of
the laser beam. (e.g. rings, watches, glossy or shiny plated Allen
wrenches)
· In order to shrink your pupils, make the room as bright as possible.
· Use semiconductor laser radiation safety goggles (glasses).
· Display a sign limiting entry to the laser area to those working on
the laser, in order to prevent accidents to other personnel.
NOTE!
In the PT-R4300, PT-R4000, and PT-R4000II, no laser operations are
performed while the power is being supplied.

A.Outline
1-3.Basic information
1) Not if or when, but which . . .

Dainippon Screen has developed the CTP products and introduced them to
the market in 1999. These products have gained wide market acceptance
because of their superior quality as well as their user-friendliness, and we
have shipped more than 1100 of the PT-R8000 and PT-R4000 units within
two years.
For the PT-R4000 units, not only is there a thermal CTP market in Japan
but the sale ratio of these units has also been significantly expanded over
seas.
The PT-R4000 unit that is compatible with the SM-74CD sheet-fed press
that is used in the package industry in U.S. is needed in order to expand
product sales. Therefore, we have improved the specifications of the
PT-R4000II and developed the PT-R4300 advanced thermal 4-page plate
recorder.
2) The perfect recorder for thermal

Though CTP started with light-sensitive plates, thermal plates are clearly
the up and coming media of choice. They offer crisper, sharper dots,
don’t require darkroom processing, and support longer run lengths.
PlateRite 8600 is the perfect recorder to reap all the benefits of thermal
imaging.
3) Reap the thermal advantage with PlateRite 4300

While visible-light CTP requires a dark room or special processing,
thermal plates are imaged with heat rather than light so they can be
handled under yellow or ultraviolet-filtered white light. PlateRite 4300’s
advanced optical and clamping system images thermal plates with
superior productivity, versatility and ease of use. Its advanced plate
securing and auto-balance features allow for extremely fast rotation
speeds and high productivity. And PlateRite 4300’s ease of use,
automation and user friendly interface make it a snap to use.
4) Try speed
We’ve broken the mold. Our external drum spins not just a little faster,
but many times faster than conventional external drum plate recorders.
PlateRite 4300’s plate securing system allows much faster spin speeds.
Automatic variable positioning of trailing edge clamps means that a wide
range of plate sizes can be accomodated automatically.

A.Outline
5) Fast external drum with multi-channel recording
Because of the level of heat required to image thermal plates, the light
source has to either have a lot of power or be very close to the plate.
External drum recorders can position the light source close to the plate,
but up to now, drum speeds have been limited by the difficulty of
securing the plates well enough to tolerate higher rotation speeds.
But now we’ve built on our expertise in external drum recording and
precision clamping technologies to bring you a 32-channel external drum
recorder with a difference - the drum spins many times faster than
conventional external drum plate recorders. That’s how we can offer
thermal plate output productivity of 20 plates per hour at 2,400 dpi.
An advanced, automated, light-weight clamping and vacuum system is
the secret of PlateRite 4300’s superior speed and productivity. This
system keeps plates fully secure even at the PlateRite 4300’s rapid
rotation speeds. As the drum spins at up to 1000 rpms, the laser images in
32-channels creating the ultimate in thermal productivity.
6) Auto-balance to fit different plate sizes

The PlateRite 4300 is designed to fit smoothly into your workflow. Auto-
balance enables recording of different sized plates with no manual
adjustment. All you do is input or select the type of plate you want to use
and the PlateRite 8600 automatically makes the necessary adjustments to
create perfect drum balance for each plate size you use. It can handle a
wide variety of plate sizes, from 370 x 500mm (14.6" x 19.7") all the way
up to 940 x 1,160 mm (37" x 45.6"), making it easy to tailor plate output
to the job at hand.
7) Automatic internal punch

The PlateRite 4300 can even punch your plates for you just before
imaging, with your choice of optional internal punch block systems that
provide exceptional repeatability. You can mount four punch blocks and
select punches based on plate sizes and press type. A variety of suitable
punches are available. The PlateRite 4300 can change between two
punch configurations automatically as required by the automatic media
settings.
8) Inline system to extend automation

An inline system can be configured which fully automates the stages
involved from plate loading and exposing, through to developing.
The SA-L4300 single-cassette auto loader can hold up to 100 plates. It
automatically detects interleaves between the plates and discharges them.
Also, each plate is secured on its back side when being transferred,
therefore, the sensitive emulsion side of the plate is not damaged.

A.Outline
The MA-L4300 multi-cassette auto loader contains three cassettes and
each cassette can hold up to 100 plates. It achieves a continuous operation
of multiple jobs that require the use of different sizes of plate.
The AT-T4000 transfer system that bridges the PT-R4300 unit and the
processor is also provided as an option of this system lineup.

A.Outline
2. System overview
2-1.System setup diagram
F-PIF
Trueflow
Taiga SPACE
HQ-510
The PT-R4300 is connected to the host computer by means of a F-PIF cable. For Macintosh
systems, page files (PS data) created by software on the computer are converted to bit map data
using a software RIP such as HQ-510, and transmitted on-line to the PT-R 4300.
2-2.Recommended configurations
[Trueflow]
· Ver. 2.01
[Taiga SPACE]
· Ver. 4.3 Rev.k or higher (T-RIP600)
[HQ-510]
· Ver. 5.5
[AD-810]
· Ver. 1.03
For details on the specifications of each RIP, refer to the respective installation
guides.

A.Outline
3. Overall configuration chart and part names
3-1.Front view of the main unit
Operation door Operation panel
Front cover
External cover filter
3-2.Back view of the main unit
Forced drum stop switch Punch debris outlet

Rear outlet
Peripheral
device
connectors
Vacuum hose connector
Attachment hook for punch

debris receptacle
Rear cover
Power cable connector

A.Outline
3-3.Plate conveyor view of the main unit
Positioning label
Operation door
Ejection guide
Plate conveyor rollor Ejection table
Power switch
Plate table Positioning label
3-4.Peripheral device connectors
F-PIF connector(serial)
F-PIF connector(image)
Service connector
Blower control connec-

tor
AT unit connector
Power supply connector
for blower

A.Outline
3-5.Inside of front cover
Recording drum
Recording head unit
Front cover attachment hooks
3-6.Inside of rear cover
Cleaning roller
Punching unit(Standard)
Rear cover attachment hooks
Recording drum
Rear cover attachment hooks

A.Outline
4. Electrical wiring
4-1.Block diagram (PT-R4300/4000II/4000)
C O N -P T R 4
P IO -P T R 4 (2 )
or
P IO -P T R 4
PC R S -2 3 2 C
A C S e rv o
D r iv e r
R S -2 3 2 C
RCP2
R S -2 3 2 C Cal
B o a rd
Laser
Head
U n it
P IF 2
RB31
HOST
CPU
DRV 4pc
P IF 1 SPX
32
R S -2 3 2 C Panel

A.Outline
Block diagram (PT-R4100)
CON-PTR4
PIO-PTR4(2)
PC RS-232C
AC Servo
Driver
RS-232C
RCP2
RS-232C Cal
Board
16ch
Laser
Head
PIF2 Unit
LTB16
HOST
CPU
DRV 2pc
PIF1
RS-232C Panel

A.Outline
4-2.Function of board
1) RCP2 board
The RCP2 board contains the CPU and its peripheral devices. It also
controls the secondary-scanning stepping motor. The secondary-
scanning stepping motor can operate in two different modes; the
synchronous mode (in which the secondary-scanning stepping motor
operates synchronously with the primary-scanning servo motor when the
image is being exposed) and high speed positioning mode (in which the
secondary-scanning stepping motor moves to a position at a high speed
independent of the operation of the primary-scanning servo motor). The
RCP2 board also contains the devices to implement various adjustments
synchronously with the signal from the encoder and generate various
timing signals for exposing image on plate.
2) RB31 board
Receives the image data via the F-PIF. When the board receives enough
data to rotate the drum once, it transmits the data to the high-power laser
recording head along with the standard signal for exposure. The board
also contains the devices for using the machine setting test patterns and
applying automatic burn-out to plate.
3) SPX32 board
This board helps compensate for image inclination during spiral
exposure. This board allows you to switch PIF signal transmissions
between 8 and 16 bit signals.
4) LTB16 board (PT-R4100)

Receives the image data via the F-PIF. When the board receives enough
data to rotate the drum once, it transmits the data to the high-power laser
recording head along with the standard signal for exposure. The board
also contains the devices for using the machine setting test patterns and
applying automatic burn-out to plate.
This board helps compensate for image inclination during spiral
exposure. This board allows you to switch PIF signal transmissions
between 8 and 16 bit signals.
Detect the braking of signal cable to recording head.
5) PIO-PTR4(2) board / PIO-PTR4 board

Controls the primary-scanning servo motor, each sensor and actuator.
The control section for the primary-scanning servo motor operates in one
of two modes; the drum rotation mode (at high speed) used while
exposing the image and the drum positioning mode (at low speed) used

A.Outline
when loading and unloading a plate on the drum. The I/O control section
controls each stepping motor (which is used to transfer a plate), the input
signals (for switches and sensors) and the output signals (for driving
solenoids and punch system).
5) CON-PTR4 board
Relays the signals to and from each sensor and actuator. This board also
converts the actuator’s control signal into 24V.
6) Laser head CPU board

Equipped with circuits for controlling the high-power laser diode. This
board also controls the zoom and focus of the recording head, and the
temperature of the Peltier unit.
7) Laser head CPU3 board (PT-R4100)

Equipped with circuits for controlling the high-power laser diode. This
board also controls the zoom and focus of the recording head, and the
temperature of the Peltier unit.
Detect the braking of signal cable to recording head.
8) Laser head driver board

Feeds back the light intensity output from the high-power laser to the
laser head CPU board.

A.Outline
Regarding how to check the braking of a recording head data cable.
It is added that new function to detect the braking of image data cable between LTB16 PCB
and recording head at PT-R8100/4100.
In this function, parity data is made on LTB16 PCB and it is sent with image data to Head CPU.
Head CPU calculates parity again based on image data and detects the braking as compared with
parity data from LTB16 PCB.
Image data (LD0 to LD15)
LTB16 board Parity line (CAL) Head CPU3 board
Clock for checking (DOTCK)

Compare a parity calculated
by image data on Head CPU
Image data with data sent by parity line.
cable
Calculation method of parity data

1 routine of the braking check is done with each 16ch beam data for 2 clock in 1 line exposing.
(2 clock data is one pair to check as 1 routine)
Parity data is added as 1 bit. Due to detect the braking of parity line as well, Head CPU calculates
16ch beam data by sharing 2 times of upper 8 bit and lower 8 bit.
Add
Selector

8bit
1bit
CAL_A*/CAL_B*
0 or 1
DOTCK
Parity for 0-7ch beam Parity for 0-7ch beam

data in first clock data in third clock
CAL_A1 CAL_B2 CAL_A3 CAL_B4 ---
Parity for 8-15ch beam Parity for 0-7ch beam

data in second clock data in 4th clock
CAL_A1=LD0+LD1...........+LD7 (first clock)

CAL_B2=LD8+LD9...........+LD15(second clock)
CAL_A3=LD0+LD1...........+LD7 (third clock)
CAL_B4=LD8+LD9...........+LD15(4th clock)
Head CPU calculates parity with beam data again.

CPU judges the braking as compared with parity data that comes from LTB16 PCB.
A.Outline
How to judge the braking
1)In case data of CAL_A does not correspond, it is judged one of 0-7ch wire is broken.
Exee6 : Detect the braking at 0-7ch
2)In case data of CAL_B does not correspond, it is judged one of 8-15ch wire is broken.
Exee7 : Detect the braking ar 8-15ch.
3)In case of braking DOTCK line.

If Check-clock is broken, braking check function does not work so impossible to detect error.
But as Recording Head CPU can not detect Check-clock, it is judged abnormal situation
included a braking of data cable.
In this case an error is displayed as below.
Exee8 : Detect the braking at 0-15ch or DOTCK line
4)In case of braking CAL(Parity) line.

If CAL(Parity) line is broken, braking check function does not work.
An error of braking of 0-7ch and 8-15ch mutually occures as a result of parity check.
If RCP gets error of them mutually, it is judged abnormal situation included a braking of data
cable.
In this case, an error is displayed as below.
Exee8 : Detect the braking at 0-15ch or DOTCK line.

A.Outline
5. Specifications
5-1.Basic specifications (2002.10.15)

A.Outline

A.Outline
6. Comparison of PT-R4300, PT-R4000II,PT-R4000 and PT-R4100

A.Outline
Item P T-R 4300 P T-R 4100 P T-R 4000/4000Ⅱ

Ⅱ C om patibility
S upplied from the m ain unit S upplied from the m ain unit
P ow er supply for for the S A -L/M A -L4300（A n for the S A -L4100（A n R equired independent pow er
C om m on to 4300/4100
peripheraldevices individualpow er supply is individualpow er supply is supply
also possible.） also possible.）
B low er unit B low er unit B low er unit C om m on to all(*2)

B low er unit
U 1250016-00 U 1250016-00 U 1250016-00
R egistration punch Tw o-pin type Tw o-pin type Tw o-pin type C om m on to all(*2)
O ptionalpunch M A X 4 units M A X 4 units M A X 4 units C om m on to all(*2)
Transfer unit O ne roller added O ne roller added C om m on to 4300/4100
K ey S W for
A dded A dded N one C om m on to 4300/4100
m aintenance
V acuum pressure A nalog type A nalog type A nalog type C om m on to all(*2)
U nit sensor U 1254005-00 U 1254005-00 U 1254005-00
D irect opening m echanism D irect opening m echanism D irect opening m echanism
C om m on to 4300/4100
D oor interlock sw itch installed installed uninstalled
U 1254054-00 U 1254054-00 4-64007002-00
C A N type C A N type C A N type C om m on to all(*1)
LD
U 1150073-00 U 1150073-00 U 1150073-00
A C servo m otor A C servo m otor A C servo m otor C om m on to
D rum rotation m otor
100028263V 00 152125 152125 4000/4000II/4100
D rum rotation m otor A C servo pack A C servo pack A C servo pack C om m on to
driver 100028262V 00 152124 152124 4000/4000II/4100
Registration punch P TR 50-1 P TR 50-1 P TR 50 C om m on to 4300/4100
(H) 70585537-11 70585537-11 70585537-10 (*3)
Registration punch P TR 51-1 P TR 51-1 P TR 51 C om m on to 4300/4100
(A) 70585538-11 70585538-11 70585538-10 (*3)
S A -L/M A -L4300 〇 × ×
A uto S A -L/M A -L4000ⅡⅡ × × 〇U sable (for P T -R 4000II)
Incom patible
loader S A -L/M A -L4000 × × 〇U sable (for P T -R 4000)
S A -L4100 × 〇U sable (for P T -R 4100) ×
*1:C om m on to P T-R 4300,4000,000II,4100,8000,8000II and 8100

*2:C om m on to P T-R 4300,4000,4000II and 4100
*3:A s the P T-R 4300 supports the 12 m m clam ps,each punch for hook is now positioned 0.8 m m
closer to the plate edge side.
The registration punches for the P T-R 4300 are upw ardly com patible and can be used w ith
the P T-R 4000 and P T-R 4000II.
Item P T -R 4300 P T -R 4100 P T -R 4000/4000Ⅱ Ⅱ C om patibility

C lam p pin unit(H ) C lam p pin unit(H ) C lam p pin unit(H )
Incom patible(*1)
U 1254061-00 U 1254061-00 U 1254059-00
C lam p pin unit
C lam p pin unit(A ) C lam p pin unit(A ) C lam p pin unit(A )
Incom patible(*1)
U 1254062-00 U 1254062-00 U 1254060-00
S tandard:15 m m S tandard:15 m m Leading edge clam p
P artially com patible
U 1254046-00x2 U 1254046-00x2 U 1254046-00x6
D rum area
Leading edge clam p U 1254058-00x4 U 1254058-00x4 (R efer to the illustration.)
O ption:12 m m O ption:12 m m
Incom patible
100030544V 00 100030544V 00
P late stopper unit P late stopper unit P late stopper unit
P late stopper S tan 15 m m U 1254063-00 S tan 15 m m U 1254063-00 U 1254063-00 *2
O pti12 m m 100030546V 00 O pti12 m m 100030546V 00
*1:C om m on to both the 15 m m clam p type and 12 m m clam p type of the P T-R 4300
*2:The P T-R 4300 (15 m m type),4000,and 4000II share a com m on plate stopper.

A.Outline
Item P T-R 4300 P T-R 4100 P T-R 4000/4000Ⅱ

Ⅱ C om patibility
U 1：5V /100W U 1:5V /75W U 1：5V /100W C om m on to all(*1)
150367 100030734V 00 150367
152119 100030735V 00 152119
U 3：-15V /75W U 3:-15V /50W U 3：-15V /75W C om m on to all(*1)
152119 100030735V 00 152119
100023567V 00 10002356V 00 151168
D C P ow er supply
U 5：24V /300W U 5:24V /300W U 5：24V /150W *2
100023567V 00 100023567V 00 152120
U 6：-5V /300W U 6:-5V /150W U 6：-5V /300W C om m on to all(*5)
100023568V 00 100030737V 00 151169
U 7：24V /100W *2
152121
U 9：24V /30W U 9:24V /30W *3
10002244V 00 100002244V 00
*1:C om m on to P T-R 4300,4000,and 4000II

*2:For the P T-R 4300,U 7 (24 V ) of the P T-R 4000/4000II has been rem oved and the pow er supply
capacity for U 5 (24V ) of it has been im proved.
*3:A dded to be used for interlock circuit
*4:C om pletely com patible,although the m odel(m anufacture) is different
*5:C om pletely com patible,although the m odel(m anufacture) is different (4300/4000II/4000)

A.Outline
Reference) Parts code of the leading edge clamp
PT-R4300 (standard 15 mm type)

U1254046-00
U1254058-00
Refer to the next pate.

PT-R4300/4100(optional 12 mm type)
100030544V00
NOTE! The leading edge clamps for the PT-R4000/4000II are the same as to those
for “U1254046-00” of the PT-R4300 (15 mm type).
Reference) Leading edge clamp and clamp pin unit

PT-R4000/4000II
Pin diameter : 3.5mm
15mm/12mm
15mm
8.925mm
PT-R4300/4100(15mm Type)
Pin diameter : 3mm
12mm
Cut
15mm
8.125mm
PTR4300/4100(12mmType)
Pin diameter : 3mm
12mm
Cut
12mm
8.125mm

A.Outline
Reference) Plate stopper unit
For 15 mm type
(PT-R4300/4000/4000II/4100)
For 12 mmtype
(PT-R4300/4100)

A.Outline
7. Restriction of the plate size for the PT-R4300/4000/4000II/4100
- When the ends of a plate reach the grooves for securing the trailing edge clamps on the drum, an
imaging failure may occur in the effective image area of the plate at the circled positions in the
figure below (each corner of the leading and trailing gripper margins). Therefore, the size of plate to
be used is restricted, as below. (Common restriction to any thickness of the plate)
Restricted plate sizes:
420 mm to 442 mm
702 mm to 722 mm
The plate size is restricted only in the secondary scanning direction and the size in the primary
scanning direction is not restricted.
- We have confirmed that none of those presses in the following list use plates with the restricted
sizes.
Unusable plate size: 420 mm to 442 mm

CLAMP DRUM
(LEC)
Unusable plate size: 702 mm to 722 mm
List of the presses that are compatible with the PT-R4000 (sheet-fed presses)
Manufacturer Model Plate size Print size Remarks
KINSEISHA Adast Dominant 515 521 416 520 370
515N.P.I 520 416 520 370
525P 521 416 520 370
715 650 530 650 475
725P 650 530 650 475
745P 650 530 650 475
AKIYAMA Hi-Ace28 228 700 550 690 490
428 700 550 690 490
528 700 550 690 490
628 700 550 690 490
Hi-Ace32 232 830 645 820 550
432 830 645 820 550
532 830 645 820 550
632 830 645 820 550
New-Bethtec28 BT-228 700 550 690 490
BT-428 700 550 690 490
BT-528 700 550 690 490
BT-628 700 550 690 490
New-Bethtec32 BT-232 830 645 820 575
BT-432 830 645 820 575
BT-532 830 645 820 575
BT-632 830 645 820 575
A.Outline
HAMADA HAMADA H234 324 492 317 438

775CDX-NP 467 394 454 345
800CD 515 394 512 345
800DX 515 394 512 345
800CDX 515 394 512 345
800DXA 515 394 512 345
880CDX 515 394 512 345
885CDX 515 394 512 345
900CDX 564 470 562 400
1100 670 520 650 470
2100 670 520 650 470
E47 467 394 454 345
E47S 467 394 454 345
E47-NP 467 394 454 345
E47S-NP 467 394 454 345
-52 510 400 500 350
-52NP 510 410 500 350
-58 564 470 562 405
-58NP 564 470 562 405
-66 650 550 650 483
-66NP 660 550 650 483
-52 510 400 505 350
-52NP 510 410 505 350
-52SF 510 410 505 350
-252 510 410 505 350
-252SF 510 410 505 350
RYOBI RYOBI 500 483 405 470 350
500K-NP 483 405 470 350
500N 483 405 470 350
500N-NP 483 405 470 350
520 510 400 505 350
522 510 400 505 350
522PF 510 400 505 350
524 510 400 505 350
530 520 415 515 360
532T 520 415 515 360
560 560 506 545 387
562T 560 506 545 387
640K 640 462
722 700 500
RYOBI 3304H 335 485 330 438
HEIDELBERG GM QM 46
GTO GTO 52 510 400 505 340
GTO Z52 510 400 505 340
GTO ZP52 510 400 505 340
GTO V52 510 400 505 340
GTO VP52 510 400 505 340
GTO F52 510 400 505 340
GTO FP52 510 400 505 340
MO MO 650 550 645 464
MO-S 650 550 645 464
MOZ 650 550 645 464
MOZP 650 550 645 464
MOZ-S 650 550 645 464
MOZP-S 650 550 645 464
MOV 650 550 645 464
MOVP 650 550 645 464
MOF 650 550 645 464
MOFP 650 550 645 464
72 72Z 724 615 720 510
72ZP 724 615 720 510
72V 724 615 720 510
72VP 724 615 720 510
72F 724 615 720 510
72FP 724 615 720 510
72S 724 615 720 510
72SP 724 615 720 510
Speedmaster 74 745 605 740 510
66 670 560 650 472
52 525 459 520 360

A.Outline
HASHIMOTO AF-S 483 405 480 312

AF-M 483 405 480 312
Multi-worker 650 550 650 475
GR-65 GR651 650 550 650 475
GR652 650 550 650 475
GR652-P 650 550 650 475
SA-55 SA551 564 470 550 392
SA551M 564 470 550 392
SA552 564 470 550 392
SA552M 564 470 550 392
SA552P 564 470 550 392
SA554 564 470 550 392
JA 570 506 560 390
JM 570 506 560 390
SA-65 SA651 670 560 650 475
SA652 670 560 650 475
SA652-1 670 560 650 475
SA652V 670 560 650 475
HM-653 650 550 650 475
KOBUNDO Grand Pass 52 510 400 500 350
52S 510 400 500 350
58 564 470 560 395
66
266
SAKURAI Oliver R-48 483 405 480 312
R-52 525 405 505 350
R-52E 525 420 520 360
R-252E 525 430 520 360
R-252EP 525 430 520 360
R-252RP 525 405 520 360
R-452ED 525 420 520 360
R-58 580 506 570 432
R-58E 580 525 570 432
R-258 580 506 570 420
R-258E 580 525 570 420
R-258EP 580 525 570 420
R-258RP 580 506 570 420
R-458ED 580 525 570 420
SAKURAI Oliver R-66 670 560 650 473
R-266E 670 560 650 473
R-266ED 680 560 650 473
R-266EP 670 560 650 473
R-266RP 670 560 650 473
R-466ED 680 560 650 473
R-72 725 610 710 500
R-272 725 610 710 500
R-272E 725 610 710 500
R-272ED 727 610 710 500
R-272EP 725 610 710 500
R-272RP 725 610 710 500
R-472ED 727 610 710 500
MITSUBISHI 0F-2 510 400
HEAVY 0F-4 510 400
INDUSTRIES 0F-5 510 400
0F-6 510 400
1E 1E-1 730 600
1E-2 730 600
1E-4 730 600
1F 1F-2 730 600
1F-4 730 600
1F-5 730 600
1F-6 730 600
100 102 730 600 720 510 t0.24ort0.3
104 730 600 720 510 t0.24ort0.3
105 730 600 720 510 t0.24ort0.3
106 730 600 720 510 t0.24ort0.3
2C 2C-1 830 645
2C-2 830 645
2D 2D-2 830 645
2D-4 830 645
2F 2F-2 830 645

A.Outline
2F-4 830 645

2F-5 830 645
2F-6 830 645
202 830 645 820 550 t0.24ort0.3
204 830 645 820 550 t0.24ort0.3
205 830 645 820 550 t0.24ort0.3
206 830 645 820 550 t0.24ort0.3
SHINOHARA Fuji Offset 52 510 410 500 350
52 P 510 410 500 350
52 510 410 500 350
52 510 410 500 350
58 595 506 570 410
65 650 550 640 460
65 P 650 550 640 460
66 670 560 650 473
66 670 560 650 470
66 P 670 560 650 470
66 670 560 650 470
66 KG 670 560 650 470
66 670 560 650 470
74 P 745 605 740 510 t0.3 or t0.24
SUMITOMO TC TC-32 830 645 810 550
HEAVY TP TP-26S 670 560 650 480
INDUSTRIES TP-32S 830 645 810 550
KOMORI Sprint25 S-25 670 560 650 468
S-225B 670 560 650 468
S-25C 670 560 650 468
Sprint26 S-26 670 560 650 470
S-226 670 560 650 470
S-226P 670 560 650 470
Sprint28 S-28 730 600 710 510
S-228 730 600 710 510
S-228P 730 600 710 510
Excel32 E-32 830 645 810 550
E-232 830 645 810 550
E-432 830 645 810 550
Lithrone20 L-220 530 400 510 340
L-420 530 400 510 340
L-520 530 400 510 340
KOMORI Lithrone20 L-620 530 400 510 340
Lithrone26 L-226 670 560 650 468
L-426 670 560 650 468
L-526 670 560 650 468
L-626 670 560 650 468
NewLithrone26 L-226 670 560 650 470
L-426 670 560 650 470
L-526 670 560 650 470
L-626 670 560 650 470
NewLithrone28 L-228 730 600 710 510
L-428 730 600 710 510
L-528 730 600 710 510
L-628 730 600 710 510
NewLithrone32 L-232 820 645 810 550
L-432 820 645 810 550
L-532 820 645 810 550
L-632 820 645 810 550
DAINIPPON Praktika PR00 510 400 505 340
INK AND PRZ00-E 510 400 505 340
CHEMICALS Roland200 R201T 0B 740 605 735 510
R202T 0B 740 605 735 510
R204T 0B 740 605 735 510
Favorit RZF0B 740 605 720 510
RVF0B 740 605 720 510
RFF0B 740 605 720 510
RFF0B 2-2-1 740 605 720 510
RFF0B 1-2-2 740 605 720 510
RSF0B 740 605 720 510

B. Installation
B.Installation
1. Installation
1-1.Information required for adjustments during installation

The specification of the standard of the leading grip margin and the trailing grip margin of PT-
R4000(II) and PT-R4300 is as follows.
The leading grip margin : 15mm
The trailing grip margin : 12mm
However, PT-R4300 can set the leading grip margin to 12mm as a factory option.
Before installing the machine, check the items listed below.

Manufacturer Plate width (W) Plate length (L) Plate thickness
Plate information
Punch system BACHER (single)/BACHER (double)/KOMORI/DS/PROTOCOL/
custom specification
Pitch of pin (P)
Edge of plate (E)
1 Leading grip margin (G1)
Trailing grip margin (G2)
Printing machine
Manufacturer and model
of printing machine
Printable area
Manufacturer Plate width (W) Plate length (L) Plate thickness
Plate information
Punch system BACHER (single)/BACHER (double)/KOMORI/DS/PROTOCOL/
custom specification
Pitch of pin (P)
Edge of plate (E)
2 Leading grip margin (G1)
Trailing grip margin (G2)
Printing machine
Manufacturer and model
of printing machine
Printable area
G2
Image
W
G1 E
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL B-1

B.Installation
1-2.Installation schedule
Installation: Approx. 3 hours
Wiring and connection: Approx. 1 hour
Machine stand-alone operation checks: Approx. 1 hour
Exposure adjustment: Approx. 3 hours
Check and adjustment of connection with host computer: Approx. 6 hours
Explanation of operation and safety: Approx. 2 hours
Punch attachment (option) (Approx. 2 hours)
Total: Approx. 2 days
B-2 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

B.Installation
2. Installation conditions
2-1.Dimensions of delivery path

A delivery path of at least the following dimensions is required when delivering the machine to
the installation site.
Width Depth Height
PT-R4000(II) 1760mm or more 1150mm or more 1185mm or more
PT-R4300/4100 1760mm or more 1150mm or more 1185mm or more
SA-L/MA-L4000 1405mm or more 1185mm or more 1020mm or more
SA-L/MA-L4300 1405mm or more 1230mm or more 1065mm or more
It is the above-mentioned dimensions at the standard installation. Refer to the following

page for the minimum dimensions of the machine.
2-2.Dimensions when delivering the machine

The following gives the dimensions of the main unit and the blower unit when delivering the
machine to the installation site.
Width(mm) Depth(mm) Height(mm) Weight(kg)
Main unit 1750 1140 1173 Approx. 630
PT-R4000(II)
Blower unit 600 429 361 Approx. 30
Main unit 1750 1140 1173 Approx. 645
PT-R4300/4100
Blower unit 600 429 361 Approx. 30
SA-L4000 1395 1175 1010 Approx. 340
Loading unit 1395 1175 1010 Approx. 375
Cassete Unit
MA-L4000
(Weight contains 1195 1175 695 Approx. 390
three cassettes.)
SA-L4300 1395 1217 1055 Approx. 340
Loading unit 1395 1217 1055 Approx. 375
Cassete Unit
MA-L4300
(Weight contains 1195 1175 695 Approx. 390
three cassettes.)
In order for PT-R4000/PT-R4000II to prevent parts becoming useless, the order method
of PT-R was as follows.
· In PT-R4000 stand alone, please order PT-R4000 and a coating apron (onerous).
However, when connecting PT-R4000 and SA-L/MA-L4000, it is not necessary to or-
der a coating apron part. (s/n:101 onward)
Since there are few parts which become unnecessary when connecting PT-R4300 SA-
L/MA-L4300, there are no above order forms.

B.Installation
The following gives the minimum dimensions of the machine when delivering the machine to the
installation site.
Width(mm) Depth(mm) Height(mm)
PT-R4000(II) 1750 905(*1) 1000(*2)
PT-R4300/4100 1750 905(*1) 1000(*3)
SA-L/MA-L4000 1330(*4) 1160(*4) 990(*4,5)
SA-L/MA-L4300 1130(*4) 1160(*4) 990(*4,6)
1) The depth given above is for when the front cover, the rear cover, the apron and the
hoist attachments are removed from the machine.
The depth when removing only the hoist attachments is as follows,
PT-R4000(II) : 1030mm
PT-R4300 : 1030mm
2) The height given above is for when the operation panel, the casters and adjustment
bolts are removed from the machine.
3) The height given above is for when the operation panel, the operation door, the
casters and adjustment bolts are removed from the machine.
4) When removing all covers around of the machine.
5) The height given above is for when the casters and adjustment bolts are removed
from the machine.
6) The height given above is for when the paper cover(top), the casters and adjust-
ment bolts are removed from the machine.
· When moving the machine, the main unit must not be tilted.
· There is a punch unit in the rear of a machine. Therefore, when you installate a PT-
R4000/4300, please do not remove a back cover.

B.Installation
1140
1750 1030
905
1178
1000
(mm)
Dimensional drawing of PT-R4000/PT-R4000II(At the time of installation)
1140
1750 1030
905
1000
1178
(mm)
Dimensional drawing of PT-R4300(At the time of installation)
600 429
361
Dimensional drawing of Blower unit (At the time of installation)

(Common to PT-R4000, PT-R4000II, PT-R4300 and PT-R4100)

B.Installation
1395 1217
1330 The paper cover 1160

(top)
1055
990
Dimensional drawing of SA-L4300/MA-L4300 Loading unit (At the time of installation)
1195 1175
1185
695
MA-L4300 Cassete unit (At the time of installation)

B.Installation
2-3.Dimensions when the machine is installed

· PT-R4000(II)
Width: 1750 mm
Depth: 1030 mm
Height (* 1): 1178 mm (* 2 Max. 1550 mm)
1) The height given above is from the casters.

2) This dimension is the maximum height when the door is open.
1178
(mm)
Main unit power
cable connection 235
125
160
Main unit power cable insertion port
125
75
1750
1500
Blower hose
connection
400
240
125
Cable connection
240
350
107.5
1030
655
97.5
1550
Dimensional drawing of PT-R4000/PT-R4000II

B.Installation
· PT-R4300/4100
Width: 1750 mm
Depth: 1030 mm
Height (* 1): 1178 mm (* 2 Max. 1537 mm)
1) The height given above is from the casters.

2) This dimension is the maximum height when the door is open.
1178
(mm)
Main unit power 335
cable connection 250
125
Optional power
145
cable connection
Main unit power cable

insertion port
Optional power cable

200 insertion port
160
75
125
1750
1500
Blower hose
connection
400
240
125
240 Cable connection
350
107.5
1030
655
97.5
1537
Dimensional drawing of PT-R4300

B.Installation
· Blower unit (Common to PT-R4000, PT-R4000II, and PT-R4300,PT-R4100)
Width : 429 mm, Depth : 600 mm, Height : 391 mm
600 429
Blower hose connection
361
Blower control cable connection
40
130
Blower unit power cable connection
210
(mm)
Dimensional drawing of Blower unit
· SA-L4300
1395
1775
1217
1175 389
1055
920 230 52 1044
550 600 130
Dimensional drawing of SA-L4300

B.Installation
· MA-L4300
389
81
1775
1044
1217
1175
52
640
135
135 305
575
1055
1175 695
71
1038
1325
216
2590
600
1040
550
Dimensional drawing of MA-L4300

B.Installation
· SA-L4000
· MA-L4000

B.Installation
· AT-T4000
(when attaching/
detaching)

B.Installation
2-4.Installation space and layout position

Be sure to secure spaces as follows so that the machine can be operated and maintenance can be
performed.
200 429 200
Blower unit control cable (2m)
200
Blower unit power cable (2m)
Blower hose (2m)
600
800
1030
1000
800 1750 1000
(mm)
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II layout
200 429 200
Blower unit control cable (2m)

200
Blower unit power cable (2m)

Blower hose (2m)
600
800
1030
1000
800 1750 1000
(mm)
PT-R4300/4100 layout

B.Installation
1750
[Reference]Stocker
1130
32
[Reference]PD-T1094
1120
10
1080
AT-T4000
835
190
10
6300
PT-R4000
860
518
80
275
SA-L4000
1175
Min.1500
Min.800
610
1110
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II, SA-L4000 layout

B.Installation
2865
[Reference]Stocker
1130
32
[Reference]PD-T1094
1120
10
965
1080
AT-T4000
835
190
10
6330
PT-R4000
860
1115
518
275 MA-L4000
1175
Min.
1000
Min.1000
640
1110
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II, MA-L4000 layout

B-16
275
1750
1110
PT-R4300, SA-L4300 layout
1080
Min.800
80
190
Min.1500
B.Installation
965
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL
610 1175 518 860 10 10 32
1217 985 835 1120 1130

SA-L4300 PT-R4300 AT-T4000 [Reference]PD-T1094 [Reference]Stocker
6300
275
Min.1000
1110

2865
1080
190
1115
B.Installation
Min.
1000
PT-R4300, MA-L4300 layout

965
640 1175 518 860 10 10 32
1217 985 835 1120 1130

MA-L4300 PT-R4300 AT-T4000 [Reference]PD-T1094 [Reference]Stocker
6330
B-17
B.Installation
2-5. Environmental conditions
2-5-1.Temperature and humidity

Operating temperature range: 18ºC to 26ºC (with no sudden temperature change
within a short period)
Optimum operating temperature range: 21ºC to 25ºC
Operating humidity range: 40% to 70% (with no condensation)
Storage temperature range: 10ºC to 40ºC
Storage humidity range: 25% to 75% (with no condensation)
The following describes the calorific values of the machine. Refer to the following values when
arranging air conditioning facilities for the room where the machine is located.
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II PT-R4300/4100
Including SA-
- 14.4J(3440kcal/13.6kBTU)
L/MA-L
Including blower
10.9kJ(2600kcal/11.4kBTU) 10.9kJ(2600kcal/11.4kBTU)
unit
SA-L4000/4300 : 3612kJ (860kcal, 3400BTU)

MA-L4000/4300 : 2604kJ (620kcal, 2460BTU)
AT-T4000 : 251kJ (60kcal, 238BTU)
During the coldest and hottest seasons, the room environment may deviate from the
above conditions when air conditioning facilities are not run at night or during medium
and long-term intermissions. In such cases, turn ON the air conditioning facilities and
power to the machine, and warm up the machine one or two hours prior to operation.
The power to the machine must be turned ON, because the air conditioning facilities
alone cannot circulate air inside the machine.
Follow the procedure below to prevent condensation with sudden temperature change.
• Two hours before machine operation, set a timer and start operating the air condition-
ing facilities.
• An hour before machine operation, turn ON the power to the machine.
If the air conditioning facilities to be used are equipped with a humidifying function, turn
ON the power to the machine first.

B.Installation
2-5-2.Floor load capacity

The floor minimum load The weight of the load
Weight
capacity on one adjustment bolt
PT-R4000(II)/PT-R4300/PT-R4100 Approx. 630 kg 3920 N/m2 (400 kgf/m2) MAX approx. 160 kg
SA-L4000/4300 Approx. 340 kg (*1) 2784 N/m2 (284 kgf/m2) MAX approx. 85 kg (*1)
Approx. 765 kg
Whole unit 5145 N/m2 (525 kgf/m2) -
(*1,2)
MA-L4000/4300 Loading unit Approx. 375 kg - MAX approx. 94 kg
MAX approx. 98 kg
Cassete unit Approx. 390 kg (*1,2) -
(*1,2)
1) When not setting plates.

2) When setting three cassets.
2-5-3.Floor levelness
Choose an installation site with the most level floor. Six adjustment bolts are attached to the
machine for level adjustment; these bolts can be adjusted to within 10 mm.
2-5-4.Vibrations
The following are the vibration criterion for machine installation in both the vertical direction
and horizontal direction.
0.03 m/s2 (3.0 Gal) or less (Within DC to 60 Hz)
2-5-5.Room cleanliness
The installation site must be well ventilated and relatively dust-free.

B.Installation
2-6.Power requirements
The following describes the power requirements for the machine.
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II PT-R4300/4100
Including blower Single-phase 200 to 230V – 10% 15A Single-phase 200 to 240V +6%,-10% 15A
unit (50/60Hz) 3.0kW(50/60Hz)
Including SA- Single-phase 200 to 240V +6%,-10% 20A
-
L/MA-L 4.0kW(50/60Hz)
For safety, power to the SA-L/MA-L should be turned OFF when the power to the main
unit is turned OFF. Therefore, PT-R4300 is changed so that the power supply of SA-
L4300/MA-L4300 can be connected.
<Reference>
SA-L4000/MA-L4000
Single-phase 200 V to 230 V ± 10% 5 A 1.0 kW (50 Hz/60 Hz)
SA-L4300/MA-L4300
Single-phase 200 V to 240 V +6%,-10% 5 A 1.0 kW (50 Hz/60 Hz)
AT-T4000
Single-phase 100 V to 120 V ± 10% 1.1 A (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Single-phase 200 V to 230 V ± 10% 0.55 A (50 Hz/60 Hz)
• The machine requires a dedicated power supply. Be sure to ground the AC outlet in
the specified manner (grounding resistance: 100 W or less) for machines designed to
Japanese specifications. For overseas specifications, follow the manner that specified
in standard of each country.
• Only connect devices designated for use with the main unit.
• If you anticipate a greater range of fluctuation in the power supply voltage than the
range described above, stabilize the power supply with an appropriate voltage regula-
tor.
• Make sure that the power supply voltage fluctuations are moderate, i.e., there are no
spikes or noise.

B.Installation
2-7.Cable and hose lengths

The following describes the lengths of cables and hoses that are to be attached to the main unit
and blower unit.
Main unit
• Power cable: 10 m (CAUTION 1)
Blower unit
• Power cable: 2 m
• Blower hose: 2 m
• Blower unit control cable: 2 m
1) About power cable

The power cables of the main unit and the blower unit are only provided for ma-
chines with Japanese specifications, not with overseas specifications. For ma-
chines with overseas specifications, power cables must conform to the given
country’s standards, must be able to handle AC 300 V, and must have three cable
leads of at least 2.5 mm2.
However in case of PT-R4300, as a part of cable comes in power terminal when
connecting, you can not connect power cable if the thickness of power cable itself is
more than 4mm.
6 to 7mm
4mm or less 2.5mm
2) About lengths of blower hose and gas suction hose

Depending in the installation conditions, the blower unit hose can be cut and short-
ened. However, whenever you cut the hose at the customer site, be sure to refasten
the hose end to its cuffs with silicon adhesives to prevent any air leakage.

B.Installation
3. About transportation
3-1.Transporting the main unit using the forklift (or similar equipment)
When lifting the main unit using equipment such as a forklift, be careful about the positions of
casters and hoist brackets.
Make sure to insert the forks of equipment into the back of the main unit, as shown below.
If the forks are not inserted into the back of the main unit, the frame of the main unit may
be damaged.
Forks of equipment
Forks of equipment
3-2.Transporting the main unit by hoisting it

When hoisting the main unit, attach the hoist attachments in PT-R4300. The belt should not touch
the main unit using the side board currently used for packing of PT-R.
The side board currently

used for packing of PT-R

B.Installation
4.Installation procedure
4-1.Packing list check

Be sure to check the packing list (included with the equipment packaging) to determine if there
are any missing items.
4-2.Assembly
4-2-1.Installation of the PT-R4XXX

1) Hoist attachment removal
There are two hoist attachments on both the front and rear sides of the main unit. First
remove the connecting beam and then remove the hoist attachments.
Hoist attachment (front) (Label No. 8) Hoist attachment (rear) (Label No. 8)

B.Installation
2) Installation of the main unit
Install the main unit using leveling bolts. The unit's casters should be set at 11 mm above the
floor surface as shown in the figure. Adjust all leveling bolts uniformly so that they touch the
floor surface evenly.
Be aware that if the distance between the bottom of casters and the floor surface ex-
ceeds 22 mm, the leveling bolts may detach from the main unit.
95
11
(mm)
4-2-2. Removing the transport fixing brackets

The number of the transport fixing brackets for each PT-R unit is as follows. Note that the num-
ber for the PT-R4300 varies with the serial number.
PT-R4000, PT-R4000II: 17 transport fixing brackets (including the hoist attachments men-
tioned earlier)
PT-R4300 (s/n: 1 to 6, 8): 17 transport fixing brackets (including the hoist attachments men-
tioned earlier)
PT-R4300 (s/n: 7, 9 onward): 19 transport fixing brackets (including the hoist attachments men-
tioned earlier)
In addition, five cushioning materials are used. These transport fixing brackets are common to the
PT-R4000, PT-R4000II, and PT-R4300.
Ensure that all of them have been removed finally.
The tag shown below is attached to each transport fixing bracket. Note, however, that it is not
attached to the cushioning materials.

B.Installation
1) Open the operation door.
The method to open the operation door while the power to the main unit is OFF varies with
the PT-R4000 (II) and the PT-R4300.
• PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
Removing the fixing brackets from the clamp roller Insert a thin rod (e.g., a hexagonal
wrench) into the door-releasing hole for the operation door, which is located at the bottom
surface of the plate table, to open the operation door.
• PT-R4300
Insert a thin rod (e.g., a hexagonal wrench) into the door-releasing hole for the operation
door, which is located at the right section of the plate table, and lower the rod. This will
open the operation door.
2) Remove all covers from the main unit.

B.Installation
3) Remove the fixing brackets, shown below, from the front of the main unit.
Fixing bracket for the recording head board unit.

(Label No.3)
Away side on the front side Home side on the front side
(Label No.5) (Label No.7)

B.Installation
For the PT-R4300 (s/n: 7, 9 onward), remove the fixing brackets shown in the following
figures in addition to those in the above figures.

B.Installation
4) Remove the fixing brackets, shown below, from the back of the main unit.
Transfer unit fixing bracket Transfer unit fixing bracket
(Home) (Label No. 9) (Away) (Label No. 12)
Cleaning roller fixing Cleaning roller fixing

bracket (Home) bracket (Away)
(Label No. 10) (Label No. 11)
Squeeze roller side plate Squeeze roller side plate Blower fixing bracket
fixing bracket (Home) fixing bracket (Away) (rear side)
(Label No. 16) (Label No. 17) (Label No. 4)
Clamp section fixing bracket Clamp section fixing bracket Base fixing bracket (rear side)
(Home) (Label No. 13) (Away) (Label No. 14) (Label No. 15)

B.Installation
5) Remove the fixing brackets, shown below, from the right side of the main unit.
Recording head unit fixing

bracket (Home)(Label No.6)
6) Remove the fixing brackets, shown below, from the left side of the main unit.
Recording head unit fixing

bracket (Away)(Label No.2)
Blower fixing bracket

(Label No.4) Fixing bracket for the ball
screw. (Label No.1)

B.Installation
7) Remove the cushioning materials, shown below, from the front and rear sides of the main
unit.
Discharge tray
Remove
Remove these cushioning materials to

remove the discharge tray.
Remove
Protection material for the discharge roller

B.Installation
• Fixing bracket list
The PT-R4300 uses the fixing brackets listed below. Be careful not to lose any of them,
including their attachment screws. For the PT-R4300 (s/n: 7, 9 onward), two more fixing
brackets are used in addition to the following ones. (Refer to page B-27.)
Frame fixing
bracket
(1 type, 3 pcs.)
Transfer unit fixing

bracket
(3 types, 4 pcs.)
Clamp drive sec-

tion fixing bracket
(6 types, 6 pcs.)
Recording head
unit fixing bracket
(3 types, 3 pcs.)
Ball screw fixing

bracket <Reference>
(1 type, 1 pc.) When the PT-R4300 needs to be moved after
installation, shift the recording head to the
365 mm point where the fixing brackets can
be roughly adjusted. Use a lateral feed motor
knob for the recording head position fine ad-
Squeeze roller
justment.
and cleaning roller
fixing brackets
(4 types, 4 pcs.)
Recording head
blower fixing
bracket
(3 types, 3 pcs.)
Hoist attachment
(2 types, 4 pcs.)

B.Installation
8) Remove the exterior apron jig and attach the apron and door lock system.
Next, close the door to ensure that the door lock system functions properly. If the door does
not lock properly, adjust the door lock bracket.
(This operation is required for the PT-R4000/PT-R4000II with serial numbers 0101 and
onward.)
The exterior apron jig
Apron
Door lock system PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
4-2-3.Adjusting the levelness

Although the PT-R4300 does not require leveling, adjust all leveling bolts uniformly so that they
evenly touch the floor surface.

B.Installation
4-3.Connection
4-3-1.Connecting the blower hose and gas suction hose.

Connect the blower hose, blower communication cable, and power supply cable between the
blower unit and the PT-R main unit. Then, secure the blower power supply cable with a tie band.
• When connecting a blower unit to the main unit using hoses, be sure to confirm that a
cuff (joint portion) is firmly attached to each hose end.
If a cuff is not adequately fastened to the hose, air leakages are likely to occur.
• Always install the blower unit in the room where the PT-R4300 is installed.
Tie band
Blower power supply Blower control cable

cable connection connection
Blower
Blower control cable

connection
Blower hose connection Blower power supply

cable connection
Tie band
Main unit

B.Installation
4-3-2.Connecting the blower unit control cable
• The connection terminal of the PT-R4000/4000II differs from that of the PT-R4300.
Therefore, their power supply cable connection methods are different.
• The ground connecting position of the PT-R4000/4000II differs from that of the PT-
R4300/4100.
1) PT-R4300/4100
Main unit power Optional power

Main unit power supply Ground line Optional power
supply cable inser- supply cable inser-
cable connection connection supply cable
tion port tion port
connection
Power supply cable connections Power supply cable insertion ports
• Cable stripping
6 to 7 mm
4 mm or less 2.5 mm

B.Installation
• Wiring connection. Please follow as below.
1: Insert screw driver ob- 2: Insert till the end with 3: If it is correct opera-
liquely for operation screw driver tion, a entrance of
slot. straightly. that can be opened.
4: Insert the wire in 5: If the wire is inserted 6: For confirming, pull

round hole like draw- till the end, please pull the wire slightly.
ing. At that time if screw driver out with
wire is inserted along pushing the wire.
round hole, that will
be smooth.

B.Installation
2) PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
Main unit power sup- Ground line connection Main unit power supply cable
ply cable connection insertion port
Power supply cable connections Power supply cable insertion port

B.Installation
4-3-3.Connecting an auto loader to the PT-R4300 (option)
For the PT-R4000/4000II, the exterior apron unit needed to be ordered separately in
order to prevent any components from being wasted. This order system is not required
for the PT-R4300, as there are fewer components to be wasted when connecting the
SA-L4300 to the PT-R4300.
1) Remove front cover of PT-R4300.
2) Open operation door of PT-R4300. A hole to open the door manually is right side of opera-
tion door.
3) Remove front cover at apron unit of PT-R4300. (4 screws)
Front cover of apron unit.

B.Installation
4) Remove apron unit of PT-R4300. (6 screws)
2 screws,right side and left side
2 screws at center of apron unit
5) Remove plate insert guide 3 of PT-R4300.(4 screws)
Condition after removing front cover of apron,

apron unit and plate insert guide3.
6) Install positioning plate in PT-R4300. (2 pieces)

B.Installation
7) Connect SA-L/MA-L4300 to PT-R4300.
Easy to connect if apron side covers at left and right is loosened not take out completely
otherwise hard to fix again.
(2 screws inside machine fix them.)
Apron side covers
8) As the rest of procedure to connect is the same as that of PT-R4300 and SA-L/MA-L4300.
So please refer to their service manual.
• Nothing changes for shipping brackets though their shape is a little different.
• The shape of bridge and external cover is different but nothing changes regarding
shipping bracket.
9) The power source of SA-L/MA-L4300 is to be shared from PT-R4300.

The way to connect power source at PT-R4300 is changed. Please connect Grand (earth)
onto power terminal not machine frame.
Power terminal is also changed. It is quite new type so that please refer to attached proce-
dure.
For information on cable connections and how to connect the power supply cables, refer to
“4-3-2 Connecting the blower unit control cable” on page 34.
10) When you connect SA-L/MA-L to PT-R, set height of guide at PT-R and that at Bridge unit
to be parallel .
If they are not paralell each other, thin and small plate will not be transported well.

B.Installation
4-4. Start of the machine
Before turning ON the power to the main unit, check one more time whether all transport
fixing brackets removed.
1) Turn ON the power to the main unit to start up the main unit.
PT-R4300
PT-R4000/4000II

B.Installation
2) The screen on the left appears on the panel of the
main unit, and the PT-R4300 memory check starts.
Memory check progress!!
Please wait.
If an error occurs during the memory check, the

screen on the left will be displayed.
Memory check error
Please download control program.

If this screen is displayed, be sure to download
the system software from the host computer.
0101 3) When the memory check is completed, the screen on

the left appears.
P T- R 4 3 0 0
Press [START] to start the initialization of the PT-
R4300.
Please press [START]
’02.05.01
START V1.00
0200
The screen on the left is displayed during the initial-
ization.
Initializing ! !
Please wait.
0200 The Online (Ready) Screen appears after the ma-

Ready
chine initialization is completed.
1 : 1: Plate 1
OFFLINE OPEN

B.Installation
4-5.Initial settings
4-5-1.Outline for panel settings

The information settings in the PT-R4300 have the following configuration. This information
must be set before a plate can be loaded in the PT-R4300 and exposed.
Printing machine information Plate information Media type information
Comments Comments Comments
Plate information number Media type information number Thickness
Grip direction Size Positive type/negative type
Front and trailing grip margins Balancer constant setting
Centering Light intensity for each resolution
Offset when centering is OFF Punch information Rotational speed for each resolution
Punch number Focus for each resolution
Comments
Positioning punch ON/OFF Zoom for each resolution
(Punch block number)
Fine adjustment of image position Primary scanning length correction
(Punch interval) for each resolution
Exposure conditions
Mirror
Negative/positive
Layout
Offset for multi-output
(1) Media type information (Same meaning as “plate type information”.)

This sets information regarding the plate manufacturer, model number, and thickness. Fif-
teen type can be registered. In addition to the fifteen types (Nos. 1 through 15) that can be
registered, there are also fifteen types (Nos. 31 through 45) that have been preset, and these
can be copied to Nos. 1 through 15.
(2) Plate information
This sets the plate size and media type information number. Fifteen types can be registered.
(3) Printing machine information
This sets the plate information number, grip, centering, and punch information. Fifteen types
can be registered.
(4) Punch information
This stores punch comments. Nine types can be registered. (Note that there is limit to the
number of punch units that can be attached.) A service technician sets the punch block num-
ber and punch interval when he installs an optional punch mechanism.
(5) Exposure conditions
Only one type can be registered. These settings are effective regardless of the printing ma-
chine information selected.
• Set the information in the following order: media type information, plate information,
printing machine information, and then exposure conditions.
• When you instruct the host computer to output to the PT-R4300, the plate data set in
the printing machine information that was selected when the plate was loaded is auto-
matically selected, and output takes place according to the conditions set in the print-
ing machine information.

B.Installation
4-5-2.Setting the media type

As many as 15 types of detailed information concerning the output media can be registered. The
procedure for setting the information is as follows:
Select a media type number.

↓
(Copy preset media type information.)
↓
Enter comments and select negative or positive.
↓
Set the plate thickness and the balancer constant.
↓
Select the light intensity and the drum rpm.
↓
Set the focus value.
↓
Set the zoom value and the absolute precision correction value.
0300
Set printing machine
1) In the offline screen, select [Set media type] and
press [OK]. The media type setting screen will ap-
Set plate
pear.
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE OK NEXT
1150 2) Select a number to set the media type and press [OK].
1 Media Type 1
The screen shown in step 3) will appear.
2 Media Type 2 Pressing [NEXT] in the screen on the left moves you
3 Media Type 3 to the next media type setting screen. Pressing [ESC]
4 Media Type 4 returns you to the offline screen.
5 Media Type 5
ESC OK NEXT
1100 3) Press [Copy form]. The screen shown in step 4) will

Comment appear.
Media Type 1
Posi Nega
ESC OK Copy form

B.Installation
1057 4) Select the preset media type to be copied. Press
31 FUJIFILM LH-PI 0.24mm [NEXT] several times to display the screen that in-
32 FUJIFILM LH-PI 0.30mm cludes preset media types from No. 31 onward.
33 FUJIFILM LH-NI 0.24mm If the information (manufacturer, model number, and
34 FUJIFILM LH-NI 0.30mm thickness) in one of the preset media types is the
35 KODAK IR 0.24mm same as the media you intend to use, press that num-
ber and then [OK].
ESC OK NEXT
The selected media type information will be copied
to the media type number that you selected above,
and then the screen shown in step 5) will appear.
1058 If the media type that you intend to use is not in the
36 KODAK IR 0.30mm screen on the left, press [ESC]. The screen shown in
37 Media Type 37 step 5) will appear.
38 Media Type 38
39 Media Type 39
40 Media Type 40
ESC OK NEXT
1100 5) Press [Comment]. The screen shown in step 6) will

Comment appear.
Media Type 1
Posi Nega
ESC OK Copy form
6) Enter a comment of media type in the screen on the

ESC
left.
@ A B C D E F G
Flips through the entry screens for upper
H I J K L M N O case letters, lower case letters, and sym-
P Q R S T U V W bols/numbers.
X Y Z [ ] ^ Moves the cursor.
BS Deletes the letter to the left of the cursor.
BS CLR SPC ENT
CLR Clears the entered comment.
SPC Enters a space.
ESC Returns to the screen shown in step 5).
After entering a comment, press [ESC]. The screen
shown in step 7) will appear.

B.Installation
1100 7) Select [Posi] (positive) or [Nega] (negative) for the
Comment media type, and press [OK]. The screen shown in
Media Type 1 step 8) will appear.
Posi Nega
When positive plate is exposed, the section exte-
rior to the image will be burned out.
ESC OK Copy form
1101 8) Specify the following values in the screen on the left.

CLR
Thickness 0.24 mm Thickness: Plate thickness (mm)
7 8 9
Allowable range: 0.00 to 9.99
Front offset 4 5 6
0.00
Front offset: Offset value for the leading edge sensor
Displancement offset
1 2 3 Allowable range: -50.0 to 50.0
-9.99 mm
0
Refer to page B-62 for the adjustment method.
•
Displacement: Offset value for the displacement sen-
ESC OK ENT
sor
Allowable range: -9.99 to 1.000
Refer to page B-63 for the adjustment method.
Press [OK] at the end, and the screen shown in step
9) is displayed.
When you have copied data in step 4), confirm that
the value displayed in this screen is correct.
1101 9) Specify the following value in the screen on the left.

CLR
Distance limit: Threshold value of the displacement
7 8 9
sensor
Distance limit
4 5 6 Allowable range: 20 to 100
20
1 2 3
0 • Do not change the input value as it is fixed.

ESC OK ENT Press [OK] at the end, and the screen shown in step
10) is displayed.
1102 10) Enter values into the following fields in the screen on
CLR
dpi [%] [rpm] the left.
1200 80.0 1000 7 8 9
: Light intensity (%)
2000 81.0 1000
2400 82.0 1000
4 5 6 Allowable range: 10.0 to 100.0
4000 83.0 1000 1 2 3 : Drum rpm (rpm)
2438 84.0 1000
Allowable range: 300 to 1000
2540 85.0 1000 0 •
Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 11) will ap-
ESC OK ENT
pear.
2400,2438 and 2540dpi only are If you copied the preset data in step 4), check that the
displayed for PTR4100. displayed information is correct.

B.Installation
1103 11) Enter values into the following fields in the screen
CLR
dpi [pulse] shown on the left.
1200 1930 7 8 9
: Focus value (pulse)
2000 2000
2400 1930
4000 2000 1 2 3 Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 12) will ap-
2438 1910
0
pear.
2540 1860 •
If you copied the preset data in step 4), check that the
ESC OK ENT
displayed information is correct.
1104 12) Enter values into the following fields in the screen
CLR
dpi R [%] shown on the left.
[pulse]
1200 6700 0.000 7 8 9 : Zoom value (pulse)
2000 1400 0.000
2400 6700 0.000
4000 1400 0.000 1 2 3 R : Correction value for primary scanning direc-
2438 7250 0.000
tion length (%)
2540 8550 0.000 0 •
ESC SAVE ENT
Example)
2400,2438 and 2540dpi only are If this value is initially 0 and an image is exposed that
displayed for PTR4100. is 800 mm in the primary scanning direction, but the
exposed image is actually 799 mm, entering a correc-
tion value of
(800 - 799)/800 x 100 = 0.125 (%)
will cause the correct length to be exposed.
Press [SAVE]. The screen shown in step 13) will ap-
pear.
1158 13) Press [YES] and then [OK] to save the data.
If you want to cancel the save, press [NO] and then
[OK].
Save Data ?
Pressing [ESC] returns you to the screen shown in
YES NO step 12).
ESC OK

B.Installation
4-5-3.Setting the plate

As many as 15 types of output plate information can be individually registered. The procedure for
setting the information is as follows:
Select a plate number.

↓
Enter comments and select the media type.
↓
Set the plate size.
0300 1) Select [Set plate] and press [OK]. The plate setting
screen will appear.
Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE OK NEXT
1050 2) Select a number to set the plate setting and press

1 Plate 1
[OK]. The screen shown in step 3) will appear.
2 Plate 2
3 Plate 3
4 Plate 4
5 Plate 5
ESC OK NEXT
1000 3) Press [Comment] in the screen on the left. The screen

Comment shown in step 4) will appear.
Plate 1 When you intend to copy the data from the preset
plate settings, press [Copy form]. In the screen that
Media
appears, select the desired plate setting number and
Media Type 1
press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3) will appear.
Then press [Comment]. The screen shown in step 4)
ESC OK Copy form
will appear.

B.Installation
4) Enter a plate setting comment in the screen on the
ESC
left.
@ A B C D E F G
BS CLR SPC ENT
SPC Enters a space.
The comment entered here will appear in the

screen that asks you to set a plate and the screen
that asks you to select a plate to be set. We rec-
ommend that you enter the size name, size, and
thickness (and the media type name when using
multiple media types) as shown in the following
example.
Kiku-Han 650 x 550 0.3 mm LH-PI
1000 5) Press [Media] in the screen on the left. The screen

Plate 1
Media
Media Type 1
ESC OK Copy form
1150 6) Select the desired data number from the preset media
1 Media Type 1
types and press [OK]. The screen shown in step 7)
2 Media Type 2 will appear.
3 Media Type 3 If you copied the preset data in step 3), check that the
4 Media Type 4 displayed information is correct.
5 Media Type 5 The media type information that you selected in the
screen on the left will be linked to the plate that is
ESC OK NEXT
being set.

B.Installation
1000 7) Press [OK] in the screen on the left. The screen
Plate 1
Media
Media Type 1
ESC OK Copy form
1001 8) Enter values into the following fields.

Size [mm] CLR
Plate width (mm)
7 8 9
830.0 Allowable range: 323.0 to 831.0
4 5 6 Plate length (mm)
1 2 3 Allowable range: 369.0 to 661.0
645.5
0
•
ESC SAVE ENT
pear.

Save Data ? [OK].

YES NO step 8).
ESC OK

B.Installation
4-5-4.Setting the printing machine information

When outputting a plate with the PT-R4300, output conditions such as the media type, leading
grip margin, trailing grip margin, and image centering can be linked and saved as printing ma-
chine information. As many as 15 types of printing machine information can be individually
registered. The procedure for setting the information is as follows:
Select a printing machine number.

↓
Enter comments and select the plate.
↓
Set the grip direction.
↓
Set the leading and trailing grip margins.
↓
Set the image centering method.
↓
Set the image position offset.
↓
Set the punch.
↓
Fine adjust the image position.
0300 1) Select [Set printing machine] and press [OK]. The

printing machine setting screen will appear.
Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE OK NEXT
0000 2) Select a number to set the printing machine setting

1 Printing machine 1
and press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3) will ap-
2 Printing machine 2 pear.
ESC OK NEXT

B.Installation
0900 3) Press [Comment] in the screen on the left. The screen
Plate 1 When you intend to copy the data from the preset
printing machine settings, press [Copy form]. In the
Plate
screen that appears, select the desired printing ma-
Media Type 1
chine setting number and press [OK]. The screen
shown in step 3) will appear. Then press [Comment].
ESC OK Copy form
4) Enter a printing machine setting comment in the

ESC
screen on the left.
@ A B C D E F G
[ ] ^
Moves the cursor.
X Y Z
BS CLR SPC ENT
SPC Enters a space.
0900 5) Press [Plate] in the screen on the left. The screen

Plate 1
Plate
Media Type 1
ESC OK Copy form
1054 6) Select the desired data number from the plate settings
1 Plate 1 and press [OK]. The screen shown in step 7) will ap-
2 Plate 2 pear.
3 Plate 3 If you copied the preset data in step 3), check that the
4 Plate 4 displayed information is correct.
5 Plate 5 The plate setting that you selected in the screen on
the left will be linked to the printing machine that is
ESC OK NEXT
being set.

B.Installation
0901 7) Select the grip direction and press [OK]. The screen
Spiral/Step shown in step 8) will appear.
: Allows you to set horizontal gripping (at the
top and bottom) of the plate.
Grid direction
: Allows you to set vertical gripping (at each
side) of the plate.
ESC OK

Grip [mm]/ CLR
After Grip : Leading grip margin/Grip (mm)
7 8 9
0.0 mm Allowable rage: 0.0 to 999.9
4 5 6
: Trailing grip margin/After Grip (mm)
1 2 3
0.0 mm
Allowable rage: 0.0 to 999.9
0 • Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 9) will appear.
ESC OK ENT
0903 9) Select the desired centering method and press [OK].

Centering in primary scanning
Centering
direction: OFF
Centering in secondary scan-
ning direction: ON
ESC OK Centering in primary scanning

direction: ON
ning direction: ON

direction: OFF
ning direction: OFF

direction: ON
ning direction: OFF
If multi-output is set in the exposure condition

settings, the settings for image centering in the
secondary scanning direction and the image off-
set in the secondary scanning direction de-
scribed below will be ignored.
B.Installation
Offset H CLR
7 8 9
R : Offset for edges of plate and exposure area in
R 0.0 mm
4 5 6 secondary scanning direction (mm)

Offset V
1 2 3
R 0.0 mm R : Offset for edges of plate and exposure area in
0 •
primary scanning direction (mm)
ESC OK ENT
The above values are only effective for the direc-

tion in which centering is set to OFF. When cen-
tering is set to ON both in the primary scanning
direction and the secondary scanning direction,
the screen on the left will not appear.
If multi-output is set in the exposure condition
settings, the settings for image centering in the
secondary scanning direction and image offset in
the secondary scanning direction will be ignored.
Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 11) will ap-

pear.
0905 11) Press [Punch] in the screen on the left. The screen
Punch shown in step 12) will appear.
Off
ESC OK
0000 12) Select the desired punch type number from the regis-
OFF
tered punch types and press [OK]. The screen shown
1 Punch 1 in step 13) will appear.
2 Punch 2 The punch type that you selected in the screen on the
3 Punch 3 left will be linked to the printing machine that is be-
4 Punch 4 ing set.
When you do not want to use punching function,
ESC OK NEXT
press [OFF].

B.Installation
0906 13) Enter values into the following fields in the screen on
Paper Position H CLR
the left.
R 0.0 mm 7 8 9
R : Correction value for the image output position
4 5 6 on the plate (secondary scanning direction)

Paper Position V
1 2 3 (mm)
0.0 mm
R Allowable range: -425.5 to 425.5
0 •
R : Correction value for the image output position
ESC SAVE ENT
on the plate (primary scanning direction)
(mm)
pear.
Save Data ? [OK].
YES NO step 14).
ESC OK

B.Installation
4-5-5.Setting the exposure conditions

Set the exposure conditions for mirror image output, positive/negative output, and layout method
when outputting on the PT-R4300.
0300 1) Select [Set exposure mode] and press [OK]. The ex-
posure condition setting screen will appear.
Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE OK NEXT
2) When the SA-L/MA-L is connected, the screen on

the left will appear. Select the plate loading method.
: Automatic plate loading (transferred from
SA-L/MA-L)
: Manual plate loading
3) When units including the auto processor are con-

nected, the screen on the left will appear.
: Unloads the plate to the rear side (for ex-
ample the auto processor side) of the main

unit.
: Unloads the plate to the front side of the main
unit.

B.Installation
0702 4) Select the desired commands from the following and
Mirror
press [SAVE].
Mirror
Posi/Nega : Normal image output (Select this for usual
operation.)
Layout 1 123 : Mirror image output
ESC SAVE Posi/Nega

: Positive output (Select this for usual opera-
tion.)
: Negative output
Layout
1: Single output (Outputs one image onto one
plate.)
(Select this for usual operation.)
1 2 3 : Multi-output (Outputs plural images onto
one plate.)
1.Caution for Posi/Nega settings

Normally “Posi” is selected and the host computer outputs a positive image. The PT-R4300
checks whether the media type is set to positive or negative and then adjusts exposure so that a
positive image is output.
If the image output from the host computer is a negative image, select “Nega” in the exposure
condition setting screen.
2.Caution for (multi-output) of Layout

1 2 3
After exposing one image, when the image size that is to be exposed next is smaller than the
unexposed area, the plate will be exposed without being unloaded. When the image size that is
to be exposed next is larger than the unexposed area, the plate will be unloaded and exposure
starts after loading the next plate.
If centering in the secondary scanning direction is set to ON in the printing machine settings,
exposure of the initial image will begin at a position 5 mm from the edge of the plate (or the
leading grip margin). A 5 mm gap is automatically inserted between each image.
When performing multi-output using a positive-type plate, the 5 mm gap before the first image,
the 5 mm gap between images, and the gap from the edge of the last image to the edge of the
plate will be burned out. The burn-out after the last image is executed before unloading.

[OK].
Save Data ?
YES NO step 2).
ESC OK

B.Installation
4-6 Operation check and adjustment
4-6-1 Checking the registration

Once initialization of the machine has completed correctly, check the registration accuracy ac-
cording to the following procedure.
If you notice any deviations, adjust them according to Chapter C “Replacement & Adjustment”.
Registration accuracy should be checked at the same time as the operations described in “4.6.2
Confirming plate winding and exposure”.
1) Ensure that when the transfer path is located at the

lowest position, it makes contact with the stopper,
Transfer path
which is located on the PT-R4300 side.
Stopper <Procedure>
Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Recording drum →Enter the Actuator test screen.
→Lower the transfer path. (By pressing the Down
button twice)
Ensure that the
lower section of
the transfer
path contacts Ensure that the recording head is positioned on
the stopper.
the Home side.
Reference) The transfer path must be positioned at 0.5

mm or less from the stopper. (In effect, these
two should contact each other, however a 0.5
mm clearance between them can be toler-
ated.)
Nip roller 2) Next, check the position the plate attaches to the
drum using a plate of the maximum size used by the
Transfer path
Shutter
user.
Leading edge clamp
<Procedure>
Plate
→Enter the Actuator test screen.
→Lower the nip roller.
→Open the shutter.
→Feed a plate to check the position it attaches to the
recording drum.
Reference) According to factory adjustment, maximum

sized plates (830 x 645, thickness: 0.3) attach
to a position nearly under the leading edge
clamps.
Be aware of plate slack. The thinner the plate
is, the more it slacks.
B.Installation
P la te 3) Ensure that the plate makes contact with the drum
0 .5 to 1 .0 m m
from the registration pin side and that it is inclined
with respect to the lateral groove on the recording
drum.
<Procedure>
Place a plate on the transfer path.
→Lower the transfer path to its lowest position.
L a te ra l g ro o ve o n th e
→Lower the nip roller.
R e g is tra tio n p in s
re c o rd in g d ru m →Open the shutter.
F ra m e o f th e P T -R 4 3 00 E n g in e b a s e
→Rotate the recording drum by hand and execute
Servo ON when the lateral groove comes close to
the squeeze roller.
→Feed the plate to check the inclination of the plate
with respect to the lateral groove on the recording
drum.
162m m
163m m
T h e d is ta n c e b e tw e e n th e
H o m e s id e d ista n c e a n d
A w a y s id e d ista n c e
Reference) When the plate is correctly placed, with re-
s h o u ld b e 1 to 1 .5 m m .
spect to the Home side, its Away side tilts
R e c o m m e n d e d e n g in e b a s e tilt
from 0.5 to 1.0 mm near the registration pins.
Also check that the engine base tilts with respect

to the frame. According to factory adjustment, the
engine tilts 1 mm with respect to the frame. (The
recording head is positioned on the Home side.)
4) Check that the plate has been correctly positioned in

the lateral direction with respect to the registration
pins on the recording drum.
Ensure that the centers of both punch holes on the
Plate
plate align with the centers of the registration pins. It
Registration pin is permissible for these punch hole centers to be
slightly shifted (within 0.5 mm) to the right.
Ensure that both plate punch centers align
with the centers of the registration pins. It is <Procedure>
permissible for these punch hole centers to be
slightly shifted (within 0.5 mm) to the right . Remove the punch debris guide from the Home side
(so that the registration pin area is clearly visible.)
→Place a plate on the transfer path.
→Set the transfer path to the middle position.
→Center the plate and then make punch holes.
(Note 1)
→Rotate the recording drum to the plate winding
position and open the leading edge clamps.
If the plate punch centers are
significantly shifted to the left or →Move the transfer path to the lowest position and
right, plate misregistration will result. open the shutter.
B.Installation
→Feed a plate and check the positions of the regis-
tration pins and the holes punched in the plate.
Approximately 3 mm
Note 1) A personal computer is required to carry out

from the pin
Plate
this operation.
Registration pin
Ensure that the bearings of the centering unit
Ensure that the nip roller is released when
the plate reaches a point approximately 3
contact the respective edges of the plate during
mm from the registration pins. punching.
5) Check the timing when the nip roller is released.
<Procedure>
Remove the plate and initialize the machine.
→Load a plate onto the drum.
→Ensure that the plate stops for an instant when the
leading edge clamps open and the plate is fed to a
point approximately 3 mm from the registration
pins.
Plate
6) Once the head adjustment has been completed, ex-
ecute test exposure of the grid pattern over the full
surface of a plate of the size used by the user. At least
four plates are required for the test exposure.
On the reference plate (first plate), overlay another
plate and cut out its leading edge corners on the
Home and Away sides. Then, measure the difference
between the grid lines in the Y direction on the plate
Cut
out
and the grid lines on the reference plate.
Bacher register
<Required items>
pins (6.35 dia)
• 6.35 dia. register pins (2 pcs.)
(Reference)
Name: Register pin
Parts code: 030100072
• Loupe
<Exposure condition>
• 2400 dpi
• Grid pattern exposure

B.Installation
Criterion for judgment)
At 2400 dpi, the line width is approximately
30 µm. Registration in the PT-R4300 is con-
sidered to be accurate when the correspond-
ing grid lines are aligned to within one grid
line width at the points specified in the fig-
ure.
Check for misalignment of

grid lines in these areas.
Approximately
Y direction
30 mm
7) Restore all parts removed, such as the cleaning roller

and punch debris guide.

B.Installation
4-6-2.Confirming plate winding and exposure

Confirmation of plate winding load a plate and check the winding.
<Preliminary check>
Make sure that none of the plates the customer will use
are wrapped, bent or dented.
1) Check the following items during the plate loading.

• When the plate is being punched, the cam follow-
ers of the centering unit touch the plate sides.
• The cam followers do not press against the plate
sides too hard.
• The plate top side detection sensors are properly
Plate Centering unit
operating.
2) Check the following items for the wound plates.

• Leading and trailing edge grip margins
(Leading edge grip margin = 13.2 mm, Trailing
edge grip margin = 7 mm 0, +0.1 mm)
The values mentioned above are used for 0.3 mm
plates. The thinner the plate is, the longer the trail-
ing edge grip margin length will be.
• The plate must touch the registration pins.
Registration pin
Trailing edge clamp

B.Installation
3051
Input parameter
3) Adjust the front sensor offset
Machine option select
I/O Read/Write This adjustment is not necessary for the LH-PI

Initialize data
plates, as it has been done at the factory.
Special action <Front sensor offset adjustment>

Initialize the machine.
ESC OK NEXT
→Load a plate on the drum to confirm the plate edge
hits the registration pins completely.
4451
Front sensor offset →Go to the service maintenance mode.
Centering test →Special action
Adjust Displacement sensor
→Execute Front sensor offset.
→Select the plate type.
NVRAM backup
→Press [START] to execute.
NVRAM restore
→The offset value for the plate will be set.
ESC OK NEXT Adjust the offset if the thickness is different just in
case even though the same type of plate.
1150
1 0.15
2 0.20
3 0.24
4 0.30
5 Media Type 5
ESC OK NEXT

B.Installation
0300
4) Adjust the displacement sensor offset
Set plate
Set media type This adjustment is not necessary for the LH-PI
Set exposure mode
plates, as it has been done at the factory.
User maintenance <displacement sensor offset adjustment>

Initialize the machine.
ONLINE OK NEXT
→Select the plate type.
→Input -9.99 on Displacement offset.
1150
(This is the mode to get the offset.)
1 0.15
→Load a plate.
2 0.20
Adjust the offset if the thickness is different just in
3 0.24 case even though the same type of plate.
4 0.30
5 Media Type 5
ESC OK NEXT
1100
Comment
Media Type 1
Posi Nega
ESC OK Copy form
1101
CLR
Thickness 0.24 mm
7 8 9
Front offset 4 5 6
0.00
1 2 3
Displancement offset
-9.99 mm
0 •
ESC OK ENT

B.Installation
5) Y-lengthSince the sensor is at the rear side of the plate loaded on the drum, the sensor need
not be re-adjusted to accommodate different types of plates used with the machine.
Therefore, you do not need to re-adjust the sensor when the machine is installed.Readjust
this sensor only when an error occurs with the plate length in the Y direction during plate
loading on the drum, when the sensor is replaced with a new one, or when the position or
angle of the sensor is adjusted.
Even if the sensor has been adjusted (or the plate length has been recognized by the machine)
properly, a plate length deviation within a ± 2.4 mm range is still allowed.
0300 <Memorize the plate length>

Measure the plate length by scale and input this value
Set plate
at the plate setting.
Set media type →Go to the user maintenance mode.
Set exposure mode →Test exposure
User maintenance →Hidden command (RH) for service engineer
→Input the password.
ONLINE OK NEXT
→Hit OK key.
2000
ETC.
ESC OK
2100
focus zoom
RH
ESC OK
2180
CLR
7 8 9
Pass Word
4 5 6
0
1 2 3
0 •
ESC OK ENT

B.Installation
2181
No-Plate Off
RH Off
Full size Off
ESC OK
2182 →Input the actual measured value at the memory

CLR
Plate Length 0.0 mm
view.
When you want to calibra- 7 8 9
te the plate length sensor, →SAVE
input the value of the cor-
rect plate size for Y direc-
4 5 6 →Wind the plate.
tion. And load the measur-
ed plate. 1 2 3
Normally save "zero".
0 • The plate is loaded on the drum without the regis-
ESC SAVE ENT tration punch when memorizing the length. At this
moment,, the front sensor might get error. In this
2185
case change the parameter referring to the fol-
lowing procedure.
Save Data ? Go to the service maintenance mode.

→Input parameter
YES NO
→Drum position
→Change the value of Front sensor. ( Increase
about 5 pulses.)
ESC OK
(The drum front check position shifts to counter
clock wise when the Front sensor value is in-
creased.)
→Confirm the sensor lights are off after execut-
ing “Front check position” on Drum.
→Memorize the plate again.
→Set back the front sensor value.

B.Installation
4-6-3.Laser calibration
1) Write down the Iop values set for exposing images at 2000 and 2400 dpi.
2) You do not need to write down the values for resolutions whose Iop values have already been
described in the factory set electric current data sheet.
3) Check whether the difference between the average operating current value (Iop value) set at
the factory and the calibrated average operating current (calibrated Iop value) above is less
then 50 mA.
There is no problem when these values are almost equivalent. However, if the difference is
significant, the optical axis may have deviated during transportation or condensation may
have occurred.
It is recommended that you should note down the calibration values when the service work is
performed. This allows you to check the variation in the current values since the machine has
been installed and helps you to find out the LDs that need to be replaced.
4) If there is no problem with the calibrated operating current, execute the calibration for the
resolution at which the customer will expose images.

B.Installation
4-7.Exposure adjustment
0300 1) In the offline screen, select [User maintenance] and

Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE OK NEXT
2000 2) Select (test exposure) and press [OK]. The screen

ETC.
ESC OK
2100 3) Select the desired test exposure in the screen on the

left, and perform exposure adjustment.
focus
: Performs a test exposure to adjust the focus.
focus zoom
(Refer to 4-7-1.)
RH zoom
: Performs a test exposure to adjust the zoom.
(Refer to 4-7-2.)
: Performs a test exposure to adjust the light in-
ESC OK
tensity. (Refer to 4-7-3.)
• Be sure to load the plate manually before performing a test exposure.

• The printing machine and exposure condition settings are ignored when a test expo-
sure or test pattern exposure is performed.
• The start position for exposure in the primary scanning direction is approximately 25
mm from the bottom edge of the plate and the end position is approximately 25 mm
from the top edge. Both positions are fixed.
• When a positive-type plate is exposed, burn-out is not performed.

B.Installation
4-7-1.Adjusting the focus value
2100 1) Load the plate manually.
2) Select focus
in the screen on the left and press [OK].
focus zoom
RH
ESC OK
Resolution key Currently set value

CLR
2400dpi
[Resolution key]
(1920) 7 8 9
Inital Value:[pulse] 2000 Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The reso-
Inc.Value: [pulse] 10 4 5 6 lution changes each time the resolution key is
Count: 3 1 2 3 pressed. Press the key until the desired resolution
Start Point:[mm] 0.0 appears.
(0.0 - 830.0mm) 0 •
[Currently set value]
ESC OK ENT
Displays the focus value (in pulse) currently set in
“Set media type” data selected when the plate was
loaded in the PT-R4300.
For the focus adjustment, perform the test exposure
with the following settings.
[Initial Value] : Currently set value -100

[Inc. Value] (incremental value) : 10
[Count] : 21
[Start Point] (exposure start point) : -
Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 4) will appear.
[Initial Value]
The first focus value used in the test exposure.
[Inc. Value]
The amount of change from the initial value. Allowable range: 1 to 4000
[Count]
The number of times the test exposure is to be performed. Allowable rage: 0 to 9999
[Start Point]

B.Installation
• The exposure start point is the distance from the plate edge to the point where the test
exposure begins. This value is updated (moved to the next possible exposure posi-
tion) each time a test exposure ends. (In this sequence, the exposure starting point is
automatically recalculated by adding 5 mm to the last exposure end point.)
• When performing a test exposure, the settings for the media type registered in the
plate data that is selected when the plate is loaded are used for settings other than the
initial value, incremental value, and count.
2131 4) Check the displayed information and press

2400dpi [START]. The test exposure begins using the set in-
(1920) formation.
Initial Value: 2000 pulse
Inc.Value: 10 pulse
When the test exposure is completed, the test expo-
Count: 3 sure selection screen reappears.
Start Point: 0.0 mm
ESC START CANCEL The test exposure exposes the width that you set
in [Plotting Width] and automatically inserts a 5
mm gap between exposures.
5) Manually unload and develop the plate.

Check the exposure pattern strips with a magnifying
glass and designate the focus value that satisfies the
following conditions.
When using a positive plate:

• Shows the clearest Dot 0%.
• Shows the sharpest Hor L&S 1.
• Shows no unevenness for Dot 50%.
When no differences can be found among the pat-
terns, designate the focus value for the strip of the
exposure patterns located at the median as the opti-
mum focus value. Ten is subtracted from the opti-
mum value to attain the actual set value to be used.
When using a negative plate:

• Shows the highest density for Dot 100%.
When no differences can be found among the pat-
terns, designate the focus value for the strip of the
exposure patterns located at the median as the opti-
mum focus value. Ten is subtracted from the opti-
mum value to attain the actual set value to be used.
For details of the names and the types of each

exposure pattern, refer to “4-7-5 Test exposure”.
B.Installation
The actual set value of the focus should be rounded
up to the nearest multiple of 5.
6) Following the same procedures, designate the focus

values for the other resolutions and plates.
Factory set value

B.Installation
4-7-2.Adjusting the zoom value
1) Load the plate manually.
2100 2) Select zoom

‚ in the screen on the left and press [OK].
focus zoom
RH
ESC OK
Resolution key Currently set value 3) Enter values into the following fields.
2140 [Resolution key]
CLR
2400dpi Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The reso-
(1000) 7 8 9 lution changes each time the resolution key is
Inital Value: [pulse] 900
Inc.Value: 10
4 5 6 pressed. Press the key until the desired resolution
[pulse]
Count: 3 1 2 3 appears.
Start Point:[mm] 0.0 [Currently set value]
(0.0 - 830.0) 0 •
Displays the zoom value (in pulse) currently set
ESC OK ENT
in “Set media type” data selected when the plate
was loaded in the PT-R4300.
For the zoom adjustment, perform the test exposure
with the following settings.
[Initial Value] : Currently set value -350

[Count] : 15
[Start Point] (exposure start point) : -
[Initial Value]
The first zoom value used in the test exposure. Allowable range: 201 to 9970
[Inc. Value]
The amount of change from the initial value. Allowable range: 1 to 9970
[Count]
[Start Point]

B.Installation

(1920) formation.
Initial Value: 2000 pulse
Inc.Value: 10 pulse
Count: 3 sure selection screen reappears.
Start Point: 0.0 mm

B.Installation
Horizontal lines are
consistently straight. Check the exposure pattern strips with a magnifying
glass and designate the zoom value that satisfies the
There are not many ver- following condition.
tical lines which are un-
• Shows the most straight lines for Hor L&S 2.
even or of inconsistent
thickness. When no differences can be found among the pat-
terns, designate the zoom value for the strip of the
exposure patterns located at the median as the zoom
Ch29
Ch30
Ch31
Ch0
Ch1
Ch2
set value.
For details of the names and the types of each

exposure pattern, refer to “4-7-5 Test exposure”.
The actual set value of the zoom should be rounded

up to the nearest multiple of 5.
6) Following the same procedures, designate the zoom

values for the other resolutions and plates.
<Positive plate> C1 pattern

B.Installation
4-7-3.Adjusting the light intensity <Reference>
Use the light intensity value that is set for each media type (manufacturer, model number, thick-
ness).
2) Select in the screen on the left and press [OK].

focus zoom
RH
ESC OK
Resolution key Currently set value

2400dpi CLR
[Resolution key]
(80.0) 7 8 9
Initial Value:[%] 50.0
Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The reso-
4 5 6 lution changes each time the resolution key is
Inc.Value:[%] 5.0
Count: 3 1 2 3 pressed. Press the key until the desired resolution
Start Point:[mm] 0.0 appears.
(0.0 - 830.0) 0 •
[Currently set value]
ESC OK ENT
Displays the light intensity value (in %) currently
set in “Set media type” data selected when the
plate was loaded in the PT-R4300.
For the light intensity adjustment, perform the test
exposure with the following settings.
[Initial Value] : 40 onward

[Count] : 13
[Initial Value]
The first light intensity value used in the test exposure. Allowable range: 10.0 to 100.0
[Inc. Value]
The amount of change from the initial value. Allowable range: 1.0 to 100.0
[Count]
[Start Point]

B.Installation
automatically recalculated by adding 5 mm to the last exposure endpoint.)

(80.0) formation.
InitialValue: 50.0 %
Inc.Value: 5.0 % When the test exposure is completed, the test expo-
Count: 3
Start Point: 0.0 mm sure selection screen reappears.
Plotting Width: 20 mm

Check the strips of exposure patterns with a magni-
fier and designate the light intensity set value that
satisfies the following condition.
• Multiply the value of the strip of test patterns that
shows the clearest Dot 0% by 1.4 to 1.6 times.
The actual set value of the light intensity should be

rounded up to the nearest whole number.
6) Following the same procedures, designate the light

intensity values for the other resolutions and plates.
4-7-4.Saving the data

Following the procedures in “4-5-2 Setting the media type”, save the focus, zoom and light inten-
sity values that are designated in 4-7-1 to 4-7-3 for each media type.

B.Installation
4-7-5.Test exposure
To check the data that are saved, perform a test exposure.
2) Select in the screen on the left and press [OK].

focus zoom
RH
ESC OK
Test pattern
Resolution key selection key
CLR
2400dpi [Resolution key]
7 8 9
Pattern: C1 Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The resolu-
4 5 6 tion changes each time the resolution key is pressed.
Plotting Width: 50.0
(5.0 - 830.0 [mm]) 1 2 3 Press the key until the desired resolution appears.
Start Point: 0.0
(0.0 - 830.0 [mm]) 0
[Test pattern selection key]
•
Selects the test pattern. The test pattern changes
ESC OK ENT
each time the test pattern selection key is pressed.
Press the key until the desired test pattern ap-
pears. For the type of test pattern, refer to the de-
scription below.
[Plotting Width]
The exposure width of the test pattern.
[Start Point]
• The exposure start point is the distance from

the plate edge to the point where the test expo-
sure begins. This value is updated (moved to
the next possible exposure position) each time
a test exposure ends. (In this sequence, the
exposure starting point is automatically recal-
culated by adding 5 mm to the last exposure
end point.)
• When performing a test exposure, the settings
for the media type registered in the plate data
that is selected when the plate is loaded are
used for settings other than the initial value, in-
cremental value, and count.

B.Installation
2171 Press [OK]. The screen show in step 4) will appear.
2400dpi 4) Check the displayed information and press

Pattern: C1 [START]. The test exposure begins using the set in-
Plotting Width: 5 0 . 0 formation.
Start Point: 0.0 mm
sure selection screen reappears.
ESC START CANCEL

Check if there is any problem with the exposed re-
sults.

B.Installation
Test pattern list
Pattern name Dot% Dot angle Line number/pitch Remarks
Dot 0% 0% 45 4000 dpi: 250 line/inch Pseudo dots
Dot 3% 3% 2400 dpi: 150 line/inch
Dot 85% 85%
Dot 90% 90%
Dot 95% 95%
Dot 97% 97%
Dot 100% 100%
Grid 4000 dpi: 1.63 1.52 mm Grid pattern
2400 dpi: 2.71 2.54 mm
2000 dpi: 3.25 3.05 mm
1200 dpi: 5.42 5.08 mm
2540 dpi: 2.56 2.40 mm
2438 dpi: 2.67 2.50 mm
C1 Continuous exposure of C1 pattern
D1 Continuous exposure of C1 pattern
AUX1 Not used
AUX2 Not used
AUX3 Not used
AUX4 Not used
CHO-31 To allow verification of the light intensity balance of each laser channel (ch 0
through ch 31), a solid is exposed with each channel.
Hor L&S 1 Horizontal direction 1 line - 1 space Lines and spaces
Hor L&S 2 Horizontal direction 2 lines - 2 spaces
Ver L&S 1 Vertical direction 1 line - 1 space
Ver L&S 2 Vertical direction 2 lines - 2 spaces

B.Installation
256pixel a a
240pixel
Lines and spaces
Pseudo dots Grid pattern (1 line, 1 space)
a a a a
7 15 23 31
6 14 22 30
5 13 21 29
Primary scan- 4 12 20 28
ning direction 3 11 19 27
2 10 18 26
Lines and spaces 1 9 17 25

(2 lines, 2spaces) 0 8 16 24
Expose original point
Secondary scan-
ning direction
Ch0 through ch31 pattern exposure
C1 pattern D1 pattern

B.Installation
4-7-6.Other test exposure methods

In addition to the test exposures described above, test exposures for simultaneous adjustment of
focus and zoom, and for simultaneous adjustment of light intensity and drum rpm can be per-
formed in the PT-R4300.
2100 1) Select or in the screen on the left and press

[OK].
: Test exposure for simultaneous adjustment of
focus zoom
focus and zoom
RH : Test exposure for simultaneous adjustment of
light intensity and drum rpm
2) When is selected, the screen on the left appears.
ESC OK
When is selected, the screen on the next page ap-
pears.
Enter values into the following fields.
Currently set [Resolution key]
Resolution key value
Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The reso-
2160
lution changes each time the resolution key is
CLR
2400dpi pressed. Press the key until the desired resolution
(2280, 6450) 7 8 9 appears.
Initial Value: 2000 4985
[puls] [Currently set value]
4 5 6
Inc.Value: 50 20
[puls] Displays the focus value (in pulse) and the zoom
Count: 8 7 1 2 3
Start Point:
value (in pulse) currently set in the “Set media
0.0 0
(0.0 ~ 1030.0 [mm]) • type” data selected when the plate was loaded in
ESC OK ENT the PT-R4300.
[Initial Value]:
The first focus value and zoom value used in the
test exposure.
[Inc. Value] (incremental value):
The amount of change from initial values
[Count]:
The number of times the test exposure is to be
performed.
Allowable rage: 0 to 9999
[Start Point]

B.Installation
Resolution key Currently set value [Resolution key]
2150 Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The reso-
CLR
2400dpi
lution changes each time the resolution key is
(700, 75.0) 7 8 9
Initial Value:
650 50.0
pressed. Press the key until the desired resolution
[rpm],[%]
Inc.Value 4 5 6 appears.
25 2.0
[rpm],[%]
Count: 9 10 1 2 3 [Currently set value]
Start Point:
(0.0 ~ 1030.0 [mm]) 0.0
0
Displays the light intensity value (in %) and the
•
drum rpm (in rpm) currently set in “Set media
ESC OK ENT
type” data selected when the plate was loaded in
the PT-R4300.
[Initial Value]:
The first light intensity value and drum rpm value
used in the test exposure.
[Inc. Value] (incremental value):
The amount of change from initial values
[Count]:
The number of times the test exposure is to be
performed.
Allowable rage: 0 to 9999
[Start Point]
Please note the following whenever you enter a parameter value.

• Set the initial value higher than the lower limit for each parameter.
• Values calculated by the formula “Initial Value + Inc. Value x (Count - 1)” should be
lower than the upper limit for each parameter.
• Values calculated by the formula “Start Point + 35 x (Count set for the secondary
direction - 1)” should be less than the plate size in the secondary direction.
• Values calculated by the formula “Start Point + 100 x (Count set for the primary direc-
tion -1)” should be less than the plate size in the primary direction minus 40 mm.

B.Installation
2161 3) When is selected, the upper screen appears.
2400dpi When is selected, the lower screen appears.
(2280) (6450)
Check the displayed information and press
Initial Value: 2000 puls 4985 puls [START].
Inc.Value: 50 puls 20 puls
Count: 8 7
Start Point: 0.0 mm
ESC START CANCEL
2151
2400dpi
(700) (75.0)
Initial Value: 650 rpm 50.0 %
Inc.Value: 25 rpm 2.0 %
Count: 9 10
Start Point: 0.0 mm
ESC START CANCEL
Zoom is Drum rpm is

incremented. incremented.
30mm 30mm
6050pulse 95mm 650rpm 95mm
5mm 5mm
Focus is Light intensity is

6000pulse 600rpm
incremented. incremented.
5mm 5mm
2000pulse 50%
2020pulse 55%
: Test exposure for simultaneous adjust- : Test exposure for simultaneous adjust-
ment of focus and zoom ment of light intensity and drum rpm

B.Installation
4-8.Other settings
4-8-1.Setting the exposure maintenance
0300 1) In the offline screen, select [User maintenance] and

Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE OK NEXT
2000 2) Select ‚ and press [OK] in the screen on the left.

ETC.
ESC OK
2100 3) Select and press [OK] in the screen on the left.

RH
focus zoom
RH
ESC OK
2180 4) Enter the password shown below in the screen on the

CLR
left.
7 8 9
Password: 4000 or 4300
Pass Word
4 5 6 The screen shown in step 5) will appear.
0
1 2 3
0 •
ESC OK ENT

B.Installation
2181 5) Set the following commands.
No-Plate Off
[No-Plate]
Allows you to check all the exposure sequences
RH Off
without loading a plate into the machine.
For usual operation: OFF
Full size Off
ESC OK The commands set here are effective only when

they are executed from the host computer. The
commands are ignored during test exposure in
the PT-R4300.
RH :
Allows you to operate the PT-R4300 without
lighting up the LD (laser diodes) in the recording
head.
[Full size]:
Allows you to perform exposures including the
grip margins.
2182 6) Enter values into the plate length and plate width
CLR
Plate Length 0.0 mm
fields so that the PT-R4300 will recognize the length
When you want to calibra- 7 8 9
te the plate length sensor, and width when detecting plates in the primary scan-
input the value of the cor-
4 5 6 ning direction and the secondary scanning direction.
rect plate size for Y direc-
tion. And load the measur-
ed plate. 1 2 3 For details about teaching the PT-R4300 the plate
Normally save "zero". length and width for plate detection, refer to page B-
0 •
65.
ESC SAVE ENT

Save Data ? [OK].
YES NO
step 6).
ESC OK

B.Installation
4-8-2.User settings
0300
1) In the offline screen, select [User maintenance] and
Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE OK NEXT
2000 2) Select [ETC.] and press [OK] in the screen on the

left. The screen shown in step 3) will appear.
ETC.
ESC OK
2200
Set Date Time
3) [Set Date Time]
Sets the date and time.
Punch for cleaning
[Punch for cleaning]
Consumable Timer
Operates the punch.
Language [Laser calibration]
Laser power measure Calibrates the laser in the recording head.
[Consumable Timer]
ESC OK NEXT
Checks the running time of the PT-R4300 and
sets the consumable timers.
[Language]
Sets the language used in the display.
[Laser power measure]
Measures the laser power.
[Cancel calibration]
Cancels the calibration results and restores the
original status.

B.Installation
2201
Laser calibration
[Laser calibration]
Calibrates the laser. Refer to “3-7-4 Laser Cali-
Cancel calibration
bration screen” in chapter D. The screen is shared
Calibration info.
by the User Maintenance and the Maintenance
Return error to host screens.
Option setting [Calibration info.]
Displays the calibration information.
ESC OK NEXT
[Return error to host]
Sends the error information to the host computer.
[Option setting]
Allows the setting of the options that can be ac-
cessed by customers.
(1) Set Date/Time

2200 1) Select [Set Date Time] and press [OK] in the screen
Set Date Time
on the left. The screen shown in step 2) will appear.
Punch for cleaning
Consumable Timer
Language
Laser power measure
ESC OK NEXT
2210 2) Check or enter the date and press [SAVE]. The

CLR
screen shown in step 3) will appear.
Year/Month/Day 7 8 9
2001 6 1
4 5 6
Time
10: 10 1 2 3
0 •
ESC SAVE ENT

Save Data ? [OK].
YES NO step 2).
ESC OK

B.Installation
(2) Punch for cleaning
2200 1) Select [Punch for cleaning] and press [OK] in the
Set Date Time
screen on the left. The screen shown in step 2) will
Punch for cleaning
appear.
Consumable Timer
Language
Laser power measure
ESC OK NEXT
2270 2) Press [OK] to start operating all punches. Pressing

[ESC] or [Cancel] returns you to the screen shown in
step 1).
Start OK ?
ESC OK Cancel

B.Installation
(3) Cosumable Timer
2200 1) Select [Consumable Timer] and press [OK] in the
Set Date Time
Punch for cleaning
appear.
Consumable Timer
Language
Laser power measure
ESC OK NEXT
2240 2) Check or enter values into the following fields.

Running time
0h Running time:
Actual running time The total time the power has been ON.
0h
Exposure time Actual running time:
0h The time the PT-R4300 has actually been in op-
Plate winding cycles
0 eration.
Exposure time:
ESC SAVE NEXT
The amount of time exposure has been per-
formed.
NEXT Plate winding cycles:
The number of times plates have been loaded.
2241 Exterior cover filter:
Exterior cover filter
RESET The usage time of the external cover filter. When
(Max:1000h) 78 h
Clamp cycles the running time reaches the maximum time
(MAX:20000) 786
Plate winding cycles/ye
(1000 hours), a message appears telling you to re-
786 place the external cover filter. After replacing the
external cover filter, press [RESET] to reset the
usage time to “0 h”.
ESC SAVE NEXT
Clamp cycles:
The number of the clamp operations. When the
2242
Punch cycles No.1 accumulated count reaches the maximum

(Max:10000) 78 (20000), a message appears telling you to replace
Punch cycles No.2
(Max:10000) 78 the clamps.
Punch cycles No.3
(Max:10000) 78
Plate winding cycles/ye:
Punch cycles No.4 The number of plate winding operations within a
(Max:10000) 78
year.
ESC SAVE NEXT Punch cycles No. 1 to 8:
The number of punch operations. When the accu-
mulated count reaches the maximum (10000), a
message appears telling you to replace the
punches.

B.Installation
Save Data ? [OK].
YES NO
step 2).
ESC OK
(4) Language
2200 1) Select [Language] and press [OK] in the screen on
Set Date Time
the left. The screen shown in step 2) will appear.
Punch for cleaning
Consumable Timer
Language
Laser power measure
ESC OK NEXT
2250
English
2) Select the desired language and press [OK]. The
screen shown in step 3) will appear.
Japanese
AUX
ESC OK

Save Data ? [OK].
YES NO step 2).
ESC OK

B.Installation
(5) Laser power measure
2200 [Laser power measure]

Set Date Time
Measures the laser output.
Punch for cleaning
Select [Laser power measure] and press [OK] in
Consumable Timer the screen on the left. The screen to select the
Language resolution will appear.
Laser power measure
Pressing [ESC] returns you to the upper layer
Menu screen.
ESC OK NEXT
2260 Select the resolution for measuring the laser

Resolution
power and press [OK].
1200 2000 2400
dpi dpi dpi
The screen for laser output measurement will ap-
pear.
4000 2438 2540
dpi dpi dpi
ESC OK
2261 Press [OK] to execute the laser power measure-

ment.
Start OK ?
ESC OK
2262 During the laser power measurement, the screen

shown on the left is displayed.
Once the laser output measurement has been
Processing Now. completed, the screen shown next will appear.
Please wait !

B.Installation
2263 After completing the laser power measurement,
0ch 100% 8ch 100% 16ch 100% 24ch 100% the screen shown on the left is displayed. This
1ch 100% 9ch 100% 17ch 100% 25ch 100%
2ch 100% 10ch 100% 18ch 100% 26ch 100% screen indicates, in percentage, the laser power of
3ch 100% 11ch 100% 19ch 100% 27ch 100%
4ch 100% 12ch 100% 20ch 100% 28ch 100%
each channel with respect to the target light inten-
5ch 100% 13ch 100% 21ch 100% 29ch 100% sity.
6ch 100% 14ch 100% 22ch 100% 30ch 100%
7ch 100% 15ch 100% 23ch 100% 31ch 100% The standard target light intensities are as noted
below.
OK
These values have been specified in the Laser
16ch only are displayed power setting screen, which is accessible by se-
for PTR4100.
lecting Service Maintenance → Input parameter
→ RH parameter.
1200 dpi: 240 mW/ch 2000 dpi: 270 mW/ch
2400 dpi: 240 mW/ch 2438 dpi: 240 mW/ch
2540 dpi: 230 mW/ch 4000 dpi: 240 mW/ch
The measured values are indicated in mW in the
service mode screen.
2264 Pressing [OK] brings up the screen shown on the

0 8 16 24 left. In this screen, you can check whether the
1 9 17 25
2 10 18 26
cables running from the main unit to the record-
3 11 19 27 ing head are not disconnected.
4 12 20 28
5 13 21 29 ¡ : When the measured light intensity is 50% or
6 14 22 30
7 15 23 31
more of the target light intensity.
× : When the measured light intensity is less
OK than 50% of the target light intensity.
16ch only are displayed The measured values are indicated in % in the
for PTR4100. service mode screen.
1) Operation conditions
The screen to check for the disconnection of image signal cables between the RB31
board and the recording head is displayed when the following conditions are satis-
fied.
• The firmware version of the main unit is:
PT-R4000 : Ver. 3.06 or higher
PT-R4000II : Ver. 4.04 or higher
• A plate has been loaded.
• The Machine Type 2 parameter (Service Maintenance → Set misc. data) has
been set to “4”. (Factory set value: 0)
• The 16 ch exposure mode has not been set.
1) There is no disabled or lowered light intensity LD.
2) The 16 ch exposure mode has not been selected in the Service Maintenance →
Machine option select screen.
B.Installation
2) Description of the operation
The cable disconnection is checked by issuing a pseudo-image signal from the
RB31 board to light up the LDs. The light intensity of each LD is measured using the
calibration sensor. When the measured LD power is insufficient, the sensor identi-
fies it as a cable disconnection.
The check for cable disconnection can be performed only when the recording head
is in the calibration position.
3) Timing of the check

The cable disconnection check timing is:
• After the regular light intensity measurement
1) Before exposing the first plate after turning ON the power supply
2) Before exposing a plate after completing exposure of 24 plates (default value)
Note that if the output laser power of any of the LDs is out of the ± 5% (default value)
range of the target output value, the cable disconnection will not be checked.
4) When the disconnection of any cable between the RB31 board and the recording
head is detected:
If the output laser power of any of the LDs is less than 50% of its target value, the
following error will be issued.
Ex839 The cable between RB31 board and recording head is disconnected.
When this error is issued, the exposure operation is canceled and it can be resumed
after resetting the error and performing an initialization.

B.Installation
(6) Cancel calibration
2201 [Cancel calibration]

Laser calibration
It cancels the laser calibration result and returns to
Cancel calibration
the original status.
Calibration info. In “User Settings” screen, select [Cancel calibra-
Return error to host tion] and hit [OK], and then the resolution selec-
Option setting tion screen is displayed.
[ESC]
ESC OK NEXT
Returns to “User Settings” screen.
2280 Select the resolution that you would like to cancel

Resolution
the calibration, and hit [OK].
1200 2000 2400 The calibration cancellation screen is displayed.
dpi dpi dpi
4000 2438 2540

dpi dpi dpi
ESC OK
2281 The date when the calibration is performed and its

1 9/20 15:35 32ch 100%
status are displayed past 5 times.
2 9/10 10:15 32ch 100% Select the calibration number that you would like
3 8/20 13:35 32ch 100% E0816 to return and hit the key. The confirmation of cali-
4 8/15 19:35 32ch 100% bration cancellation screen is displayed.
5
ESC OK
2282 Press [OK] to execute the laser power measure-

ment.
Start OK ?
YES NO
ESC OK
2283 The left screen is displayed during performing.

It returns to “User Settings” screen after the pro-
cessing is completed.
Processing Now
Please wait !

B.Installation
(7) Calibration info.
2201 1) Select [Calibration info.] and press [OK] in the
Laser calibration
Cancel calibration
appear.
Calibration info.
Return error to host
Option setting
ESC OK NEXT
2) The calibration information will appear. Pressing

[ESC] returns you to the screen shown in step 1).
[Calibration period]
Displays the total time from the start of exposure until automatic calibration is performed.
(Usually every 16 hours)
[Time to next calibration]
Displays the exposure time remaining until the next automatic calibration.
[Reso]
Displays resolutions.
[Channel]
32ch: Indicates that the 32 laser diode channels are calibrated for exposure.
0 to 15ch: Indicates that laser diode channels 0 to 15 are calibrated for exposure as
some of channels 16 to 31 cannot be calibrated to a specific light intensity.
16 to 31ch: Indicates that laser diode channels 16 to 31 are calibrated for exposure as
some of channels 0 to 15 cannot be calibrated to a specific light intensity.
[Pow.]
Displays the percentage of light intensity to which the laser diodes have been calibrated
relative to the preset light intensity value, which is regarded as 100%. Usually the cali-
brated value should be 100%. When the value displayed here is less than 100%, it indi-
cates that there are some channels that cannot be calibrated to the same value as the preset
light intensity and so the channels are calibrated to a lower light intensity than the preset
light intensity. However, the laser diodes are calibrated to a higher light intensity than the
value preset in the media type setting, therefore this will have no effect on exposure
quality. When “???” is displayed, it indicates that the calibration is not performed nor-
mally.

B.Installation
[Cal.]
Displays [req.] until calibration is performed after exposure is completed for the time
displayed in [Calibration period] and also when calibration is required. Displays [done]
when calibration is performed.
[Warning]
Displays the code of any warning/error that occurs while calibration is being performed.
Displays nothing when calibration is performed normally.
(8) Return error to host

Exposure cannot be interrupted from the host computer. Therefore, the interruption command is
sent to the host computer when the power of the main unit is turned OFF during exposure.
2201 1) Select [Return error to host] and press [OK] in the

Laser calibration
Cancel calibration
appear.
Calibration info.
Option setting
ESC OK NEXT
2270 2) Press [OK] to send an error to the host computer.

Pressing [ESC] or [Cancel] returns you to the screen
shown in step 1).
Start OK ?
ESC OK Cancel

B.Installation
(9) Option setting
2201 1) Select [Option setting] and press [OK] in the screen
Laser calibration
on the left. The screen shown in step 2) will appear.
Cancel calibration
Calibration info.
Option setting
ESC OK NEXT
2) Press [SAVE] to save the data. Pressing [ESC] re-

turns you to the screen shown in step 1).
[Buzzer while trans]
Buzzer for rear unloading
ON/OFF /LOUD
[Mistake plate]
Plate that is loaded incorrectly
Remove/Discharge
[Inter leaf warning]
Warning of interleaf discharge
OFF/10 sheets/.../90 sheets/100 sheets
[Preload button]
ON/OFF/COUNTER
[Empty warning]
Warning that no plates remain
ON/OFF

B.Installation
4-9.Exposure check
1) Perform a test exposure with the plate sizes to be used by the customer following the illustra-
tion below.
Use the test patterns 0% and 50% from the Home side to the Away side, and set [Full size] to
ON.
Make sure that there is no plate looseness and also check the grip margins. The following
illustrates the use of a positive-type plate. (For details of adjustment procedures.)
50% 0% 50%
100mm 100mm
2) Perform a full size plate exposure using the Grid pattern and check for any slanting of the
image. (For details of the adjustment parameter.)
3) Perform an exposure via the RIP and check the exposed image with the items described
below.
• Starting point for image exposure (For details of the adjustment parameter.)
• Image position relative to plate (For details of the adjustment parameter.)
• Checking of effective image area (grip margins 12 mm/8 mm) (For details of the adjust-
ment parameter.)
4) When attaching the punch system for printing machine (optional punch), check the edge of
plate and the horizontal position of the punch.

B.Installation
5.Punch attachment (option)
5-1.Attachment
The PT-R4300 can optionally incorporate up to four punches, including five punch types in
addition to the registration punch. Customer’s should attach the optional punches.If optional
punches are provided with the PT-R4300, attach them following the procedure described below.
<Punch types>
Bacher 220, 425
DS 400, 500
Protocol 458
Heidel 425, 393
Komori 550
Maximum attachable punch number: 4 punches
1) Punch set check

Confirm that all required parts, such as punches,
bases, parallel pins, attachment screws and tilt pins,
are set.
(The figure on the left shows a Heidel punch set.)
2) Punch attachment to the base

After confirming the punch front margin the cus-
tomer uses, insert parallel pins into the base holes
and mount a punch block on them.The base can be
used with either side up. A base whose upper surface
Parallel pin shows an “H” mark should be used on the Home side,
and one with an “A” mark should be used on the
Magnet sensor Away side.
3) Magnet sensor attachment

Attach punch magnet sensors facing the marked side
up.
• Be sure to insert the magnet sensors to the fur-

thest end.
Ser.NO Punch No. • When you adjust the sensor, ensure that the
punches are not extended by executing an Ac-
tuator test.

B.Installation
4) Punch attachment to the main unit
Pins Make sure that no dirt or scratches are found on the
main unit’s punch attachment bases before attaching
the punches.When attaching the punches, make sure
that they touch the pin stoppers on the main unit side.
No dirt or scratches on the at- • Check the type of optional punch that the cus-
tachment surface (also on the tomer will use as the required margin at the
punch side)
edge of a plate may vary depending on the
punch type.
• Always turn OFF the power to the main unit dur-
ing the punch attachment.
When the punch is attached (Home side) When the punch in attached (Away side)
5) Connecting connectors
Connect the connectors for motors and sensors. The
connectors are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 from the
Home side. (Registration punches are always con-
nected to Nos. 3 and 4.)
Be careful not to misunderstand the relationships be-
tween actual punch attachment positions and connec-
tor numbers.The motor connectors are marked “M”.
PT-R4300 with punches attached

B.Installation
5-2.Setting the punch name (Service menu)
Punch settings can be made on the main unit with the

procedure described below.
0301 1) Turn ON the power to the main unit, select
[Service] and then press [OK]. (Password: 4000
or 4300)
Infomation
Set punch name
Service
ONLINE OK NEXT
3051 2) Select Input parameter and press [OK].

Input parameter
I/O Read/Write
Initialize data
Special action
ESC OK NEXT
3706 3) Select Set punch data and press [OK].

Punch adjust
Calibration position
Set punch data
RH parameter
Drum parameter
ESC OK NEXT

B.Installation
3880
Block Width 4) Move the cursor to the Block field next to the
No.1
A CLR
0 0
No.2 0 0
punch number and enter the connector numbers
B 7 8 9
No.3 0 0 to which the punches are connected, then press
No.4 0 0
No.5 0 0
C 4 5 6 the [ENT] key.For example, when you wish to
No.6 0 0
No.7 0 0 D 1 2 3 attach the punches to the connectors Nos. 2 and
No.8 0 0
E 0
5, enter “25”.
No.9 0 0 •
ESC SAVE F ENT Enter “25” in this field, for example.
3880
Block Width 5) Enter the punch width in the Width field and
No.1
A CLR
0 0
No.2 0 0
press the [ENT] key, then press [SAVE].
No.3 0 0
B 7 8 9
No.4 0 0 Enter “425” in this field, for example.
No.5 0 0
C 4 5 6
No.6 0 0
No.7 0 0 D 1 2 3
No.8 0 0
No.9 0 0 E 0 •
ESC SAVE F ENT

B.Installation
5-3.Setting the punch name (Main menu)

If optional punch units are installed in the PT-R4300, service personnel will register the name of
each punch unit as one of the punch options (from 1 to 9) on the screen so that you can select and
use it more easily.
The punch name-setting screen also displays the punch unit’s registered pitch in the Maintenance
screen.
Although a punch option can be used without registering its name, be sure to register a name for
each option to facilitate punch unit selection during printing machine setting.
0300 1) In the offline screen, press [NEXT]. The screen

Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE OK NEXT
0301 2) Select [Set punch name] and press [OK]. The punch
name setting screen shown in step 3) will appear.
Infomation
Set punch name
Service
ONLINE OK NEXT
1200 3) Select the number that you intend to set a punch

1 Punch 1 780 mm name and press [OK]. The screen shown in step 4)
2 Punch 2 425 mm will appear.
3 Punch 3 0 mm
4 Punch 4 0 mm
5 Punch 5 0 mm
ESC OK NEXT
Punch pitch

B.Installation
4) Enter a name for a punch (e.g., Bacher 780 mm) in
ESC
the screen on the left.
@ A B C D E F G
BS CLR SPC ENT
SPC Enters a space.

Save Data ? [OK].
YES NO step 3).
ESC OK

B.Installation
5-4.Tilt correction method

• Required items
Bacher register pins
Parts code: 030100072
Name: Register pin
P la te
Loupe
6 .3 5 1) Have two plates with punched holes ready. Turn
OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove the rear
cover.
E m u ls io n
s u rfa c e
2) Set these plates with their emulsion surfaces facing
each other as shown in the figure on the left and slide
the Bacher register pins into the registration pin holes
B a c h e r re g is te r
p in ( 6 .3 5 ) (round).
A
3) Using a loupe (10x), measure the difference between
the layered outer punch holes (indicated as “A” in the
figure on the left) to check the deviation of these
plates.
Correct the measured deviation (A) following the
procedure described below.
S to p p e r p in S to p p e r p in 4) Assume that the measured deviation (A) was 50 µm.

As the deviation can be corrected by shifting the
Home-side punch by 50 µm, remove the punch on
which the Home-side option punch is attached and
replace the parallel pins (stopper pins) with tilt pins
S id e s to p p e r p in T e m p la te S id e s to p p e r p in with a 4.9 mm outer diameter.
H o m e -s id e o p tio n p u n c h A w a y-s id e o p tio n p u n c h
4 .6
• Set the tilt pins to the surface of the punch so

that the end of the pin with the required outer
4 .7
diameter is facing upward.

• Be careful not to use an incorrectly sized tilt pin
4 .8
as the diameters vary depending on the shape

4 .9
of the tilt pin, as shown in the figure on the left.

S h a p e o f tilt p in s • Use of a tilt pin allows you to shift the punch
position in increments of 50 µm.

B.Installation
Punch 5) Restore the option punch to its original position.
E n s u re th a t
th e p u n c h
e d g e to u c h e s When restoring the punch, always ensure that
th e tilt p in s .
the punch edge touches the tilt pins.
6) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and make

T e m p la te T ilt p in
punch holes on the plate. Then check the plate devia-
tion following step 3) above.

B.Installation
6.Relocation
This section describes the procedure for relocating the PT-R4000II/PT-R4300 and the relevant
operational precautions.
1) Prior to removing the power cable

• Move the recording head using the Service/Maintenance Menu screen so that the record-
ing head fixing bracket can be attached.
→ Enter the Recording unit test screen.
→ Enter the RH positioning screen.
→ Move the recording head by 365 mm.
(The point where the recording head fixing bracket is attached.)
• Ensure that the transfer path is in a horizontal position. (If not, the transfer path fixing
bracket cannot be attached.)
• Confirm that there is no plate loaded on the recording drum and then confirm that the
trailing edge clamps are located at the clamp driver section.
2) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove the power cable, signal cable, blower
power cable, blower signal cable, and blower hose.
3) Cleaning
Remove the external cover and clean the inside of the machine.
<Points to be cleaned>
• Feed guides (front and rear of the nip roller)
• Nip roller, discharge roller
• Discharge guide
• Punch sections (If the punches have been used for a long time, some aluminum particles
will be left around them.)
• Surface of the recording drum
• Recording head (cover top and objective lens)
4) Attaching fixing brackets

Attach the fixing brackets according to the following procedure.
1. Attach the fixing brackets to the squeeze roller
and the cleaning roller.
Squeeze roller fixing brackets
(HOME side)
Cleaning roller fixing brackets • The fixing brackets for the squeeze roller and
the cleaning roller should be located symmetri-
cally.
• Each fixing bracket for the squeeze roller is se-
cured with a nut. Be careful not to drop the nut.
<HOME side> <AWAY side> • Ensure that the fixing brackets for the squeeze
roller properly touch the squeeze roller shaft.

B.Installation
Make sure that the end of each fixing bracket’s

screw touches the bearing section of the cleaning
roller.
<Fixing screws>
Squeeze roller fixing brackets
Spring washer and thick washer (for M4)
Nut (for M4)
Cleaning roller fixing brackets
M4 x 10 cap bolt
2. Attach the fixing brackets to the transfer path.
The fixing brackets should be located symmetrically.

Transfer path fixing brackets <Fixing screws>
M4 x 10 cap bolt
M5 x 12 cap bolt
M6 x 15 cap bolt
<HOME side> <AWAY side>
Squeeze sideplate fixing brackets 3. Attach the fixing brackets to the clamp arm and
the squeeze sideplate.
• The fixing brackets should be located sym-

metrically.
<HOME side> <AWAY side> • Note that if a longer screw is mistakenly used
Clamp arm fixing brackets for securing the fixing brackets for the squeeze
sideplate, it will contact the clamp driver frame.
• Firmly secure the clamp arm.
<Fixing screws>
Clamp arm fixing brackets
M5 x 12 cap bolt
M6 x 15 cap bolt
Squeeze sideplate fixing brackets
M5 x 8 cap bolt

B.Installation
4. Attach the fixing brackets to the engine base.
Be sure to secure the fixing screws in the order shown in the figure below. If you mistak-
enly secure the screws on the frame side first, the engine base may move during trans-
portation of the machine, which could result in misregistration and front sensor error.
Home side on the front side Away side on the front side Center of the rear side
<Fixing screws>
M10 x 25 cap bolt
<Procedure for securing the engine base fixing brackets>

a. First secure the four screws by hand.
b. Gradually tighten the four screws using a hexagonal wrench. (Tighten the screws in 60 degree
increments.)
c. Finally, tighten the screws on the engine base side and then tighten those on the frame side.
While tightening the screws, check the contact between the engine base and the fixing bracket.
1 2
E n g in e b a s e s id e
E n g in e b a s e fixin g 3
4
b ra c ke t G ra d u a lly tigh te n e a ch
s cre w in 6 0 d e g re e F in a lly , s e c u re th e
in c re m e n ts . (4 p la c e s) s c re w s in n u m e ric a l
o rd e r (fro m 1 to 4 ).
F ra m e s id e
Recording head fixing brackets 5. Attach the fixing screws for the recording head.
The fixing brackets are attached to the recording
head base and the electrical system section.
• If the fixing bracket positions have shifted later-

Left side Right side
ally, adjust them by turning the knob for the lat-
eral feed motor.
• Do not touch the ball screw or rail. (This can
cause rust.)
Reference) Rust preventive lubricant for the rail
Electrical system sec- For PT- R4300 (s/n:
tion fixing brackets 7, 9 onward) only ThreeBond 1804
Upper side
B.Installation
<Fixing screws>
Recording head fixing brackets
M6 x 15 cap bolt
Electrical system section fixing brackets
M5 x 12 cap bolt
Ball screw 6. Attaching the fixing bracket to the ball screw

fixing bracket <Fixing screws>
M4 x 10 cap bolt
7. Attaching the fixing bracket to the blower

<Fixing screws>
M10 x 25 cap bolt
M6 x 15 cap bolt
Blower fixing bracket
Cushioning material for nip roller 8. Attaching the cushioning materials

Open the door of the PT-R4300 and remove the
discharge tray. Attach each piece of cushioning
material with tape to the positions indicated in
the figure.
Left side Right side Next, replace the discharge tray, attach cushion-
Cushioning material for discharge tray ing materials for the discharge guide with tape,
and then tape the fixing screws for the discharge
guide.
Fixing screws
Left side Right side

Discharge tray

B.Installation
9. Protecting the discharge roller
Iinterleaf
Cover the discharge roller of the transfer path with
interleaf or other material.
If you do not cover the discharge roller, it may

press tightly against the lower roller and an ab-
normal sound may be heard when a plate is dis-
charged.
Filter
10. Attaching the filter protection tape
Tape the filter onto the left side cover of the PT-
R4300.
Tape
11. Packing the punch debris receptacle

Remove the punch debris receptacle from the rear
Punch debris
receptacle cover and pack it.
12. Attaching the hoist attachments

Attach the hoist attachments and the connecting
beam to the lower section of the machine.
Hoist attachments
connecting beam
13. Others
Protect the operation panel, connector connecting
sections, and other parts with vinyl bags.

B.Installation
7.Installation check sheet
Installation data:
Person in charge:
Mfg. No.: PT-R4000/PT-R4000II/PT-R4300 (s/n: )
Firmware: Ver.
Customer name:
Customer address:
Option: SA-L4000/MA-L4000/SA-L4300/MA-L4300/AT-T4000/Others ( )
Media type and plate size to use:
Optional punch: mm (Margin mm)
Work descriptions Check items Remarks Check

Minimum delivery Width: 1760 mm or more,
path dimensions Depth: 1150 mm or more,
Height: 1185 mm or more
Floor load capacity 3920N/m2 (400kgf/m2)
Power supply Single-phase 200 V to 240 V +6% Main unit only (common to the PT-R4000 (II) and
-10%, 15 A PT-R4300)
Single-phase 200 V to 240 V +6% SA-L/MA-L included
-10%, 20 A
Components Check the items on the packing list.
Installation of
main unit
Removal of the Transport fixing bracket: 17 pcs.,
transport fixing cushioning material: 5 pcs.
brackets
Level adjustment
Blower connection
Power connection
to main unit
Energization
Version check Main unit, panel, recording head
Initial settings Plate type
Plate
Printing machine information
Exposure conditions
Operation checks Lowest position of the transfer path Ensure that the distance between the transfer path
and the stopper is within 0.5 mm.
Plate loading position onto the drum Ensure that the largest size plate comes into contact
with the drum around the area below the leading
edge clamp position.
Positional relationship between the Ensure that the Away side of the plate is inclined
plate and the registration pins while 0.5 to 1.0 mm with respect to the Home side of the
the plate is being transferred. plate. (Up to 420)
Plate side alignment Ensure that the centering unit bearing is in touch
with the plate.
Left/right position of the plate with Ensure that the center of the registration pins aligns
respect to the registration pins of the with the center of the plate punches or are slightly
recording drum shifted to the right (within 0.5 mm).
Timing when the nip roller is Ensure that, during plate winding, the plate momen-
released tarily stops approximately 3 mm before reaching
the registration pins.
Plate winding condition Ensure that the plate is in touch with the registra-
tion pins.
Operation of the leading edge
detection sensors
Front sensor offset value
Displacement sensor offset value

B.Installation
Work descriptions Check items Remarks Check
Operation checks Leading edge clamp grip margin 13.2 mm (for the standard 15 mm type)
Trailing edge clamp grip margin 7 mm
Teaching of plate lengths in the Y Ensure that an error occurs when the plate length is
direction ± 2.5 mm of the specified length.
Laser calibration
Registration punch positions Modify the Punch adjust value, if necessary.
Processor setting Mitsubishi: 30 °C, 20 S; Fuji: 30 °C,
checks 12 S; KPG: 30 °C, 25 S
Exposure adjust- Focus, zoom, light intensity
ment
Exposure checks Exposure of the line and space Checking for the plate looseness (all sizes)
pattern on the entire plate
Any scratches on unexposed plates
Exposure of tint images Checking positive plates by exposing 85% (0%) tint
and negative plates 100% tint.
Exposure of the grid pattern Checking for tilt of the exposed grid pattern and
confirmation of correct exposure size and plate reg-
istration
Installation of the Checking the margins and left/right
punch system for positions
printing machine
RIP connection
Exposure checks Effective image area
from the RIP Grip margins and left/right exposure
positions
Screen gradation Checking the resolution (dpi) and screen ruling that
are used by the user.

C. Replacement &
Adjustment
C.Replacement & Adjustment
1. Main belt replacement

1) Confirm that the power to the PT-R4300 has been
Motor plate turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover.
2) Loosen the motor plate screw.

Next mortor plate move to up.
3) Remove the encoder fix plate.

(Not need remove encorder)
Replacement main belt.
• Do not need oil for belt.

• When replacement belt,cut the tie band(down
side).
Encoder fix plate
4) The appropriate belt tension for the PT-R4000/

4000II is 6 to 20 kgf. Adjust the belt tension until it is
within this range using the belt tension jig.
First remove the screw that secures the encoder cable
and then attach the belt tension jig as shown in the
photo on the left.
Next, temporarily secure the motor plate using the
motor’s own weight.
Once the jig bolt has come into contact with the mo-
Belt tension jig
tor plate surface, rotate the hexagonal bolt a half turn
and secure the motor plate screw. The belt tension
has now been adjusted appropriately.
If the belt vibrates or the output image appears im-
properly, further rotate the hexagonal bolt approxi-
mately one-sixth of a turn to increase the tension.
Belt tension should not be excessively tightened

or loosened.
Tension adjusting bolt
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL C-1

5) Fix the encoder fix plate.And remove the belt tension
jig.
Next fix the encoder cable,turn ON the power to the
PT-R4300.
0101 6) Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen to ad-

just the drum home position.
P T- R 4 X X X
<Drum home position adjustment method>
Simultaneously press the two areas marked
with circles on the screen shown on the left.
→ Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu
’01.05.01 screen.
START V1.00
→ Enter the Drum Test screen and press Zero
Return. (The pulse at the encoder home po-
sition will be checked.)
→ Rotate the drum by hand until it reaches the
position where lock pins can be inserted.
(The drum can be rotated in the either direc-
tion.)
→ Execute the Actuator test command to insert
the lock pin into the drum on both the Home
and Away sides.
→ Enter the Drum base position screen from
Position where the lock pin can be in-
serted into the drum the Input parameter screen then read and
save the drum home position.
(Save the setting.)
→ It is also possible to initialize the main unit.
7) Load a plate onto the drum and perform exposure of

a test pattern to check that the image is output with no
problem.
A jig for the PT-R4300 is currently being developed.
(As of May 7, 2002)
<Required tools and jigs>

L-shaped wrench (for M6 screws and M4 set
screws)
Belt tension jig
<Required work time>
Approximately 1 hour
C-2 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL
How to adjust the belt tension without using a belt tension jig
1) Push one side of the belt toward the opposite side with your hand and measure the space
between the belt positions.
2) After replacing the belt, push one side of the belt toward the opposite side with your hand
and adjust the belt tension until the space between the belt positions is equivalent to that of
the previous belt.
3) Load a plate onto the drum and perform exposure of a test pattern to check that the image is
output with no problem.

2. Encoder replacement
turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover.
Encoder
2) Remove the encoder cover.
3) Loosen the two M3 set screws which are used to fix

the encoder to the drum shaft.The encoder is hollow.
A drum shaft goes into the encoder center hole and
connects it with the encoder.
4) Remove the encoder fixing screws and replace the

encoder with a new one. Also replace the cable tie
band with a new one.
Positions for encoder fixing screws
5) Insert the drum shaft into the encoder hole until the
plate spring bracket used for the encoder attachment
comes into contact with the attachment plate.
One of the set screws must be set against the shaft’s
D-cut portion.
Push the encoder to the
parts contact point.
Attachment plate
Attachment plate
Encoder
6) Fix the set screws while the drum is rotating.Install
the encoder so that any distortion of its rear side
caused by rotation of the drum is within 50 µm. If the
amount of distortion exceeds 50 µm, it will result in
deterioration of the image quality.
If the centers cannot be adjusted precisely, set

the shaft’s D-cut portion with the other set screw.
Set the encoder distortion to within
50 µm with a micro gauge.
0101 7) Re-attach the encoder cover and turn ON the power.
P T- R 4 X X X 8) Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen to ad-

just the drum home position.
Please press [START] <Drum home position adjustment method>
Simultaneously press the two areas marked
with circles on the screen shown on the left.
’01.05.01
START V1.00 → Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu
screen.
→ Enter the Drum Test screen and press Zero
Return. (The pulse at the encoder home po-
sition will be checked.)
It is also possible to initialize the main unit.
→ Rotate the drum by hand until it reaches the

position where lock pins can be inserted.
(The drum can be rotated in the either direc-
tion.)
→ Execute the Actuator test command to insert
Position where the lock pin can be in- the lock pin into the drum on both the Home
serted into the drum and Away sides.
→ Enter the Drum base position screen from
the Input parameter screen then read and
save the drum home position.
→ Turn OFF and ON the power to the PT-
R4300 to initialize the machine.

9) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and re-attach
the right side cover.

L-shaped wrench (for M4 screws and M3 set
screws)
Ball driver (for M3 screws)
Magnet stand
Micro gauge (minimum scale: 10 µm)
Tie band (small size: 2 pcs.)
3. Adjusting the automatic balancer weight detection sensors

(Perform this procedure when the operations such as weight replacement, sensor replacement/
adjustment, etc. are required.)
3505 1) Confirm that the power to the PT-R4300 has been

RH zero return
turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover,
RH positioning
front cover, front left cover and rear cover.
Focus zero return
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300.
Focus positioning
→ Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Zoom zero return → Enter the Recording head test screen.
ESC OK NEXT → Enter the RH positioning screen.
→ Input 350 mm and press OK.
(This facilitates observation of the balancer
movement.)
Weight
3) Weights will not be positioned against the outer side
of the guide groove of the drum immediately after
being moved (or attached) by hand (for example after
a weight replacement.)The weights are normally
pressed against the outer side of the guide groove
because they are moved there by centrifugal force.
If the weights are not correctly pressed against the
Weight outer side of the guide groove, the hole of each
weight will be positioned inwards (or downwards) in
respect to its correct position and thus, will be mis-
aligned with the pushpin position. If this occurs,
Guide groove
push the weights up toward the outer side by hand.
Bracket 4) Sensor adjustment
→ Enter the Special action 2 screen.
→ Enter the Balancer test screen.
→ Specify the printing machine setting number in
the Printing No. *> screen and press OK.
(Enter the setting number from among 1 to 15 to
“*”)
→ According to the setting selected above, the PT-
Adjust the brackets for the balancer R4300 automatically moves the weights on the
weight position detection sensors in Home side first. (After the Home side weights are
the front and back directions (as indi-
cated with an arrow in the figure
completely moved, the Away side ones will be
above.) moved.)
When the weights are moved, check whether or
not the tip of the moving pin properly enters the
center hole of each weight.
If it is misaligned, adjust the bracket for the bal-
ancer weight position detection sensor in the front
and back directions.
An error will occur if the weight detection sensors
are defectively positioned.
• If the same printing machine setting is repeat-

edly selected, the weights will move only the
first time. Therefore, select a different setting
number every time.
• The drum rotates clockwise when viewed from
its right.
4460 5) Confirmation
Initialize
Balancer test
→ Enter the Special action 2 screen.
Mail test → Enter the Balancer test screen.
Auto loader test → Specify the printing machine setting number in
Plate pad test
the Printing No. *> screen and press OK.
(Enter the setting number from among 1 to 15 to
ESC OK NEXT
“*”) Repeat the selection several times to confirm
that the weights are smoothly moving.
6) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and reattach

the removed covers.

L-shaped wrench (for M3 screws)
Ball driver (for M3 screws)
Approximately 30 minutes
(for sensor adjustment)
4. Removing the trailing edge clamps

turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover and
rear cover.
4450
Initialize
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and enter the
Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Initialize machine status
→ Enter the Special action screen.
Pick up clamp
→ Select Put clamp on drum and press OK.
Check ORG-EZ → Mount the trailing edge clamps on the drum.
Put clamp on drum
ESC OK NEXT
Trailing edge clamp
3) Rotate the drum by hand until the trailing edge

clamps faces the rear side, then execute Servo ON.
→ Enter the Drum test screen.
→ Select Servo (ON) and press OK
It is easier to remove the clamps when

they are positioned as shown in the
figure above.
Hold down here to release the tabs.
4) While holding the center of the trailing edge clamp

spring section push the tabs with your fingers to re-
move an individual trailing edge clamp from the
drum.
• Carefully conduct this operation to maintain the

flatness of the trailing edge clamps.
If any of them are not flat, a plate may detach
from the drum during exposure.
• Do not wind plates while the trailing edge
Spring section
clamps are removed.

None
5. Attaching the trailing edge clamps
Before attempting to replace the trailing 1) Confirm that the power to the PT-R4300 has been
edge clamps, note down the weights which turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover and
are written on the back side of each trail-
ing edge clamp.
rear cover.
Positioning bolts
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and rotate the

drum by hand until the positioning bolts on the drum
faces the rear side, then execute Servo ON.
→ Select Servo (ON) and press OK.
3) Attach the trailing edge clamps along the respective

positioning bolts on the drum.
1. Touch the trailing edge clamps to the positioning
bolts. (The spring section of each clamp is on
the upper side.)
2. Slide the trailing edge clamps laterally while they
are lightly touching the drum and then position
them when the tabs come evenly into contact with
the clamp rails.
In this state, the surfaces of the clamp tabs are
horizontal with respect to the clamp surface.
• When the clamp is shifted to the right, the right
tab appears as if it is being pressed down.

3. Press the upper position (center of the spring sec-
tion) of each trailing edge clamp to secure it to the
drum.
Be aware of the following points when attaching

the trailing edge clamps.
• The trailing edge clamps are marked with H, M
or A on their respective back sides.
An “H” marked one should be used for the
Home side.
An “M” marked one should be used for center.
An “A” marked one should be used for the Away
Completed trailing edge clamps
side.
• Attach the trailing edge clamps so that each
spring section is positioned on the upper side
and each plate retaining section is positioned
on the lower side.
Attach the trailing edge clamps while the outer
side of the plate retaining section touches the
positioning bolts.
• Since the PT-R4300 supports wider plate sizes,
the grooved plate attachment screws interfere
with the trailing edge clamps. This makes the
attachment of the trailing edge clamps rela-
tively difficult.
Place the spring section onto the area above
the screws and secure each clamp. Then, align
the clamps with the positioning bolts.
4130 4) Input the total weight of the new trailing edge

CLR
clamps.
7 8 9 Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Clamper: 381.2[g]
4 5 6 → Enter the Input parameter screen.
Balancer: 165.0[g]
1 2 3 → Enter the Set weight screen.
→ Input the total weight of the three trailing edge
0 •
clamps into the “***.**” field of “gclamper
ESC SAVE ENT
***.**”.
→ After the total weight input is complete, press
ENT and SAVE.
Always replace the three clamps at the same

time.

4450
Initialize
5) Mount the trailing edge clamps to the drive bar.
Pick up clamp
→ Select Pick up clamp and press OK.
Check ORG-EZ
Put clamp on drum
the removed covers.
ESC OK NEXT

None
6. Replacement procedure for the trailing edge clamp arm drive mo-
tor (M20)
When the motor (M20) is operating
1) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove
the right side cover and the rear cover.
4450 2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300.

Initialize
Pick up clamp → Select Put clamp on drum and press OK.
Check ORG-EZ → Attach the trailing edge clamps to the drum.
Put clamp on drum
3) Rotate the drum by hand until either the leading or
ESC OK NEXT trailing edge clamps are positioned under the clamp
arm and then execute Servo ON.
4) Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.

→ Enter the Actuator test screen.
→ Select Trail edge clamp arm “DOWN” and press
OK.
Ensure that, at this moment, the clearance be-

tween the end of the hook pin and the drum sur-
face is approximately 1 mm.
5) Remove the trailing edge clamp arm drive motor

(M20), which is attached to the Home side, together
with the gear box (8DG150).
6) After replacing the motor, turn ON the power to the

PT-R4300.
→ Select and execute Trail edge clamp arm “UP”
Motor with gear box and “DOWN” repeatedly to confirm proper op-
eration.
Sensor adjustment is not necessary at this stage.

When the motor (M20) is not operating
the right side cover and the rear cover.
2) Rotate the drum by hand until the leading edge

clamps are positioned at the lower side of the drum
and then execute Servo ON.
Bolt Cam follower flange
3) Insert a bolt into a hole on the cam follower flange on

both the Home and Away sides. Remove the trailing
edge clamp arm drive motor (M20), which is at-
tached to the Home side, together with the gear box
(8DG150).
• Take care during the above removal operation.

Removing the drive motor attachment screws
detaches the motor gear from the other gear. At
this moment, the weight of the clamp arm will
cause it to fall onto the drum side. Support the
clamp arm by hand until it lowers to the screw
position and is settled.
• Use an M6 bolt.
4) Replace the motor with a new one.
5) After replacing the motor, turn ON the power to the

PT-R4300.
→ Select and execute Trail edge clamp arm “UP”
and “DOWN” repeatedly to confirm proper op-
eration.
Drive motor and Gear box
Sensor adjustment is not necessary at this stage.

7. Adjusting the trailing edge clamp arm origin and end sensors
Adjustment of the trailing edge clamp arms 1) Confirm that the power to the PT-R4300 has been
is not required when only the sensors are turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover and
replaced. However, the procedure in this rear cover.
section includes an explanation of sensor-
related operation checks.
4450 2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and enter the

Initialize
Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Pick up clamp → Select Put clamp on drum and press OK.
Check ORG-EZ → Mount the trailing edge clamps on the drum.
Put clamp on drum 3) Rotate the drum by hand until either the leading or
ESC OK NEXT trailing edge clamps are positioned under the clamp
arm and then execute Servo ON. Enter the Service/
Maintenance Menu screen.

→ Select Trail edge clamp arm “DOWN” and press
OK.
Ensure that, at this moment, the clearance be-

tween the end of the hook pin and the drum sur-
face is approximately 1 mm.
5) Together with the gear box (8DG150), remove the

clamp arm drive motor (M20) which is attached to
the Home side.
Drive motor and Gear box 6) Move the sensor bracket to a position where the trail-
Sensor dog ing edge clamp arm end sensor (PH21) reacts when
the clamp arm is positioned at its lower limit point
while the motor is detached, and then fix the bracket
there.
This adjustment is required only when the sensor

bracket fixing screws are loosened, for example,
when only the sensor is replaced.
In addition, this adjustment is not required when
only the motor or sensor is replaced.
Trailing edge clamp arm end sensor (PH21)
Point: The positions of origin and end sensors
for the trailing edge clamp arms are ap-
propriate when each cam follower is hori-
zontally set, each sensor detects a sensor
dog, and there is clearance when the area
circled in the figure on the left is pressed
on both the left and right sides.
Press this area by hand. Cam follower
7) Once the adjustment has been completed, reattach

Trailing edge clamp arm origin sensor (PH20) the motor.

→ Select Initialize and press OK to initialize the ma-
chine. Set Traid edge clamp arm to Up.
Adjust the position of the sensor bracket so that the
clamp arm unit stops at the upper limit point (visu-
ally confirmed).
This adjustment is required only when the sensor

bracket fixing screws are loosened, for example,
when only the sensor is replaced.
In addition, this adjustment is not required when
only the motor or sensor is replaced.
9) Attach the clamps to the clamp arm in accordance

with the instructions in “Removing the trailing edge
clamps” and “Attaching the trailing edge clamps”.

→ Repeatedly set Trail edge clamp arm to Up and
Down to confirm the smooth operation of the
clamp arms.

the removed covers.

Reference
Clamp arm
Cam follower Drum
Clamp arm at its Clamp arm at its Clamp arm at its

Ineffective
lowest position center position highest position

Screwdriver (cross-slot type)

8. Adjusting the leading edge clamp open/close sensors

<Introduction>
The type of compression springs used for the leading edge clamps have been changed.
This is due to an engineering change to facilitate adjustment of the opening width of the
leading edge clamps and to stabilize the open/close operation.
(For details, refer to technical information No. 0009. PT-R4300s with serial No.: 0071
and onward.) Note that different types of compression spring cannot be used together.

turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover,
rear cover and front cover.
3202 2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and rotate the

M20:Squeeze roller Up Down drum by hand until the leading edge clamps are posi-
M20:Tail edge clamp arm Up Down
tioned at the lower side of the drum. Then, follow the
procedure below. Enter the Service/Maintenance
M24:Tail edge clamp hook Hold Rele
Menu screen.
M30:Leading edge clamp Up Down → Enter the Drum test screen.
ESC OK
→ Set Leading edge clamp to Down.
Then, move the attachment position of the brack-
ets for the leading edge clamp open sensors
(PH31H, PH31A) in the front/back directions so
that the clearance between the leading edge clamp
release bar and the drum can be adjusted.
Adjustment values
PT-R4000 (up to serial number 70): 5 mm
PT-R4000 (serial numbers 71 to 420): 4.5 mm
PT-R4000II (serial number 421 and onward):
Point: Use a 5 mm diameter hexago- 4.5 mm
nal wrench to check the 5 mm PT-R4300 (serial number 1 and onward): 4.5
clearance.
mm

→ Set Leading edge clamp to up.
→ Select Leading edge clamp and press OK.
Rotate the drum to the plate winding start posi-
tion.
For 4.5 mm: Adjust using a 4 mm hex-
agonal wrench and a 15
cm scale.
→ Set Lock pin (Home) to In.
→ Set Lock pin (Away) to In.
Perform the drum positioning.

→ Select Servo (OFF) and press OK.
→ Release the servo function.
View the machine from the front or the side to con-
firm that the leading edge clamps open by approxi-
mately 4 mm.
And also make sure that the gear of the motor should
Leading edge clamp not reverse when its movement stopped.
The width of the opening for the lead-

ing edge clamp should be approxi-
mately 4 mm.
Bracket for leading edge clamp open/

close end sensor (PH31H)

→ Set Leading edge clamp to Down.
→ Set Leading edge clamp to Up.
Repeat this process to confirm smooth operation.

→ Select Initialize and press OK to initialize the ma-
chine.

the removed covers.

L-shaped wrench (for M5 and M4 screws)
9. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate side edge

detection sensors for side alignment (PH61H, PH61A)
After replacing the plate side edge detection sensors, the following sensor offset values need to be
adjusted.Use the 510 x 400 x 0.15 plate. (If it is not available, use the thinnest plate from among
the customer’s plates.)
1. Coarse adjustment
turned OFF, and then remove the upper rear cover
and rear cover.
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 to initialize the

Graduated scale Plate machine.
3) Open the operation door and set a plate on the trans-

fer path.The plate must be aligned with the graduated
scale on the transfer path.

→ Select Centering test
→ Select “plate size” and OK
If an error occurs, perform the operation in
Set the plate center within 10 mm of
the path center. “Countermeasure for errors” described later and
then go back to step 3) above.When the test has
been successfully completed with no error, press
4451
“ESC” key .
Front sensor offset
The first parameter in “Punch Adjust” has to be
Centering test determined by changing this value every 0.5 mm,
Adjust displacement sensor and then the maximum and the minimum value
NVRAM backup
will be detemined without error.
And then the middle value betweeen them has to
NVRAM restore
be set.
ESC OK NEXT
5) Shift the plate 10 mm to the Home side (Away side)
and execute the Centering test command to confirm
that no error occurs.
The cam follower pushing against one side of the

plate at this moment will not affect the operation.

2. Fine adjustment
1) Move the plate 10 mm toward the Away side and
enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
→ Select Centering test and press OK. At this time,
be sure that the distance between the plate center
and the path center does not exceed 10 mm.
2) If an error occurs, perform the operation in “Counter-

Move the plate to the Away side.
measure for errors” described later and then go back
to step 1) above. When no error occurs, go on to step
3).
3) When the plate stopper (Home side cam follower)

has pushed the plate to the farthest point on the Away
side during the centering operation, confirm with
your hands and eyes that the plate is properly cen-
tered.
Then check the following points.
• When the plate stopper has pushed the plate
too far:
Confirm here.
3860
→ Enter the Input parameter screen.
Punch adjust CLR
→ Reduce the second parameter value for Punch
7 8 9
0.000 [mm] Change the adjust, execute the Centering test command
4 5 6
0.000 [mm] value here. again to cancel the test mode and then go back
1 2 3
0.000 [mm]
0 •
to step 1) above.
ESC SAVE ENT • When the plate stopper does not reach the
plate:
Increase the second parameter value for Punch ad-
just, execute the Centering test command again to
cancel the test mode and then go back to step 1)
above.
• When the plate stopper pushes the plate cor-
rectly:
(Although you will feel some resistance when
attempting to move the plate by hand, the
plate can be moved.)
Execute the Centering test command again to can-
cel the test mode and then go on to step 4) below.

4) Move the plate 10 mm toward the Home side and
enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
→ Execute the Centering test command. At this mo-
ment, be sure that the distance between the plate
center and the path center does not exceed 10 mm.
5) If an error occurs, perform the operation in “Counter-

measure for errors” described later and then go back
Move the plate to the Home side.
to step 4) above.When no error occurs, go on to step
6).
6) When the plate stopper (Away side cam follower)

has pushed the plate to the farthest point on the Away
side during the centering operation, confirm with
your eyes that the plate is properly centered.
Then check the following points.
• When the plate stopper has pushed the plate
too far:
Confirm here. → Enter the Input parameter screen.
3860
→ Reduce the third parameter value for Punch ad-
CLR
Punch adjust just, execute the Centering test command again
7 8 9
0.000 [mm]
Change the
to cancel the test mode and then go back to step
4 5 6
0.000 [mm]
1 2 3
value here. 4) above.
0.000 [mm]
0 •
• When the plate stopper does not reach the
ESC SAVE ENT plate:
Increase the third parameter value for Punch ad-
just, execute the Centering test command again to
cancel the test mode and then go back to step 4)
above.
• When the plate stopper pushes the plate cor-
rectly:
(Although you will feel some resistance when
attempting to move the plate by hand, the
plate can be moved.)
Execute the Centering test command again to can-
cel the test mode and then go on to step 7) below.

7) Align the plate center and the path center and execute
the Centering test command again.Check the plate
centering condition, when the plate stopper pushes
the plate farthest at this moment.When the plate has
been properly pressed (Although you will feel
some resistance when attempting to move the
plate by hand, the plate can be moved.), execute
the Centering test command again to cancel the test
mode and then complete the adjustment operation.If
the plate has been pressed too far or insufficiently,
go back to step 2. – 1) above.
And the plate size must be back to the catalogue size
in the end.
8) After completing the adjustment, check the amount

that each plate stopper pushes all of the different
plate sizes.
Smaller plates are likely to be pushed excessively.

the removed covers.
3860 [Countermeasure for errors]

Punch adjust CLR
• When the “The size check program of the centering
7 8 9 function detects that the measured plate size is
0.000 [mm]
4 5 6 shorter than expected one” error message is dis-
0.000 [mm]
1 2 3 played, increase the 1st parameter value in the
0.000 [mm] Punch adjust of the Input parameter in the service/
0 •
maintenance mode.
ESC SAVE ENT
• When the “The size check program of the centering
function detects that the measured plate size is
longer than expected one” error message is dis-
played, reduce the 1st parameter value in the Punch
adjust of the Input parameter in the service/mainte-
nance mode.
• When the “When alignment is performed, plate set
position is out of range” error message is displayed,
set the plate so that the plate center will be posi-
tioned within 10 mm of the path center.

None
<Reference>
Centering sequence (for PT-R4300/PT-R4100)
Start
Plate thickness is 0.24 Yes

mm or less?
No
Transfer motor: 50 mm/ Transfer motor:

sec. intermittent drive
Both PH61H and PH61A

Ex1c9
are OFF? No
Yes
Plate side alignment [Moving distance]

drive motor: M61 Home side: (830 - Plate's X size) / 2 + 27.65 + offset value
Forward rotation at 20 Away side: (830 - Plate's X size) / 2 + 22.5 + offset value
mm/sec. Offset value: First parameter displayed in the screen.
Interruption of PH61H ON Interruption of PH61A ON

status status
→ Remaining distance is → Remaining distance is
stored. (restPH) stored. (restPA)
M61 stops due to any of the

following conditions:
Remaining distance is "0".
Both PH61H and PH61A are
ON.
Remaining distance > (15 +
1.5)
Remaining distance > Yes

2 mm Ex156
No
PH61H or PH61A is Yes

OFF? Ex157
No
restPH > (15 + 1.5) mm Yes

or Ex1c9
restPA > (15 + 1.5) mm
No
[Home side offset value]
Yes Second parameter displayed in the
restPH > restPA screen.
[Away side offset value]
No Third parameter displayed in the screen.
D = restPA - restPH D = restPH - restPA
D > 1.5 mm + Away side Yes D > 1.5 mm + Home side Yes
offset value offset value
No D = 1.5 mm + Away side No D = 1.5 mm + Home side

Plate side alignment

drive motor: M61 Further movement of the plate stoppers
Forward rotation at 1.25 = 1.5 + (Home side offset value + Away side offset value - D) / 2
mm/sec.
Waiting for 0.5 sec.

drive motor: M61
Reverse rotation by 3
mm at 5.0 mm/sec.
Waiting for specified Waiting time [sec.]

period = 5 - {(830 - plate's X size) / 2} / 20 / 2

mm or less?
No Transfer motor:
Continuous feeding at 50
mm/sec.
Plate side alignment drive

motor: M61
Forward rotation by 3 mm
at 5.0 mm/sec.
Waiting for 2 sec.
Transfer motor stops.
End

Centering sequence (for PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
Start

mm or less?
No
Transfer motor: 50 mm/ Transfer motor:

sec. intermittent drive
Both of PH61H and

Ex1c9
PH61A are OFF? No
Yes
Plate side alignment [Moving distance]

drive motor: M61 Home side: (830 - Plate's X size) / 2 + 27.65 + offset value
Forward rotation at 20 Away side: (830 - Plate's X size) / 2 + 22.5 + offset value
mm/sec. Offset value: First parameter displayed in the screen.
Interruption of PH61H ON Interruption of PH61A ON

status status
→ Remaining distance is → Remaining distance is
stored. (restPH) stored. (restPA)
M61 stops due to either of

the following conditions:
Remaining distance is "0".
Both PH61H and PH61A are
ON.
Remaining distance > Yes

2 mm Ex156
No
PH61H or PH61A is Yes

OFF? Ex157
No
restPH > (15 + 1.5) mm Yes

or Ex1c9
restPA > (15 + 1.5) mm
No
[Home side offset value]
Yes Second parameter displayed in the
restPH > restPA screen.
[Away side offset value]
No Third parameter displayed in the screen.
D = restPA - restPH D = restPH - restPA
D > 1.5 mm + Away side Yes D > 1.5 mm + Home side Yes
No D = 1.5 mm + Away side No D = 1.5 mm + Home side


drive motor: M61 Further movement of the plate stoppers
Forward rotation at 1.25 = 1.5 + (Home side offset value + Away side offset value - D) / 2
mm/sec.
Waiting for 1 sec.

drive motor: M61
Reverse rotation by 3
mm at 5.0 mm/sec.
Waiting for specified Waiting time [sec.]

period = 5 - {(830 - plate's X size) / 2} / 20

mm or less?
No Transfer motor:
Continuous feeding at 50
mm/sec.
Plate side alignment drive

motor: M61
Forward rotation by 3 mm
at 5.0 mm/sec.
Waiting for 5 sec.
Transfer motor stops.
End

10. Adjusting the trailing edge clamp hook sensor
1) Remove the right side cover, front cover and rear

cover.

Initialize
Pick up clamp → Select Put clamp on drum and press OK to mount
Check ORG-EZ the trailing edge clamps on the drum.
Put clamp on drum
ESC OK NEXT

and then fix the drum.
→ Enter the Drum screen.
Do not remove this sensor unit (on the

Away side). Only remove the sensor
unit on the left side.
4) Remove the cleaning roller. Next, remove the screws

that attach the hook lever switch sensor unit (on the
Home side only) to slightly move up the sensor unit.
While moving the clamp hook, be careful not to

catch the sensor cable as well.
Sensors (PH24-2, PH24-1)

→ Set Trail edge clamp hook to Rele and adjust the
tab positions for the trailing edge clamp hook sen-
sors (PH24-1, PH24-2.) Each hook lever that
moves up and down is positioned at its lower
limit, where a bearing cam lightly mounts the top
surface of a slide-shaped part.
Tab: A metal plate to attach the clamp hook sensor
Tab
The drive bar has been removed in the <Reference>

photo above to make it easier to observe PH24-1 PH24-2
the unit. Do not remove it, however, dur-
ing actual operation. Otherwise the accu- Rele on on
rate adjustment of the drum and the drive Hold (one pressing) off off
bar will be lost. Hold (two pressings) on off
on→The light passage to the sensor is not ob-
structed.
3202 6) Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.

Up
M20:Squeeze roller Down
M20:Tail edge clamp arm Up Down → Repeatedly set Trail edge clamp to Rele and Hold
to confirm the smooth operation of the clamp
M24:Tail edge clamp hook Hold Rele
hook.
M30:Leading edge clamp Up Down
7) Re-attach the sensor unit which was removed in step
ESC OK 4) above. Re-attach the cleaning roller.
Activate the clamp hook to confirm that it does

not catch with the sensor cable.
8) Attach the trailing edge clamps to the drive bar fol-

lowing the procedures described in “Removing the
trailing edge clamps” and “Attaching the trailing
edge clamps” sections.

the removed covers.
The sensor bracket has been attached to the

Home side when the machine is delivered.

Nipper
Interlock release jig
Clamp mechanism (Reference)
mechanism(Reference)
Sensors (PH24-2, PH24-1)
Hook lever
Jig

11. Adjusting the hook lever switch

Hook lever switches are only installed in PT-R4000s with serial numbers 1 to 35. Therefore, this
adjustment is only required for these machines.
1) Remove the right side cover, front cover and rear

cover.

Initialize
Pick up clamp → Select Put clamp on drum and press OK to mount
Check ORG-EZ the trailing edge clamps on the drum.
Put clamp on drum
ESC OK NEXT

and then fix the drum. Enter the Service/Mainte-
nance Menu screen.
→ Enter the Drum screen.
3100 4) Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.

11 PH10H 6 PH11A2 11 PH27-1 16 PH30H
PH10A 7 PH20 12 PH27-2 17 PH30A
→ Set Trail edge clamp to Rele twice consecutively
2
3 PH11H1 8 PH21 13 PH27-3 18 PH31H

to confirm that the hook lever switches (LS28)
PH11H2 PH24-1 PH29H PH31A
4 9 14 19
turn ON.
5 PH11A1 10 PH24-2 15 PH29A 20 LS28
<Confirmation method>
ESC OK NEXT • Check that all hook levers have returned.
• Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
→ Enter the Sensor screen to confirm that the
sensors are actually ON.

→ Set Trail edge clamp hook to Hold and confirm
that the hook lever switches (LS28) turn OFF. In
addition, set Trail edge clamp hook to Rele> and
confirm that the hook lever switches (LS28) are
still OFF.

Brackets for the hook lever switches 6) If the confirmations described in steps 4) and 5)
above were not successfully performed, adjust the
attachment positions of brackets for the hook lever
switches (LS28-1 to LS28-6) in the vertical direction
until the hook lever switches work as described in
steps 4) and 5).
<Adjustment point>
→ When Trail edge clamp is set to Rele twice
continuously, the hook lever actuators moni-
tored by the hook lever switches (LS28-1 to
LS28-6) must be within 0.5 mm to their re-
spective stroke end points (0.5 mm before the
red notch on each sensor micro switch is fully
pressed.)
7) Repeat steps 4) and 5) to confirm that the hook lever

switches correctly turn ON and OFF.
8) Attach the trailing edge clamps to the drive bar fol-

lowing the procedures described in “Removing the
trailing edge clamps” and “Attaching the trailing
edge clamps” sections.

the removed covers.

12. Sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of the plate (PH51)
The following sensitivity adjustment is required after the sensor for detecting an interleaf on the
back of the plate is replaced.
Detection hole 1) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 to initialize the

machine and open the operation door.
2) Place a plate over the detection hole of the transfer

path.
3) Press the SET button for the sensor amplifier unit.At

this moment, the tuning indicator for the sensor am-
plifier unit will be ON (yellow LED).
Transfer path
4) Remove the plate placed over the detection hole and
place an interleaf over the detection hole.
5) Press the SET button for the sensor amplifier unit.At

this moment, the tuning indicator for the sensor am-
plifier unit will be ON (yellow LED).
6) Confirm that the amplifier operation indicator (red

LED) is ON when an interleaf that has been layered
Plate with a plate is placed over the detection hole. The
indicator should be OFF when a plate alone is placed
over the detection hole or the detection hole is left
uncovered.
7) Turn OFF the power.
operation indicator
OFF.D
ON.D
DON
Lock
LON
OFF
SET Lamp
Interleaf
Sensor amplifier unit
SET button
Sensor amplifier

None
13. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate top side de-
tection sensors (PH29H, PH29A)
The following adjustment is required after the plate top side detection sensors (PH29H, PH29A)
are replaced.Be sure to turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 during the sensor replacement.
When using the PT-R4000 (Ver. 3.XX or lower)

1) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R unit and remove the
front cover and the rear cover. Then, replace the sen-
sors.
Drum surface 2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 to initialize the

machine.
22mm 26mm 26mm 22mm
3) Fix the replaced sensors at the angle shown in the
PH29H A
PH29 figure on the left.
4) Rotate the drum until it reaches the leading edge

clamp open/close position, where lock pins can be
inserted into the drum.
→ Set Lock pin (Home, Away) to IN.

→ Set the Leading edge clamp to down and mount a
test plate (jig) from the front side.
Prepare a test plate as a jig.

(With Register Punch)
One of the user’s plates can be used.
less than 70mm
Trimmer
→ Set Leading edge clamp to up to grip the plate.
→ Set Lock pin (Home, Away) to OUT.

→ Select Servo (OFF) and press OK.

→ Enter the Sensor test screen.
→ Light up the PH29H and PH29A sensor indica-
tors.
9) Position the drum by hand so that the sensor rays in

area around the top side of the plate seen through the
(70-80%) detection hole.

Adjust the trimmer so that the sensor
→ Select Front check and press OK.
turns ON when approximately 70 to
80% of this area of the plate is exposed and confirm sensor doesn’t light on.
by the sensor beam. Confirm that the sensor light must be off.
If not, enter the service maintenance mode,
Plate
→ Input parameter view
→ Drum position view
→ Adjust the value of the Front sensor.
(Decrease value can move to clock side)

→ Select Sensor offset.
→ Select Plate type and press OK.
12) Confirm the correct sensor operations by the manual

Check that the Home and Away side loading of a plate.
sensors are simultaneously ON in the
area around the top side of the plate.
Be sure to confirm the sensor operations using all
4451
Front sensor offset the plates that the customer will use.
Centering test And Adjust the offset if the thickness is different
Adjust displacement sensor
just in case even though the same type of plate.
NVRAM backup 13) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and reattach
NVRAM restore
the removed covers.
ESC OK NEXT

Screwdrivers (small flat-bladed type)
Tie band
Nipper
When using the PT-R4000 (Ver. 4.XX or later), PT-R4000II, or PT-R4300,PT-R4100:
In Ver. 4.00, modifications have been made to the Front check sequence in order to enhance the
operation speed. These modifications also allow the effective detection area for Front check to be
specified by the operator.
• Before modification
1. The drum was rotated toward the position for front check.
2. The drum was rotated at low speed and the positions at which the home and away front
sensors turned ON were detected according to the programmed setting.
• After modification
1. The positions at which the home and away front sensors turn ON are detected in the effec-
tive detection area during drum rotation according to the operator specified setting.
#Precaution
Due to the sequence modification, upgrading the firmware to Ver. 4.00 may cause a
front sensor error and thus prevent plates from winding around the drum. To avoid
this, perform the following checks and adjustments before upgrading.
[Check and adjustment procedure]

1. Check the front check position that is currently set. After winding a plate around the drum,
select “Drum test” and then “Front check”.
Check that either the home or away front sensor is ON. The adjustment is not required when
either sensor is ON.
3300
Zero Leading
Fast Slow
Return Clamp
Front Tail Edge

Squeeze sense
check clamp
Servo Servo Error Brake

(ON) (OFF) Clear On/Off
ESC OK
2. When both sensors are OFF, modify the value for front sensor of Drum position accessed
from the Input parameter screen.
• Adjust the front sensor value until the sensor height is level, with reference to the center of
the plate edge, so that either the home or away sensor is ON.
• When the plate is located at a position where both the home and away sensors are ON,
adjust the front check position so that the plate is located at the position closest to the point
where the sensors turn ON.
3850
Drum position [pulse] CLR
Lead clamp (load): 0
Front Sensor: 0 7 8 9
Tail clamp: 0
Squeeze roller: 0 4 5 6
Balancer pin: 0
Pick up clamp: 3 1 2 3
Tail clamp (unload): 0
Length Sensor: -15 0 . -
ESC SAVE ENT

14. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the drum vacuum

pressure sensor (P1)
The following sensitivity adjustment is required after the drum vacuum pressure sensor is re-
placed.
1) Remove the front left cover, left side cover and rear
cover from the PT-R4300.
2) Remove the sensor with its bracket and then remove

the sensor from the bracket.
(The sensor cannot be removed when the bracket is
attached to the machine.)Re-attach the bracket after
attaching a new sensor to it.
• Also remove the blower hose if necessary.

• Do not remove the rubber packing from the
bracket.
Bracket
Sensor 3) Fully rotate to the right the yellow trimmer (“HYS”)
which is used for sensor sensitivity setting.
4) While the drum blower is OFF, rotate the blue trim-

mer (“SET”) which is used for sensor pressure set-
ting and adjust it to the position where the indicator
turns from ON to OFF.

→ Set Blower (Drum) to ON.Confirm that the sensor
indicator turns ON.If not, slowly rotate the blue
trimmer (“SET”) to the left until the indicator
Yellow trimmer Blue trimmer turns ON.
(“HYS”) (“SET”)
Indicator
→ Set Blower (Drum) to OFF.Confirm that the sen-
sor indicator turns OFF.

Screwdrivers (cross-slot and small It will take a few seconds until the light turns OFF.
flatbladed types)
the removed covers.
Tie band
Nipper
15. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate sensor

(PH6)(2 plates wind,or float)(Ser.No.–0100)
The following sensitivity adjustment is required after the plate sensor is replaced.

the rear cover.
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 to initialize the

machine.

→ Select Adjust Displatement sensor and press OK.
4) After stop the drum rotate,two screw loose and adjust

Don’t loosen the sensor.
Sensor position is sound.
Point: The height is showed as two digits on the
operation panel. The appropriate value is
within the range D2 to DC. One pulse is 10
microns.
5) Press the “cancel” key.
6) Adjust the sensor offset

→ Select the plate type.
→ Input -9.99 on Displacement offset.
Adjust this way
(This is the mode to get the offset.)
Loosen this screw → Load a plate.
Adjust the offset if the thickness is different just
in case even though the same type of plate.

the removed covers.

Nipper
Ser.No.0101-
<Introduction>
For PT-R4000s with serial numbers 100 and earlier, the reference surface for detecting multiple
plate feeding (plate looseness) was on the surface of the recording drum. However, with this
setting, the offset value (Displacement offset) did not match the predetermined one (0.8 or less)
and, thus, adjustment of the sensor height and replacement of the sensor was required during
integral adjustment.
For PT-R4000s with serial numbers 101 and onward, a black delustering seal has been attached to
the drum and the reference surface for detecting multiple plate feeding (plate looseness) has been
specified as the surface of the seal to stabilize the offset value.
Therefore, perform the following adjustment procedure when there is any problem relating to
replacement of the multiple plate feeding sensor or the sensor itself.
Leading edge clamp 1) Preparation

(third clamp from
Turn ON the power to the PT-R4000, remove the
Black delustering the Home side)
seal rear cover, and enter the Service/Maintenance menu
screen.
→ Bring the leading edge clamps near the plate top
side detection sensor, as shown in the figure on
30mm 35mm
the left, and execute Servo ON.
2) Attaching a seal
Attach a black delustering seal to the surface of the
drum beneath the third leading edge clamp from the
Home side.
Plate top side detection Recording drum
sensor (PH29H)
• Choose the attachment position of the seal
carefully to prevent it from being covered by the
leading edge clamps.
• The surface of the recording drum must be
cleaned prior to attaching the black delustering
seal.
Reference)
Parts code: 100005768V00
Name: Black delustering seal (55 x 30 mm)

4100 3) Changing the parameter value
CLR
Mfg.no(high): 58180 Enter the Service/Maintenance menu screen.
7 8 9
Mfg.no(low): 9 → Enter the Input Parameter screen.
Mfg.year: 99 4 5 6 → Enter the Set misc. data screen.
Mfg.month: 9
Machine type 2: 8 1 2 3 → Enter “2” for “Machine type” and then press the
Machine type : 2
0 . - SAVE key.
ESC SAVE ENT
For the “Machine type” parameter, “2” is set as

the command to change the sensor detection ref-
erence to the seal, therefore, this parameter must
be set to “0” when the seal is not the reference
surface (i.e. it is on the drum surface as before).
4451
Front sensor offset
4) Adjusting the sensor height
Adjust the sensor height using the following com-
Centering test
mand.
Adjust displacement sensor Enter the Service/Maintenance menu screen.
NVRAM backup → Enter the Special action screen.
NVRAM restore → Adjust Displacement sensor
ESC OK NEXT Once the drum has stopped rotating, loosen the sen-
sor fixing screws (2 pcs.) and move the sensor up and
down until a buzzer sounds. Then, tighten the fixing
screws.
The buzzer sounds near the point at which the control
panel shows “A0”.
Don’t loosen
Finally, press “cancel” on the panel to complete.
Point: The height is showed as two digits on the
operation panel. The appropriate value is
within the range 9b to A5. One pulse is 10
microns.
Note that when “Adjust Displacement sensor” is

executed, the recording drum starts rotating to-
Loosen this screw ward the predetermined position.
Adjust this way

1101 5) Re-obtaining the offset value
CLR
Thickness 0.24 mm Set media type
7 8 9
→ Input -9.99 to Displacement offset and save it.
Front offset
4 5 6 (This brings you into the mode to obtain the offset
0.00
1 2 3 value.)
displacement offset
-9.99
0
→ Load a plate onto the drum.
•
→ Reenter the Set media type screen and then the
ESC OK ENT
Displacement offset screen to check that the off-
set value has been changed.
(The offset value should have been changed to 0.1
Inputting -9.99 here brings you into or lower.)
the mode to obtain the offset value.
• Adjust the offset value when you use plates of

the same size which have different thick-
nesses.
• To clean the seal, wipe it using alcohol. Do not
use thinner.

16. Balancer weight replacement procedure.
1) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300.

→ Enter the Recording head test screen.
→ Enter the RH positioning screen.
→ Input 200 mm and press OK.
(This facilitates observation of the balancer
movement.)
Calibration Sensor It is not necessary to do this procedure when re-

placing the balancer weights at Away side.

the front cover and the right side cover.
Then, remove the calibration sensor.
3) Remove the inside ring from the drum, which has the
embossment going to the drum side near the screw.
4) Remove the outside ring in combination with the in-

side ring removed.
Emboss
5) Replace the balancer weight.
6) Put back the rings. Press the balancer weights against

Inside Ring
the outer side of the guide groove.
Outside Ring
7) Put back the calibration sensor.
8) Turn on and initialize the machine.

And turn the drum by hand to confirm that the sensor
detects the sensor dog with the weight.
(The sensor lamp turns on when detecting.) If the
sensor does not seem to work correctly, the sensor
dog might be bent or its position is incorrrect, so ad-
just the dog.
Balancer Weight
9) Make sure that it works following procedure “3.
Auto balacner weight detecting sensor adjustment”.
10) Put back the covers.

Screwdriver (cross-slot type)
17. Balancer motor unit replacement procedure.
1) Make sure that the machine is turned off and remove

Balancer motor unit the right side cover.
when replacing the away side motor, remove the

front cover.
2) Remove the sensor unit first and then remove the bal-
ancer motor unit.
3) Install the new balancer motor unit.
Sensor Unit When installing the motor, it might be little hard

because the spring of the balancer unit pushes
out, but install it with pushing.
4) Put back the sensor unit.
6) Enter the service/maintenance mode.

→ Actuator test
→ Confirm that Lock pin and Balancer pin work.

18. Balancer sensor replacement procedure.
1) Make sure that the machine is turned off and remove

the right side cover.
Remove the front covert when replacing the

away side sensor.
2) Remove the sensor unit and replace the sensor.
<Required tools and jigs> 3) Put back the sensor unit.

→ Actuator test
→ Confirm that Lock pin and Balancer pin work.
19. Path driving motor replacement procedure.
1) Make sure the machine is turned off and remove the

left side, the back, the front the top covers.
To ensure safety, secure the transfer path with

Drive Motor Unit the fixing brackets before the operation.
2) Remove the drive motor unit.
The screws are under the motor unit.
3) Remove the gear from the old motor and install it on

the new motor.
4) Install the drive motor unit on the main unit.

→ Actuator test
Adjust the drive motor gear engage.
→ Confirm that the path unit goes up and down.
• If it is noisy during it going up and down, adjust

the drive motor gear engage.
• Do not touch the gears while the path is operat-
ing.
7) Put back the all covers.

20. Squeeze roller height adjustment

<Introduction>
One of the possible causes of plate looseness on the leading edge side is that the full length of the
squeeze roller may not contact the plate at the same time.
In this case, adjust the squeeze roller height according to the following procedure.
Fulcrum bracket (Home side) 1) Preparation

Squeeze sideplate (Home side) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove
the right cover and the rear cover.
2) Check that the distance between the squeeze

sideplate and the rectangular hole of the fulcrum
bracket, as shown in the figure on the left, is the same
on the Home and Away sides.
Measure the distance <Tolerance>

here. The distance on each side should be from 11
to 15 mm and the difference between the
Home side distance and the Away side dis-
Squeeze sideplate (Away side)
Fulcrum bracket (Away side)
tance must be less than 0.5 mm.
* The height from the recording drum to the
squeeze roller is checked and adjusted by ad-
justing the distance between the squeeze
sideplate and the rectangular hole of the ful-
crum bracket.
Measure the distance

here.
Put an M4 flat washer here.

3) Rotate the cleaning roller by hand to check whether it
rotates smoothly.
Next, remove the cleaning roller and rotate the
squeeze roller by hand to check that there is no prob-
lem in the bearings.
When the cleaning roller If you feel that the movement is abnormally heavy,
shaft is put under heavy
load. the bearings probably need to be changed.
Also ensure that the bearings are not detaching from
Cleaning roller
the respective squeeze sideplates.
<Reference>
Name: Ball bearings
Parts code: 70584384-00
4) If the actual difference between the Home side dis-
tance and the Away side distance is outside of the
range of tolerance mentioned in step 2), adjust the
position of each bearing engaged with the clamp arm
until the difference is within the tolerance.
The distance can be adjusted independently on the
Home and Away sides.
Clamp arm
Loosen these screws to change the bear-

ing position.
(Changing the bearing position alters the Bearing
position of the arm that is engaged with
the bearing and this affects the height of
the squeeze roller.)
Adjust in this direction (Home side)
Clamp arm
Loosen these screws to change the bear-

ing position.
(Changing the bearing position alters the
position of the arm that is engaged with
the bearing and this affects the height of
Bearing the squeeze roller.)
Adjust in this direction (Awayside) Point: When adjusting the squeeze roller height,
first shift the bearing so that the squeeze
roller moves away from the recording
drum. Then tighten the bearing fixing
screws firmly, and move the squeeze
sideplate by hand until the bearing
reaches the appropriate position.
Squeeze roller 5) Rotate the recording drum by hand, while viewing

the squeeze roller from the right side (encoder side)
of the machine, to check the following.
• The recording drum does not contact the leading
edge clamp.
• The distance between the leading edge clamp and
the squeeze roller is at least 5 mm.
When the distance between the squeeze roller

Leading edge clamp The distance
here must be 5 and the drum is narrower, you will hear some air-
mm or more. flow noise during high-speed rotation of the re-
cording drum.
→ Execute initialization of the PT-R4300.

each cover and the cleaning roller.
<Other>
There is another possible cause of plate looseness in addition to that relating to the height of the
squeeze roller. This occurs if you have used the PT-R4300 for a long time.
Aluminum particles from the plate and also tape adhesive on the plate edge may have adhered to
the squeeze roller, cleaning roller, and surface of the recording drum.
Therefore, ensure that the following items are cleaned at the same time as you adjust the height of
the squeeze roller.
• Cleaning roller
• Squeeze roller
• Recording drum

21. Loading Guide (1) Replacement and Adjustment

<Introduction>
Replace and adjust the loading guide (1) following the below step as the guide must be
replaced once a year or every 20,000 plates.
This guide is not installed in the PT-R4300.
Part Code: U1250064-00

Name: Loading Guide (1) A/S
3204
1) Confirm that the machine is OFF, and remove the top
M52:Niproller Up Down
cover and the rear cover.
SL53:Shutter Close Open
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and execute the

M55:Path Up Down
Actuator test command to lower the transfer path.
On
SL58:Door open Off
ESC OK → Lower the transfer path. (Press the Down key
once.)
Loading Guide (1)
Conveyor Path Unit When the transfer path reaches slightly above the
middle position, turn OFF the power supply.
Upper
position (Alternatively, remove the interlock release jig to
stop the movement of the transfer path.)
dle
Mid ion
pos
it This is the place where the conveyor path is
er
w n
stopped to replace the loading guide (1). This
Lo sitio
Side Alignment
po place is to do this work easily where the path unit
Unit
is just above the side alignment unit.
Sensor PH50 Loading Guide (1) 3) Score a line on the bracket for the sensor PH50 below
the loading guide (1) and remove the sensor.
Screws for Loading Guide (1) Marking 4) Open the shutter by hand and make score a line be-
fore removing the guide. (Score a line along the place
where the guide is fixed.)
There are four screws for this guide.

5) Loosen the top screws for the guide and remove the
guide.
• It is good enough to loose the screws because

the top portion of the guide has cutout.
• The Discharge Guide has holes at its both ends
so that your tool can access the screws for the
Loading Guide (1) through these holes.
Top Screws
6) Replace to a new guide.
Shutter Diacharge guide Fix Screws
Set the new guide under the head of screws that

were loosened at the above step 5).
7) Fix the guide.

Conveyor Path
Loading Guide (1) Unit
When fixing, you must set the guide at the place

where you scored the line at the step 4).
Top Cutout portion
8) Turn on the machine and initialize it, and then have
the path unit go down to the middle position and con-
firm the height of the guide at the middle position.
The appropriate height at the middle position is

as high as the plate guide in the punch unit or a
little higher than the plate guide. But if it is too
high, a plate would snag at the punch unit when
Loading Guide (1)
the plate is side aligned. You should confirm it
with the user’s plate.
9) Put back the covers that were removed in the step 1).

Screwdrivers (cross-slot type)
Hexagonal wrench (for M3 and M4 screws)
22. PT-R4300 Ball screw for Sub-scanning Replacement Procedure

Please read and understand the following procedure before starting. This work is for only when
you have to replace the ball screw on the PT-R4300 in the field. Basically the jig is necessary to
set the screw, but this procedure describes how to set it without the jig. Please be careful not to get
any damage to the screw while you work.
[Necessary tools]
T bar Allen key for M4 , a set of Allen keys (long type), a pipe for Allen keys, LD short
connector, Head handle, Dial gauge (2 microns) with Magnet stand, Tie wrap (small)
[Screw to be replaced]
U1254043-00 Sub-scanning ball screw unit
<Removal Procedure>
1. Move the recording head to 350mm from the origin point by
RH positioning command, and turn off the machine.
2. Remove the left and the right side cover and the front cover.
3. Remove the air hose guide and disconnect the hose.
4. Attach the LD short connector onto the relay board.
5. Disconnect the cables to the LD driver box. At this time, re-
move the each cable bracket fixed to the base (see the arrow.)
And the following procedure would be easier if you keep the
Peltier driver ( for cooling LD) power cable at the Peltier unit
side after removing the fan cover of the driver box.
6. Remove the stay bracket from the base, too.
Stay bracket
7. After removing the head cover, fix the relay board at the head base to protect the flexible
cable.

8. Loosen the 5 bolts fixing the head base by a long
Allen key with the pipe for Allen key and attach
the Head handles before removing the head.
The length of the only one screw at Zoom side is

different from the others.
9. Remove the positioning pins and remove the

B
head completely.
10.Remove the back cover (see the arrow). At this
time, loosen the screws at the drum side by T bar
Allen key.
11.Remove the blind cover on the die cast base.
12.Disconnect the connection with the LM guide
(see A and B in right figure.)
Do not loosen the screw C. One of the connec- A
A D C
tions with the LM guide, which is the drum side,
is fixed with disc springs. Regarding the connec-
tion with the ball screw, remove the screws (M6
X 2) at the vertical side of the universal joint seen
from the window of the die cast base (see D in
the right figure.)
13.The die cast base is disconnected from the ball screw and the LM guide, and remove the die
cast base slowly.
14.Remove the coupling (screw side) for the sub-scan motor (M3 set screw, see Figure E) and
remove the sub-scan motor from the screw. Remove it horizontally not to get any damage to
the coupling.
Do not remove the mount for the angular bearing (See the below figure, Fix screw G).
This mount is the criterion. Do not remove the bearing bracket at the driven side, either.
For machines with serial numbers 0021 and onward, double M3 hollow set screws are used.
15.Remove the screws for the angular fixing ring (See the below figure F, M4 x 3), and remove
the whole screw (including the bearing) from the mount.
G E

Angular fixing ring Screw to be replaced (Shipped such as this)
<Installation of Screw and Adjustment Procedure>

(For height adjustment)
1. Insert the screw until the bear-

ing stops at the mount by the
opposite procedure which you
removed the screw replaced.
At the driven side, put the
bearing onto bearing bracket. Direction where the base is pushed
Fix the fixing ring onto the Inside of the LM guide is the criterion
mount by even pressure. And then the parallel between the screw and the LM guide is
reproduced.
2. The screw holes of the LM guide nuts and the holes of the
die cast base should match. Please be careful of the univer-
sal joint position. The distance between the RH base and the
angular bearing is approximately 100mm.
As the inside of the LM guide is the criterion, insert screws
into the base and fix the base pulling the base to the front.
(See A (8 screws) and B(2 screws) in the former figure.) 100
mm
Before installing the RH base, check for any foreign material or burrs on the nut surface
on the LM guide and the contact surface of the RH base.
The nut at the drum side is fixed such as the figure.

Prepare the one set disc springs face to face and 3 sets total, and insert
the spacers and two washers are set at the both ends and insert a screw CAP screw
2 – M5 x 20
into this set.
For the PT-R4000II and later machines, the lower side washer is not
included.

3. This is the height adjustment between the screw and the
LM guide.
The height of the screw at the mount as the criterion and
the one at the universal joint portion must be matched.
Set a dial gauge with magnetic stand on the polished sur-
face of the die case base and look for the highest position
of the screw at the mount side such as the figure, and set it
as zero position of the dial gauge.
4. Keep the dial gauge position and move it to another pol-
ished surface of the die cast base so that you can measure
the height of the screw at the universal joint from the die
cast base window. At this time, the height difference be-
tween the mount side and the joint side must be within 10
microns. For the height adjustment, fix the screws at the
joint side temporarily (see the arrows) and set the screw higher than the mount side and then
get the appropriate height by hitting the screw lightly by a shock less hummer or something.
5. When you get the appropriate height, fix the screw completely.
Rotate the screw from end to end to confirm there is no snag.
6. Set the blind cover on the die case base and set the thick
washers between the die case base and the RH base, and set
the back cover.
At this time, do not fix the screws for the back cover, it
means they should be loose. ( After set the recording head
and fix its position by the positioning pins, then the back
cover should be fixed.)
7. Put the recording head onto the RH base.
Insert the positioning pins and decide the head position and fix it.
8. Fix the back cover.

9. Connect the cables in the head following the diagram at-
tached on the head cover. At this time, be careful not to
interfere the light axis by the cables.

10.Remove the head handles and close the head
cover.
The head side covers must be fixed by using M3 x
5 cap screw with spring washer and flat washer
(see the arrow.)
11.Connect the motor. The criteria are the positioning 1

pins. ( The motor bracket is against the face of the
mount bearing.) 2
Insert the coupling onto the axis and decide the
position.
Do not force to the coupling.
Pin
Put back the recording head harness and remove the LD short connector. Turn on the
machine and see the full stroke by RH positioning function under the actuator view to
check if the sub-scan motor works correctly.
And execute laser calibration for all channels at 2400 and 2000 dpi. If it is completed, it
is good.
If not, the head may be not against the positioning pin(s) when removing and putting
back the head.
And check the focus and the zoom. If they are not bad, output a tint 50% and check its
unevenness level.

23. Countermeasure against registration deviation in PT-R4XXX

The procedure described in this document is for when a user makes a complaint about insufficient
registration accuracy in the PT-R4300 (i.e., a plate is misaligned in the Y direction), and, as a
further condition, the problem occurs at a frequency of about one plate per day.
If the problem does not occur frequently (e.g., one plate per week), it may be caused by careless
operation by the user when he/she handles the plate, and it may be eliminated by cleaning the
guide plate, rollers, etc.
The last page of this document describes the method for finding out whether the cause of this
problem exists in the PT-R4300 or in the printing machine.
[Required jigs and tools]

Phillips, Allen key set, spanner wrench set, 300 mm and 150 mm scales, PC (including com-
munication software; Hyperterminal for Windows)
[Operation]
Perform the following operations to check for registration deviation of the plate (i.e., the plate
does not stably fit with the Home-side registration pin).
1) Check the height of the transport unit and adjust it if necessary (using the user's maximum
sized plate).
During the overall adjustment at the factory, the height of transport unit was adjusted using
a “830 x 645 -0.3” plate. Using the user’s maximum sized plate, adjust the height of the
transport unit to the correct height for inserting the plate.
Open the right side cover.

Manually open the leading edge clamps and then lower the transport unit to its lower limit.
Set a plate and lower the nip roller in order to sandwich the plate between the rollers just like
when the plate is actually inserted. Open the shutter and push the plate's trailing edge by
hand until it reaches the proximity of the leading edge clamps, which were opened in ad-
vance. Adjust the height of the adjustment bolts so that the plate leading edge is flush with
the drum (the plate comes in contact with the drum) at the gripper section of the leading edge
clamps.
Do not forget the original height position. It is not necessary to move the lower limit position
sensor located on the transport unit.
Operation:
• From drum positioning to the opening of leading edge clamps
Service/Maintenance Menu screen → Drum Test → Leading Clamp → Actuator Test
→ Lock Pin (Home) IN → Lock Pin (Away) IN → Drum Test → Servo Off → Actua-
tor Test → Leading Clamp Down
• Movement of the transport unit (after a plate has been set)
Service/Maintenance Menu screen → Actuator Test → Nip Roller Down → Pass
Down (two times) → Shutter Open
To restore to the original state, select “Special Action” in the Service/Maintenance Menu
screen and then select “Initialize”.

2) Check the registration accuracy in the actual load sequence operation. Once a plate loading
is started, the transport unit lowers, the leading edge clamps open, and then the nip roller for
the plate transfer is released when the plate has been fed to a point approximately 3 mm from
the registration pins. (This point is, when you observe the area around the leading edge
clamps, the spot where the fed plate makes a brief stop. As a guide to further identify the 3
mm point, find the position where the unnotched plate edge nearly aligns with the pin edge.)
Make sure that the nipped plate is released at this point. It will be easier to check the releas-
ing position of the nip roller if you remove the punch debris guide.
When the plate is misaligned:
Correct the misalignment using the parameter for correcting the plate feed amount. This is
the fourth parameter from the top of “Input Parameter - Set Correction Data” in the Service/
Maintenance Menu screen. Reducing the numerical value moves the plate away from the
registration pins.
3740
CLR
R 0.000 [%]
R 0.000 [mm] 7 8 9
R 0.00 [mm]
4 5 6
R 0.00 [mm]
1 2 3
0.00 [µ]
+
0.00 [mm] 0 .
ESC OK ENT
Note that the plate feed amount may change when the transport unit height is changed.
3) Measure the physical relationship between the engine base and the frame. (For measurement
points, refer to the attached diagram. Up to 420.)
• In the PT-R4000II (serial number 421 and onward), the engine base has been appro-
priately tilted with respect to the frame in the punch unit section, therefore, adjustment
of their physical relationship is not required.
• When checking positions, be sure that the optical head is located at its origin.
• Forcibly tilt the engine base so that the plate touches the Home side pin first. In other
words, shift the Home side of the engine base toward the front side. Accurately measure at
the left and right measurement points, which are symmetrically positioned relative to the
center point, the distance between the machined surface of the engine base (inside the
cover of the clamp drive section) and the outer surface of the frame. (Use a scale for the
measurement.)
We will send a diagram regarding the measurement points. When the engine base and the
frame are positioned in parallel, the standard distance is 162 mm.
From the standard configuration stated above, move the Home side of the engine base
toward the front side so that difference between the location of the Home side and the
Away side is approximately 1 to 1.5 mm. Currently, as a factory setting, the Home side has
been set to 163 mm and the Away side has been set to 162 mm. To shift the Home side, grip
a black-plated hexagonal bar stay at the clamp drive section and turn the entire engine
base. (This operation requires quite a lot of muscle.)
The operations described above have established the relationship of the transport unit and
the drum heights and also have positioned the plate in the Y direction. Consequently, plate
adjustment in the X direction should be carried out.
4) Plate positioning check in X direction

From the Home side, remove the second leading edge clamp so that the Home side registra-
tion pin can be checked individually, which will make it easier to check how much the plate
has shifted.
Remark: The leading edge clamp is easily removed when drum’s servo motor is
ON, after the drum has been rotated to the position where the leading
edge clamps are located above the leading edge detection sensor stay.
Be careful not to apply any unnecessary force to the stay. The screws for
the clamp are quite tight, as they were secured using medium strength
lock-paint. Be sure to apply the lock-paint when you re-secure the screws.
You will find springs inside the leading edge clamp. Be sure, when the
clamp is attached, that the clamp’s protrusions enter into these springs.
In order to input commands from the terminal, turn ON DIP switch 1 of the RCP board.
Set the plate for checking the registration accuracy and, from the actuator test screen, lower
the transport unit to the punch position.
Execute the terminal software from the personal computer.
Precautions for execution of Hyperterminal

Enter any file name in the connection setting dialog and press OK. (A file name is
determined.)
→ For the connection method, select the COM port to which the communication
cable is connected (normally COM1).
→ In the port setting dialog, make the following settings:
Bit/sec. 9600
Data bit 8
Parity None
Stop bit 1
Flow control Hardware

Once these settings have been completed, press OK and start up the Hyperterminal.
Execute the side alignment terminal command. Subsequently, the shutter opens, a plate is
fed, side alignment is carried out, punch holes are made (if necessary), the plate is pulled
back while it is being nipped, and then the operation stops after the shutter is closed.
*1 Execute this command after the transport unit has been lowered to the punch position.

(When the side alignment is carried out after making punch holes)
• PNC 4 Width Length The hexadecimal digit particular to the punch set up (see *2 below)
Thickness
(Make a space between parameters.)
*2 When making only the positioning punches → C
When making the positioning punches + No. 2 + No. 5 → 1E
When making the positioning punches + No. 1 + No. 6 → 1D
When making the positioning punches + No. 1 + No. 2 + No. 5 + No. 6 → 3F
(When no punch hole is made)

• PNC 5 Width Length Thickness
With the PT-R4000 Ver. 3.04 or later, the Service/Maintenance Menu screen includes a
screen that allows the performance of the same operation from the computer. (Special action
→ Register test)
Place the plate to check the registration status on the insertion table and then close the door.
Select Register test and press OK, and the plate selection screen is displayed. Specify the
type of plate that is placed on the table in this screen. Perform centering and punching of the
plate. The processing is complete when the plate is restored to the insertion table. The regis-
tration status of the plate can be adjusted in this menu screen.
4452
Register test
ESC OK NEXT
Operation after punching

Lower the transport unit to the drum position (from the actuator screen operation).
Rotate the drum until it reaches the Leading Clamp position, insert the securing pins and
open the leading edge clamps.
Open the shutter, turn OFF the Load Clutch in order to facilitate manual roller rotation and
then slowly lower the plate to the pin position for checking misalignment. At the same time,
check that the plate first touches the Home-side registration pin.
Remark: If any error occurs because the plate size was incorrectly entered, the
transport unit returns to the origin point.No buzzer will sound.

Operation:
Transport unit
Service/Maintenance Menu screen → Actuator Test → Pass Down → Terminal com-
mand
Drum
Service/Maintenance Menu screen → Drum Test → Leading Clamp → Actuator Test
→ Lock Pin (Home) IN → Lock Pin (Away) IN → Drum Test → Servo Off → Actua-
tor Test → Leading Clamp Down → Shutter Open → Load Clutch OFF
Restart operation
Special Action → Initialize
According to the amount of shift in the X direction, laterally shift the punch unit (by moving
the positioning reference plate on the Home side) or push or pull the engine base at the Home
side, in order to align the punch positions of the pin and plate (their centers must be aligned).
Be sure, at this moment, to record the amount of tilt of the punch in the Y direction so that
you can replicate this tilt.
5) Other checks
• Check whether or not the amount of tilt of the optional punch is too large.
Re-adjust using a tilt pin.
• Check whether or not the plate is pressed too hard or the distance between the plate and
positioning pins is too wide during side alignment.
Re-adjust following the procedure sheet.
[Summary]
In order to stabilize the registration accuracy:
The plate must touch the Home-side positioning pin first.
The plate must align with the registration pins in the X direction.
The plate must be released at the appropriate position (not too far or too close).
To optimize the resistance when a plate (at the size that the user mainly uses) comes in
contact with the drum surface, the transport unit height for the plate loading to the drum
must be properly adjusted.

[How to identify whether the PT-R4300 or the printing machine is the cause of the registration deviation]
This section explains how to determine whether or not the registration deviation has occurred
in the PT-R4300.
Since the PT-R4300 uses only plates, it is not possible to measure it on the light table using a
graduated microscope, which is the method used for the film setter. As the PT-R unit uses
registration punch holes as a reference for checking registration deviation, observe the grid
lines of overlaid plates on the Home-side and Away-side using a low power loupe (5x to 10x).
Required items:
6.35 dia. register pin x 2 pcs., loupe (5x to 10x)
Sample exposure:
Expose (local exposure at 2400 dpi) the grid pattern over the full surface of a plate of
the size used by the user. At least four plates are required per job. (Add more plates if
necessary.)
Align the plate with the registration pins as described below.
Secure the register pins and secure the output plate that will be used as a reference. For the
second plate and thereafter, cut out the leading edge corners on the Home and Away sides and
overlay the plates on the reference plate. Then, using the loupe, measure the difference be-
tween the grid lines in the Y direction on the plate and the grid lines on the reference plate.
When the grid pattern has been exposed at 2400 dpi, the width of each line is approximately
30 micron.
Criterion for judgment: As plates are positioned in reference to the Home-side pin, if a plate
is misaligned in the Y direction, it is also consequently misaligned in
the X direction Therefore, you only need to check the alignment in
the Y direction.
Since the line width is approximately 30 micron., you can consider the registration in the
PTR4000 to be accurate when the corresponding grid lines are aligned within one grid line
width. If the above criterion is not satisfied, perform the corrective procedure for the registra-
tion deviation. Itmay be difficult to identify the registration deviation depending on the num-
ber of plates to be checked. Therefore, registration deviation may be discovered at the user’s
site even though it did not occur during local exposure. In this case, check the sample of the
registration deviation from the user and ask about the frequency of the problem in order to
determine whether or not to conduct a corrective procedure.
X direction
AWAY HOME
Approximately
30mm
Tilt Y direction Tilt Y direction
Cut along the line from

the second plate.

How to check the release position of the nip roller statically (befor Ver3.03)
1. Set a plate on the conveyor unit.

2. Actuator Test → Path Down
3. From PC
PNC 4 Width Length C ← Execute the side alignment, the reference punch and the nipping
e.g.) PNC 4 830 645 C
4. Actuator Test → Path Down (The lowest place)
Drum Test → Leading Clamp
Actuator Test → Lock Pin (Home/Away) IN
Drum Test → Servo OFF
Actuator Test → Leading Edge Clamp Down → Shutter Open
Motor Test → M50: Transport Roller (IN)
Set the feed amount (standard distance 130mm) by changing “pulse” to “mm”.
Set 50 at Speed mm/sec and execute it.
Measure the distance between the reference pin (Home side) and the plate, and get the com-
pensation.
This + or – value is the compensation for the feed amount 130mm.

This is the ideal that a plate reaches the drum 3mm before the reference pin when the plate feed
amount is set 130mm.
For example, if the feed amount is 130mm and the plate reaches the drum 3mm before the refer-
ence pin, the compensation value is –3mm.
However this procedure is just like a rule of thumb. Therefore, you should check by eye and
adjust it by loading a plate actually.

How to check the release position of the nip roller statically (Ver. 3.04 and Ver. 4. 00
onward)
1. Set a plate on the conveyor unit.
2. Actuator Test → Path Down
3. Special Action → Register Test (Centering, punching, and nip operation are executed.)
4. Actuator Test → Path Down (The lowest place)
Drum Test → Leading Clamp
Actuator Test → Lock Pin (Home/Away) IN
Drum Test → Servo OFF
Actuator Test → Leading Edge Clamp Down → Shutter Open
Motor Test → M50: Transport Roller (IN)
Set the feed amount (standard distance 130 mm) by changing “pulse” to “mm”.
Set 50 at Speed mm/sec and execute it.
Measure the distance between the reference pin (Home side) and the plate, and get the com-
pensation.
This + or – value is the compensation for the feed amount 130 mm.
This is the ideal that a plate reaches the drum 3 mm before the reference pin when the plate feed
amount is set 130 mm.
For example, if the feed amount is 130 mm and the plate reaches the drum 3 mm before the
reference pin, the compensation value is –3 mm.
However this procedure is just like a rule of thumb. Therefore, you should check by eye and
adjust it by loading a plate actually.

Outer Surface of the frame
Engine base measurement point (Home side)
“A” must be 1 to 1.5mm longer than “B”
Engine base measurement point (Away side)
Scale
Scale
Outer Surface of the frame
The physical relationship above is for the machines with serial numbers up to 420.

24. Countermeasures for Registration Deviation on PT-R4000 (addi-

tional information)
Revision of the twist of the conveyor unit

Normally the Home side and the Away side of the conveyor path are parallel.
If either of the two sides does not hit the hexagonal bolt on the engine base or a plate being loaded
on the conveyor path is skewed more than 1 mm against the drum, the conveyor path must be
adjusted to be the same height.
(Hexagonal Bolt)
(The height of the left portion and the
right portion of the guide before the
punch are different.)
To see the difference between the right and the left at the punch unit or the drum, you should put
a plate on the conveyor path and lower the nip roller. At this time, the plate does not have any
curl.
The revised portion should be the conveyor drive unit at the Home side basically.
(Revised portion: Conveyor

Drive Unit at Home side)

Confirmation of adjustment amount
Scale
Fulcrum Pin
1. Measure the distance between the this side of the frame and the pin of the conveyor drive
unit.
2. After adjusting, confirm if the target amount changed.
If you want to decline the Home side, shorten the distance.
(If the distance is longer, the Home side is higher.)
Adjustment (Revision)
Be sure that the conveyor path is at the origin point (the highest position) when adjusting.
1) If the amount to be adjusted is less than 2mm, adjust the nut portion of the ball screw.
1. Loosen the hexagonal nut and the hollow set (set screw).
2. Loosen the adjusting bolt for the nut plate, rotate it along the semicircular oblong.
3. Tighten the adjusting bolt for the nut plate and then tighten the hollow set and the hexago-
nal nut.
Adjusting bolt for the nut plate
The nut part of the ball screw
The hollow set and the hexago-

nal nut.
Criterion for Adjustment (Ldeal designed value)

The nut of the ball screw can rotate a maximum of ± 44 degrees. The height of the transfer
path can be moved vertically by approximately ± 0.6 mm at the nut position, approximately ±
1.6 mm at the punch position, and approximately ± 1.9 mm at the drum position.
But in reality, it might be a little different because each machine has different spring reaction,
gap or something.

2) If the amount to be adjusted is more than 2mm or it has already been adjusted at 1).
1. Remove the four screws.
2. Grab the ball screw portion and pull it to the arrow side to release the bevel gear engage-
ment.
3. Rotate the ball screw and change the engagement, and then push the ball screw to engage
the gear.
4. Fix the screws.
Screws
Screws
(Engagement
portion)
Pull and release the bevel
gear engagement
Criterion of Adjustment: (Ldeal designed value)

The one tooth shift of the bevel gear makes the height of the conveyor path change approxi-
mately 1mm at the punch unit and approximately 1.3mm at the drum up or down.
But in reality, it might be a little different because each machine has different spring reaction,
gap or something.
When either 1) or 2) is adjusted, the sensor (PH57) to detect the middle position of the
conveyor path and the sensor (PH55) to detect the lower position of the conveyor path
may be adjusted.

25. Procedure for replacing the PT-R4XXX transfer path spring
Rear section stay Weld nut
Arm side
Transfer drive spring
Tension bolt
Compression spring
Tension plate
<Transfer drive section> Transfer drive stay
1. Set the transfer path at its highest position and secure it with the transfer path fixing brackets
(transport fixing brackets).
2. Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and pull the fulcrum pin on the arm side of the transfer
path until one side of the spring is freed. Be careful during this process not to drop the
bearing and the washer.
(In some cases, a thrust washer may be used in the E-ring section.)
Fulcrum pin E-ring Washer Bearing Fulcrum pin
3. Remove the rear cover of the machine to bring the rear side of the transfer drive stay into
view.
4. Peel off the tape to remove the roll pin of the weld nut.
Tape
Home side Away side

5. Loosen the nut and two cap bolts to remove the weld nut.
6. Remove the rear section stay that secures the transfer drive stay.
7. Pull out the tension bolt, tension plate, compression spring, and spring from inside the trans-
fer drive stay.
Weld nut
Nut
Rear section stay
Nut Hooked part

Roll pin
8. Replace the damaged (old) spring with a new one. Make sure to orient the new spring cor-
rectly (the hooked parts should be at the bottom).
The size of the opening of the hooked parts varies. Attach the hooked part with a wider
opening to the tension plate.
Wider opening
9. Hook the other side of the compression spring on a piece of thin cord (e.g., vinyl).
Cord Compression spring
10. Set the compression spring and the tension plate section into the transfer drive stay.
11. Attach the rear section stay. In this step, pull the cords that were attached to the tension bolt
and the compression spring through their respective holes in the rear section stay.
12. Slide the weld nut onto the tension bolt temporarily. (This is to prevent the tension bolt from
dropping.)
13. Slide the arm-side fulcrum pin through the spring and then secure it together with the bearing
and the washer.
Ensure that the fulcrum pin is set in the loop of the compression spring.
14. Screw the weld nut onto the tension bolt until the thread portion of the bolt that is coming
through the nut is the same length as the nut. Then, draw a cord through the oblong hole in
the weld nut.
15. Secure the weld nut with the cap bolt and then secure the end of the thread portion of the
tension bolt with the nut.
Be sure to align the face of the nut and the end of the thread portion.
16. Pull out the cord that is secured to the compression spring to create a loop on one side of the
compression spring, and then insert the roll pin into it.
This inserted roll pin goes into the oblong hole of the stopper.
17. Cut the cord and affix a piece of tape over the roll pin to prevent it from falling off.
18. Finally, remove the transfer path fixing brackets.
<Precautions>
1. When pulling or inserting a fulcrum pin, it may be hooked by the burr of the E-ring
groove. In this case, lightly tap only the fulcrum pin to move it through.
2. Remove the fulcrum pin from inside to facilitate attachment of the E-ring and
washer.
3. When the Away-side rear section stay is removed, the transfer drive stay lowers a
few mm due to its own weight.
Therefore, remove the rear section stay while supporting the transfer drive stay.
4. The replacement procedure is the same on the Home and Away sides, however, do
not perform the procedure simultaneously on both sides. Be sure to replace each
spring individually.
The design of the transfer drive spring has been improved from the machine with serial
number 516. Order the spring using the new parts code when you replace it.
New parts code: 70516755-01 (tension spring <balance>)

26. Procedure for replacing the LD block
1) Prepare the jig and the wristband shown on the left

before replacing the LD block.
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and initialize it.
3520 3) Select “Recording unit test → RH positioning” in the

CLR
Service/Maintenance Menu screen and move the re-
7 8 9
250.00 mm
cording head approximately 250 mm toward the
4 5 6 Away side.
1 2 3
0 .
ESC START ENT

the covers to initiate the procedure.
If the following steps in the procedure are per-

formed with the power ON, you will be in danger
of loosing your eyesight. Be sure to turn OFF the
power before starting the replacement proce-
dure.
5) Connect the jumper connector to the relay board of

the recording head.
With this connector, all LD pins are at the same

electrical potential. If the cables are removed
without connecting this connector, the LDs may
be damaged by static electricity.
6) Remove the air pressure hose guide that is on the re-

cording head.

7) Remove the two screws from the lower section of the
relay board and open the relay board outward.
8) Remove the upper cover of the recording head. This

cover has been secured with seven screws.
• Front: 4 screws
• Top right: 2 screws
• Top left: 1 screw
Top left Top right
9) Pull the upper cover toward you and remove it.
When the upper cover is removed.
10) Attach a jig for replacement to the LD block that

needs to be replaced. Then, replace the LD block us-
ing the hexagonal wrench provided with the jig.
Be sure to use the hexagonal wrench that is pro-

vided with the jig for replacement when you re-
move the LD block. If a normal hexagonal wrench
is used, the screw thread of the jig for LD block
replacement may be damaged.

11) Attach the jig for replacement to a new LD block and
mount it on the LD base.
Before attaching the new LD block, make sure no

dust or dirt is adhered to the contact surface. If
any dust or dirt remains adhered to the surface,
the optical axis may be deviated and thus appro-
priate laser power cannot be obtained or the
value of current may become excessively high.
12) Remove the short-circuit sheet that has been attached

to the new LD block.
13) Clean the following lenses of the recording head, as

dust adheres to them easily.
• Stereographic projection lens
• No. 1 Lens
• Reflective mirror
• Zoom lens collar
Stereographic
projection lens
No. 1 Lens Use a mixed solution of alcohol and ether at a
Reflective mirror
ratio of 1:1 for cleaning. As the lens surfaces to
Zoom lens collar
be cleaned are wide, use lens cleaning paper,
not cotton swabs.
14) Reattach the upper cover of the recording head and

the air pressure hose guides to their original positions
and then remove the jumper connector (LD short
connector jig) that was connected to the relay board.
If you fail to remove the LD short connector jig,

the LD or the relay board may be damaged.
15) Reattach all covers and initialize the PT-R4300.

Then, check the operations and the exposure perfor-
mance.
• The Iopd value for the new LD is entered.
• The ON time (laser lighting time) of the replaced
LD is cleared.
• All the LD channels are calibrated.
If a mode is set that uses half of the channels, 32 ch

exposure cannot be performed.

27. Procedure for replacing and adjusting the power supply

After replacing the DC power supplies, be sure to adjust the output voltages as follows.
Power supply name Set voltage Measurement point

U1 (5V/100W) 5.00V ± 0.01V Between pins 1 and 2 of the X100 power supply con-
nector for the RB31 board
U2 (15V/75W) 15.00V ± 0.10V Between pins 1 and 4 of the XU22 connector for U2
U3 (-15V/75W) -15.00V ± 0.10V Between pins 1 and 4 of the XU32 connector for U3
U4 (24V/300W) 24.30V ± 0.10V Power supply terminal for U4
U5 (24V/150W): For PT-R4000/4000II
24.00V ± 0.01V Between TP8 and TP3 on the CON-PTR4 board
U5 (24V/300W): PT-R4300
24.00V ± 0.01V Between TP8 and TP3 on the CON-PTR4 board
U6 (-5V/300W) -5.3V ± 0.05V Power supply terminal for U6
U7 (24V/100W) 24.00V ± 0.10V Between TP6 and TP3 on the CON-PTR4 board
The PT-R4300 does not contain this power supply.
U9 (24V/30W) 24.00V ± 0.10V Between TP6 and TP3 on the CON-PTR4 board
Neither the PT-R4000 nor the PT-R4000II contains this power supply.
For the PT-R4300, the U7 (24V/100W) has been removed and the power supply capac-
ity for the U5 (24V/150W) has been increased to 300W.
In addition, the U9 (24V/30W) has been added for use with the interlock circuit.
28. Procedure for replacing and adjusting the pulse motor driver
Set the DIP switches as follows after replacing the pulse motor drivers
PMD50 DSW1-1: SL-ON

DSW1-2: F/R-ON
DSW1-3: EX1-OFF
DSW1-4: EX2-OFF
DSW1-5: EX3-OFF
PMD61 DSW1-1: SL-ON

DSW1-2: F/R-ON
DSW1-3: EX1-ON
DSW1-4: EX2-OFF
DSW1-5: EX3-OFF
PMD2 DSW1-1: SL-OFF

DSW1-2: F/R-OFF
DSW1-3: Unchangeable ON
DSW1-4: Unchangeable OFF
DSW1-5: Unchangeable OFF
PSW1 (S.SEL1)-9
PSW2 (S.SEL2)-9

Adjustment procedure for PMD61
The electric current used for PMD61 exceeded the specification in order to allow use of the
common driver for all units. This has been changed so that PMD61 now uses an appropriate
electric current. When you replace PMD61, adjust it in accordance with the procedure below.
Note that this adjustment has already been completed for machines with serial numbers 425 and
onward before shipment.
This adjustment has also been completed for the PT-R4300. The power supply capacity has also
been increased for this model.
PMD61
PMD61 PHASE CURRENT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

1. Turn off the main power.
2. Cancel the “Auto current down function”:
Turn off the SL of DSW1 in the PMD61.
3. Preparation for checking the Voltage of “Vref”:
Connect the voltmeter with check pins to measure the voltage between IS and 0V.
4. Turn off the interlock switch then turn on the main power.
(Because it is necessary to turn on the 5V power for logic first.)
5. Turn on the inter lock switch then turn on the DC24V.
6. Setting the current of the motor :
Adjust the IS voltage to 0.8V(=Motor current value: 1.3A).
Refer to Fig.2.
Target division of “VR-1”; from -3 to -4
* Attention : During this adjustment, motor should be stopped and don’t apply the pulse
voltage.
While adjusting the current, make sure to stop the motor and to not apply a pulse volt-
age. Otherwise, the driver will be damaged.
7. Turn off the main power, and turn on the SL switch.

29. Procedure for replacing the AC servo driver (E1A)

Perform the parameter setting and necessary adjustments as follows after replacing the AC servo
driver.
1. Parameter setting for the driver

Turn ON the power to the machine and enter the service maintenance mode without
performing initialization.
Access the [Input parameter] screen. → Access the [Drum parameter] screen. →
Execute [Initialize].
Turning OFF the power to the machine during the parameter setting may dam-
age the driver, so do not turn OFF the power during the [Initialize] operation.
Since some parameters become active after the machine power is restored,
always turn OFF the power to the machine and turn it ON again after the
parameter setting is finished.
2. Speed command offset adjustment

Turn ON the power to the machine and enter the service maintenance mode without
performing initialization.
Access the [Input parameter] screen. → Access the [Drum parameter] screen. → Ex-
ecute [Adjust Offset].
3. Gain adjustment for the PIO board (SVC circuit)

Access the service maintenance mode. → Access the [Drum test] screen. → Execute
[Zero return].
Access the [Input parameter] screen. → Access the [Drum parameter] screen. → Ex-
ecute [Adjust Gain].
Adjust the “VR1” trimmer resistor on the PIO-PTR4 board (PIO-PTR4 (2) ) until the
buzzer sounds.
Press [Cancel] on the screen to complete the operation.

30. Procedure for replacing and setting the inverter (U8) for the suc-
tion blower
Perform the following setting after replacing the inverter for the suction blower.
Make sure to complete the setting described below.
1. Turn OFF the power to the machine and disconnect the “XBU1” connector in the blower
unit.
2. Turn ON the power to the machine and change the “C13” parameter.
“00”: a contact (normal open) [NO]
↓
“00”: a contact (normal close) [NC]
3. Turn OFF the power to the machine and re-connect the “XBU1” connector.
4. Turn ON the power to the machine and change the “A01” (Frequency destination setting)
parameter.
“01” → “00”
5. Change the “A04” (Maximum frequency setting) parameter.
“50”Hz → “60”Hz
6. Change the “A03” (Base frequency setting) parameter.

“50”Hz → “60”Hz
7. Change the “B12” (Level of electronic thermal setting) parameter.
“2.60” 2.6A → “3.10” 3.1A
8. Change the “B21” (Selection of overload restriction operation mode) parameter.
“01” : “ON” during acceleration and deceleration only
↓
“00”:Normally “OFF”
9. Change the “95” (No-load current) parameter.
“3a” 58% → “23” 35%
Follow the procedure below to change the “C95” parameter as simply selecting it cannot
change it.
• First, change the “C91” parameter from “00” to “01”.
• Change the “C94” parameter from “0000” to “fb0a”.
• Then, change the “C95” parameter from “3a” to “23”.
• Reset the “C91” parameter from “01” to “00”.
10. Change the “C03” (Function of terminal 3 setting) parameter.
“02” CF1 (multispeed 1) → “12”EXT (external trip)
11. After setting all the parameters, remove the duct cover.
12. On the inverter operation panel, set the volume to MAX (maximum value in the clockwise
direction).

When you check the input data after completing the setting, be aware of the following
points.
• When confirming the data that was input in step 9), the data will be initialized when you
exit the mode for changing the data and this disables the operation. Therefore, be sure
to input the data again.
• When confirming data other than that input in step 9), the data will not be initialized
when you exit the mode for changing the data.
The procedures for changing the data are shown below. The following procedures show b84 data
as an example in which the current value is changed from 00 to 01. The descriptions in appear in
the inverter display.
0.0
Func.
d01
(2)
c--
(2)
b--
Func.
b01
(1)
b21
Func.
The current value is displayed here. Change the data.
01
(1) Increase the value by pressing the key and decrease the
00 value by pressing the key.
STR Press the [STR] store key to store the setting data.
b21
Func. Press the [Func.] function key to recheck the setting data that
00 has been changed.
Func.
b--
(1)
c--
(1)
d01
Func.
0.0
Be sure to return to this status after changing the panel dis-
play on the inverter.

Error displays for the inverter
If troubles occur with the inverter, the errors shown below appear on the panel and the inverter
output is cut off. “Motor” in the following table implies a blower.
Error
Trip Contents
display
Over-current During constant speed, excessive current was applied to the inverter. This
E 01 protection during was caused by a short circuit of the inverter output, a locking of the motor
constant speed or another reason. The protection circuit went into operation and the
inverter output was cut off.
Over-current During deceleration, over current protection went into operation and the
E 02 protection during inverter output was cut off.
deceleration
Over-current During acceleration, over current protection went into operation and the
E 03 protection during inverter output was cut off.
acceleration
Over-current Due to a cause other than those indicated by E01 to E03, over current
E 04 protection due to protection went into operation and the inverter output was cut off.
another cause
Overload The motor became overloaded due to the detection of the inverter output
E 05 protection current, the inverter?s built-in electronic thermal function detected the
situation, and the inverter output was cut off.
Over-voltage The voltage of the converter section exceeded a certain level because
protection excessive regenerative energy or excessive input voltage was supplied
E 07
from the motor, or the load lessened rapidly during the operation of the
overload control, and the inverter output was cut off.
EEPROM error An error has occurred with the built-in memory of the inverter. This was
E 08 caused by outside noise, abnormal temperature or another cause, and the
inverter output was cut off.
Under-voltage The inverter voltage lowered below the 150V to 160V range, and the
E 09
protection inverter output was cut off.
CPU error The built-in CPU operated improperly, an error occurred, and the inverter
E 11
output was cut off.
External trip The motor thermal function detected an error and the inverter output was
E 12
cut off.
USP error The power supply was turned ON while the inverter was being run, and
E 13
the inverter output was cut off.
Ground fault A ground fault was detected between the inverter output and the motor
E 14
protection when turning ON the power supply, and the inverter output was cut off.
nput over-voltage 100 seconds after the power supply was turned ON, an input voltage
E 15
higher than the specified value was detected, and the inverter was cut off.
Temperature trip The temperature of the inverter module is higher than the specified value
E 21
and the inverter output has been cut off.
CPU error The built-in CPU operated improperly, an error occurred, and the inverter
E 22
output was cut off.

31. Procedure for replacing the RCP2 board

Flash memories (U4, U13, U15, U18)
U15 and U18 are for the user data and the data
unique to the PT-R4300.
X166 X163 X162 X161

X150
X160
U4 X159
U13 U14 X158

TEST
NV RAM (U14)
U15 ROM for debuging X157
U18 X156
X155
CPU DIP SW1
X154
OFF ON
HL 1-8
1
HL 9-16
U62
8 X153
HL 17-24
ROM for ALTERA-FPGA (U62)
RESET
HL 25-32
ALTERA
X164
HL 33-40 PLL
X167
X151 X152
HL 41-42 HL 43-51
PT-R4300 PT-R4000II PT-R4100 PT-R4000

RCP2 board RCP2- PT-R4
U1254023-00
S0249 Ver.1.32 S0249 Ver.1.30 S0249 Ver.1.00 S0249 Ver.1.00
FLASH ROM (U4,U13)
(PT-R4100)
PROM (U62) B8381
*1: The flash memories (U4, U13) are not included in the board for the PT-R4XXX(U1254023-
00).
*2: The RCP2 board with U4, U13, and U62 removed is the same board as for the PT-R4000/
4000II/PT-R8000/8000II.
The NV RAM (U14) included in the RCP2 board stores the data for the exposure conditions,
error logs, and consumables timer. When the RCP2 board is replaced, all data must be transferred
to the new board. Follow the procedure described on the next page to transfer the data.
• The consumables timer data include the data of the plate winding count that is neces-
sary for the maintenance contract (at a metered rate). As this is important mainte-
nance contractual information, be sure to transfer it to the new board.
• Be sure to prepare a PLCC removal tool to remove or attach the flash memories (U4,
U13, U15, U18). If you forcibly remove or attach the flash memories, the memory
sockets will be damaged.

4451
Front sensor offset
1) Enter the Special action screen of the maintenance
mode and select NVRAM backup.
Centering test
NVRAM backup
Before executing step 1), set bit 2 of the DIP
switch on the RCP2 board to ON.
NVRAM restore
When bit 2 is set to OFF, a message allowing you
ESC OK NEXT change it to ON will be displayed.
4451 2) The message shown on the left is displayed. Pressing

Do you backup the data on NVRAM
the OK button initiates transfer of the NV RAM data
in Flash-Memory ? to the flash memories (U15, U18).
3) After completing step 2), turn OFF the power to the

PT-R4300 and replace the RCP2 board with a new
one.
ESC OK CANCEL
Be sure to swap U4, U13, U15, and U18 between

the new and old boards.
4451 4) After the replacement, enter the Special action screen

Front sensor offset
of the maintenance mode without performing initial-
Centering test
ization, and select NVRAM restore.
NVRAM backup
Before executing step 4), set bit 2 of the DIP
NVRAM restore
switch on the RCP2 board to ON.
ESC OK NEXT When bit 2 is set to OFF, a message allowing you
change it to ON will be displayed.
4451 5) The message shown on the left is displayed. Pressing

the OK button initiates transfer of the NV RAM data
Do you overwrite the data on NVRAM
with the data backup in Flash transferred from the old board to the flash memories
-Memory ?
(U15, U18) to the new NV RAM.
6) After completing the transfer process, be sure to set

bit 2 of the DIP switch on the RCP2 board to OFF.
ESC OK CANCEL
7) Finally, check the consumables timer to ensure that
the data has been transferred successfully.

D. Operation panel
< > Provided in the parentheses are the page numbers on which a more detailed description can be found.
Main menu (when PT-R4300 is used independently)
Set Printing machine<B-50> Printing machine selection

Comment input
Grip direction selection (vertical/horizontal)
Leading and trailing grip margin setting
Image centering method selection
Exposure start point correction (primary scanning direction and secondary scanning direction)

Punch type selection
Image position adjustment (primary scanning direction and secondary scanning direction)
Set plate<B-47> Plate number selection
Comment input
Plate size setting (width and length)
Set media type<B-43> Media type number selection
Comment input
Positive/negative selection
Plate thickness setting
Front offset (offset value for the leading edge detection sensors), Displacement offset (offset value for the displacement sensor)
Distance limit (threshold value for the displacement sensor)
Light intensity setting
Drum rpm setting
D.Operation panel
Focus value setting

Zoom value setting
Primary scanning direction length correction
Set exposure mode<B-55> Auto/manual loading selection (when SA-L/MA-L is connected)
1-1.Main menu (when PT-R4XXX is used independently)
Front/rear unloading selection (when units including the auto processor are connected)
Output settings for mirror/normal image, positive/negative, single/multi
User maintenance<B-67> Auto/manual loading selection (when SA-L/MA-L is connected)
Rear unloading (when units including the auto processor are connected)
Manual loading
Manual unloading
Test exposure<B-67> Test exposure for light intensity adjustment<B-74>
Test exposure for drum rpm adjustment
focus Test exposure for focus adjustment<B-68>
PT-R4300: Ver. 1.0X/PT-R4100:Ver1.0X)
zoom Test exposure for zoom adjustment<B71>
Test exposure for simultaneous adjustment of focus and zoom<B-80>

1. Screen flow diagram (PT-R4000: Ver. 3.06/ PT-R4000II: Ver. 4.04/
D-1
D-2
Test exposure<B-67> Test exposure for simultaneous adjustment of light intensity and drum rpm<B-80>
Test exposure<B-76>
Exposure maintenance<B-83> [No-plate] : Setting of whether to perform exposure without
loading a plate
: Setting of whether to perform exposure without
lighting up the LD (laser diodes)
[Full size] : Setting of whether to perform exposure while
including the grip margins
Teaching of plate size in the primary and the secondary
scanning directions
ETC User maintenance setting<B-85> Set Date Time<B-86>
Punch for cleaning<B-87>
Consumable Timer<B-88> Checking and setting of running time, actual running time,
exposure time, and plate winding cycle
Checking and setting of usage time of filters
Checking of number of times the punch operates (Punch 1 to
Punch 4)
Checking of number of times the punch operates (Punch 5 to
Punch 8)
Language<B-89>
Laser power measure<B-90>
D.Operation panel
Laser calibration<D-34>
Cancel calibration<B-93>
Calibration info.<B-94>
Return error to host<B-95>
Option setting<B-96> [Buzzer while trans]: Buzzer for rear unloading
ON/OFF/LOUD
[Mistake plate]: Plate that is loaded incorrectly
Remove/Discharge
[Inter leaf warning]: Warning of interleaf discharge OFF/10
sheets/•••/90 sheets/100 sheets
[Preload button] ON/OFF/COUNTER
[Empty warning]: Warning that no plates remain ON/OFF

Information Version display

Error log display (outline)
Error log display (details)
Set punch name<B-98>
Service<D-11>

D.Operation panel
D-3
D.Operation panel
1-2.Main menu (when SA-L/MA-L is connected)
Main menu (when SA-L/MA-L is connected)
Cassete exchange
Set Cassete
Set Remaining
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
Set Printing machine
Set plate
Set media type
Set punch name
Service
Information
D-4 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Service menu
Password input screen<D-11>

Sensor test<D-14>
Actuator test<D-19>
Drum test<D-24>
Motor test<D-26>
1-3.Service menu
Recording head test<D-29> RH zero return<D-31>

RH positioning<D-32>
Focus zero return<D-31>

Focus positioning<D-32>
Zoom zero return<D-31>
Zoom positioning<D-32>
Peltier test<D-33>
Laser calibration<D-34>
LD ON<D-36>
Calibration position<D-38>
Move to cal.pos.<D-39>
Temperature<D-40> Machine env.: Environment temperature
LD block: LD base temperature
HEAD env.: Recording head peripheral temperature
Fin: Peltier fin temperature
Dew codens: Dew condensation sensor
D.Operation panel
Laser power measure, checking for the cable disconnection<D-41>

Iopd-Iop<D-44>
Input parameter<D-45> Set Correction data<D-47> R : Correction for image length in the secondary scanning direction
R : Correction for exposure start point in the primary scanning direction
R : Correction for exposure start point in the secondary scanning direction
+
: Correction for image position in the primary scanning direction
: Tilt correction
R
: Correction of plate feed amount
Reference Y size data: Compensation of drum cylindricality
Vacuum threshold
Max paper count:Setting of maximum number of interleaves that can be stored in the
interleaf collection box
D-5
D-6
Input parameter<D-45> Set Correction data<D-47> Temp. offset: Temperature sensor correction
Set preset plate type<D-49>
Drum base position<D-50>
Drum position<D-52> Lead clamp (load): Not used
Front Sensor: Adjustment of the leading edge position of plate
Tail clamp: Trailing grip margin correction
Squeeze roller: Drum position correction relative to the position at which the squeeze roller
is lowered
Balancer pin: Drum position correction relative to the balancer
Pick up clamp: Drum position correction relative to the pick up clamp
Tail clamp (unload): Drum position correction relative to the position at which the trailing
edge clamp is released
Length sensor: Correction for plate size in the primary scanning direction
Punch adjust<D-54> : Cam follower position adjustment
: Cam follower position adjustment (Home)
: Cam follower position adjustment (Away)
Calibration position<D-55>
Set punch data<D-56>
RH parameter<D-57> Laser power setting/Setting of target laser power used for channel calibration
(Lpw, Ip1, Ip2, Ip3)<D-59>
Laser power adjust/Precise adjustment of power of each LD channel (A and B) <D-60>
Laser power confirm/Checking of power of each LD channel (Pw1, PW2, PW3) <D-61>
D.Operation panel
Reference laser power/Checking of electric current used in the laser diode channel (Iop)<D-62>

Input parameter<D-45> RH parameter<D-57> Temperature setting<D-63> Temperature: LD base temperature control level
Pelter ctl. Duty: Peltier control value
Alarm level: Alarm level temperature value
Laser running time<D-64>
Writing times clear<D-65>
Board constant setting<D-66>
Auto calibration<D-69> Meas. period: Number of times exposure is performed
before starting auto calibration
Meas. Thd (%): Allowable range of measured light
intensity

Cal. period (Hour): Exposure time before starting auto
calibration
Iop warning: Warning for calibration
Cal. low temp.: Minimum temperature for calibration
Set temp. warning<D-72> (35): Temperature around the recording head
(28): Temperature in the PT-R unit
(22): LD base temperature
(16): Temperature in the PT-R unit
(17): LD base temperature
---: Password
Grip: Adjustment of unexposed area in the leading grip
margin
D.Operation panel
After-Grip: Adjustment of unexposed area in the trailing

grip margin
D-7
D-8
Input parameter<D-45> Drum parameter<D-57> Parameter set<D-73>
Status read<D-75>
Initialize<D-77>
Adjust offset<D-78>
Adjust Gain<D-79>
Set misc. data/ Display of miscellaneous machine information<D-80>
Machine type setting
Machine type 2 setting
Set resolution<D-81>
Set weight<D-82>
Set cassete data<D-83> Paper pad suck (correction of pad position for securing interleaves)
Paper pad nip (correction of pad position for discharging interleaves)
Y size base A, B, C (reference value of plate in the Y direction when it is transferred from the
SA-L or the MA-L unit)
Zone-2 min. size (minimum size for zone area 2)
motion para 1(correction of the plate pad operation)
Password for spec. func<D-86>
Machine option select<D-87> Network(OFF/PPP)
LD/Stocker(OFF/LD/Stocker/ATM)
D.Operation panel
CASSETE(OFF/Single/Multi3/Multi4/Multi5)
Valid LD channel(32ch/0-15/16-31)
I/O Read/Write<D-88>
Initialize data<D-89> Initialize all data<D-90>
Select brand<D-91>
Initialize user data<D-90>
Consumble Timer<D-92>
Initialize preset media<D-90>

Special action<D-94> Initialize<D-95>

Ititialize machine status<D-95>
Pick up clamp<D-96>
Check ORG-EZ<D-97>
Put clamp on drum<D-96>
Front sensor offset<D-98>
Centering test<D-99>
Adjust Displacement sensor<D-100>
NVRAM backup<D-101>

NVRAM restore<D-102>
Register test<D-103>
Special action 2<D-104> Initialize<D-105>
Balancer test<D-106>
Mail test<D-107>
Auto loader test<D-108>
Plate pad test<D-110>
Paper pad test<D-111>
Multi auto loader test<D-112>
D.Operation panel
D-9
D.Operation panel
2. Startup of the main unit without performing initialization
0101 After turning ON the power to the main unit, simulta-

P T- R 4 3 0 0 neously press the two areas indicated by circles on the
screen shown on the left.
’02.05.01
START V1.00
0200 The screen shown on the left appears without an ini-

Not initialized
tialization of the main unit being performed.
1 : 1: Plate 1
OFFLINE OPEN
When starting up the main unit without perform-

ing initialization, the main unit does not operate
normally.
To operate the main unit normally, make sure to
turn OFF/ON the power to the main unit or per-
form initialization from the operation panel.

D.Operation panel
3. Detailed descriptions of the Service/Maintenance screens
3-1.How to enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen
0301
Service
Pressing the OK key after selecting the

Infomation Service key brings up the Password Input
Set punch name screen.
Service
ONLINE OK NEXT
3000 When the screen shown on the left appears, enter the
CLR
password, press the ENT key and then press the
7 8 9
Pass Word
OK key again. The following Service/Maintenance
4 5 6
0 Menu screen appears.
1 2 3
0 •
ESC OK ENT The password is PT-R4000 (II): 4000, PT-R4300:

4300,PT-R4100: 4100
3050
Sensor test If you enter the wrong password, the screen re-
Actuator test turns to the upper layer Menu screen (as indi-
Drum test cated above).
Motor test
You can set the maintenance parameters using the
Recording head test screens shown on the left.
ESC OK NEXT
NEXT NEXT
3051
Input parameter
I/O Read/Write
Initialize data
Special action
ESC OK NEXT
NEXT NEXT
3052
Special action 2
ESC OK NEXT
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL D-11

D.Operation panel
3-2.Service/Maintenance Menu screens
3050
Sensor test
Actuator test Allows you to execute a sensor test.

Drum test (Refer to D-14)
Motor test
Recording head test Allows you to execute an actuator test.

ESC OK NEXT
(Refer to D-19)
NEXT NEXT Allows you to execute tests for drum positioning and
3051
drum rotation.
Input parameter
(Refer to D-24)
I/O Read/Write
Allows you to test the transport/discharge motors and
Initialize data
the plate side alignment motors.
Special action
(Refer to D-26)
ESC OK NEXT
Allows you to execute tests and operations related to

NEXT NEXT
the recording head.
3052 (Refer to D-29)
Special action 2
Allows you to input and check parameter settings.

(Refer to D-45)
Allows you to set optional parameters for the machine.

ESC OK NEXT
(Refer to D-87)
Allows you to execute I/O port data reading and writ-

ing.
(Refer to D-88)
Allows you to initialize parameter settings and change

the machine “brand” name.
(Refer to D-89)
Allows you to execute special actions, including

trailing edge clamp installation and initialization of
the machine status.
(Refer to D-94)

D.Operation panel
This is a jig command for the auto loader.

(Refer to D-104)

D.Operation panel
3-3.Sensor Test screens
3050
Sensor test
Actuator test With this command, you can check the operating sta-
Drum test tus of each sensor.
Motor test Pressing the key after selecting the
Recording head test
OK key brings up the Sensor Operation Check
screen.
ESC OK NEXT
In this screen, the indicators for the sensors that are
currently ON appear highlighted.
Sensor indications after the PT-R is initialized.
Transmission type sensor:
Turns ON when the light is blocked.
Reflection type sensor:
Turns ON when the sensor detects the specified
conditions.
Returns you to the upper layer Menu screen.

NEXT
Switches to the next screen. (The NEXT key

switches the display among the Sensor Selec-
tion screens.)
After selecting the number of the sensor for
which you want to check the operating state and
pressing the OK key, you will hear a beep
sound when the selected sensor turns ON.

D.Operation panel
3100
PH10H : Balancer weight detection sensor (Home)
11 PH10H 6 PH11A2 11 PH27-1 16 PH30H
PH20 PH27-2
PH10A : Balancer weight detection sensor (Away)
2 PH10A 7 12 17 PH30A
3 PH11H1 8 PH21 13 PH27-3 18 PH31H

PH11H1 : Balancer pin position detection sensor 1
4 PH11H2 9 PH24-1 14 PH29H 19 PH31A
(Home)
5 PH11A1 10 PH24-2 15 PH29A 20 PH11H2 : Balancer pin position detection sensor 2
(Home)
ESC OK NEXT
PH11A1 : Balancer pin position detection sensor 1
(Away)
PH11A2 : Balancer pin position detection sensor 2
(Away)
PH20 : Trailing edge clamp arm origin sensor
(Home)
PH21 : Trailing edge clamp arm end point sensor
(Away)
PH24-1 : Trailing edge clamp hook sensor 1
PH24-2 : Trailing edge clamp hook sensor 2
PH27-1 : Trailing edge clamp presence detection
sensor 1
sensor 2
sensor 3
PH29H : Plate top side detection sensor (Home)
PH29A : Plate top side detection sensor (Away)
PH30H : Leading edge clamp close origin sensor
(Home)
PH30A : Leading edge clamp close origin sensor
(Away)
PH31H : Leading edge clamp close end point sen-
sor (Home)
PH31A : Leading edge clamp close end point sen-
sor (Away)

D.Operation panel
3101
PH55 PH62
PH50 : Plate pass sensor on the plate-loading path
11 PH50 6 11 16 SB60-4
PH56 PH63 SB60-5

PH51 : Sensor for detecting an interleaf on the
2 PH51 7 12 17
3 PH52 8 PH57 13 SB60-1 18 SB60-6

back of the plate
4 PH53 9 PH61H 14 SB60-2 19 PH58
PH52 : Nip roller origin sensor
5 PH54 10 PH61A 15 SB60-3 20 PH59 PH53 : Shutter origin sensor
PH54 : Plate pass sensor on the plate transport path
ESC OK NEXT
PH55 : Transport path change lower limit sensor
PH56 : Transport path change upper limit sensor
PH57 : Transport path punch position sensor
PH61H : Sensor for detecting the Home side edge
of a plate for side alignment
PH61A : Sensor for detecting the Away side edge
of a plate for side alignment
PH62 : Plate edge detection sensor for the punch
unit
PH63 : Side alignment origin sensor
SB60-1 : Punch 1 origin sensor
PH58 : Origin sensor of the motor for opening/
closing the operation door (for PT-R4300
only)
PH59 : Discharge path plate pass sensor 2 (for PT-
R4300 only)
3102 PH2 : Scanning origin sensor

11 PH2 6 LS57 11 PD_ERR 16 LS28
PH6 : Sensor for detecting multiple plate feeding
2 PH6 7 LS58 12 PD_BSY 17 S1
or loose plate
3 LS4H 8 PH70 13 +24V 18
4 LS4A 9 P1 14 +15V 19
LS4H : Scanning start point limiter
5 LS56 10 INVALM 15 -15V 20
LS4A : Scanning end point limiter
LS56 : Operation door interlock switch
ESC OK NEXT
LS57 : Cover interlock switch
(LS57-1,2,3)
LS58 : Main cover servo stop switch
(LS58-1,2,SW58)
PH70 : AT unit plate detection sensor
P1 : Drum vacuum pressure sensor
INVALM : Inverter alarm
PD_ERR : Processor error
PD_BSY : Processor busy
+24V : 24V voltage check
D.Operation panel
+15V : +15V voltage check
-15V : -15V voltage check
LS28 : Hook lever switch
(LS28-1,2,2,4,5,6)
S1 : Key switch for maintenance (for PT-
R4300 only)
3103 PH90 : Interleaf detection sensor 1

11 PH90 6 PH92-3 11 PH97-3 16
PH91-1 : Plate pad home position sensor

2 PH91-1 7 PH92-4 12 PH98-1 17
PH91-2 : Plate pad middle position sensor

3 PH91-2 8 PH93-1 13 SB98 18
PH92-1
PH92-1 : Plate underside interleaf detection sensor
4 9 PH97-1 14 19
5 PH92-2 10 PH97-2 15 20
amplifier
PH92-2 : Plate surface interleaf detection sensor and
ESC OK NEXT
plate length detection sensor amplifier (in
plate transportation section)
PH92-3 : Plate detection sensor 1
PH92-4 : Plate detection sensor 2
PH93-1 : Interleaf nip motor home position sensor
PH97-1 : Cassette No. detection sensor
PH98-1 : Interleaf pad home position sensor
SB98 : Plate detection proximity sensor
3104 LS94-2 : Bridge section cover 2 interlock switch

11 LS94-2 6 IN92 11 16
LS94-3 : Maintenance cover interlock switch
2 LS94-3 7 S90 12 17
LS94-4 : Cassette existence detection sensor

3 LS94-4 8 13 18
P101-1 : Pressure sensor

4 P101-1 9 14 19
P101-2 : Pressure sensor

5 P101-2 10 15 20
IN92 : Single/multi identification signal

ESC OK NEXT
H : Single
L : Multi
S90 : Key switch for maintenance (for SA-L/
MA-L4300 only)

D.Operation panel
3105
SQ200 : Chain drive home position sensor
11 SQ200 6 SQ212A 11 SQ213D 16 LS210E
SQ200A : Chain drive positioning sensor
2 SQ200A 7 SQ212C 12 LS200E 17
3 PH93-1
SQ211A 8 SQ212D 13 LS206 18
SQ211A : Cassette tray 1 positioning sensor
4 SQ211C 9 SQ213A 14 SQ210A 19
SQ211C : Cassette 1 storage checking sensor
5 SQ211D 10 SQ213C 15 SQ210 20
SQ211D : Arm activation sensor for storage of first
cassette
ESC OK NEXT
SQ212D : Arm activation sensor for storage of sec-
ond cassette
SQ213D : Arm activation sensor for storage of third
cassette
LS200E : Chain drive second end point switch
LS206 : Cassette door sensor
SQ210A : Arm travel end point sensor
SQ210 : Arm home position sensor
LS210E : Arm protrusion detection sensor
3106 LS220U : Lift’s over-travel upper switch

11 LS220U 6 AC-P8 11 AC-AL 16 SQ200D
LS220L : Lift’s over-travel lower switch
2 LS220L 7 AC-P4 12 AC-BU 17 LS206A
SQ220 : Lift home position sensor
3 PH93-1
SQ220 8 AC-P2 13 SQ221B 18 LS206B
AC-Z AC-P1
AC-Z : AC servo motor Z phase detection
4 9 14 SQ222B 19
5 AC-P16 10 AC-C0 15 SQ223B 20

AC-P16 : Lift position output 5
ESC OK NEXT
AC-C0 : Lift positioning end
AC-AL : Lift drive motor error
AC-BU : Lift is moving.
SQ221B : Lift interlock 1 sensor
SQ200D : Chain drive slowdown sensor
LS206A : Cassette door 1 switch
LS206B : Cassette door 2 switch

D.Operation panel
3-4.Actuator Test screens
3050
Sensor test
Actuator test With this command, you can check the operation of
Drum test each actuator.
Motor test Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Recording head test key brings up the Actuator Opera-
tion Check screen.
ESC OK NEXT

NEXT
Switches to the next screen. (The key

tion screens.)
Pressing the OK key after selecting any of
keys for the actuators you want to check
performs the check(s).
3200 MBL1 : Blower (Drum)

MBL1:Blower (Drum) On Off
Turns on/off the blower for the plate suction on
BL40:Blower (Gas) On Off the drum.
M41:Compressor (Gas) On Off BL40 : Blower (Gas)
Turns on/off the blower for the exhaust gas suc-
tion.
ESC OK
M41 : Compressor (Gas)
Turns on/off the compressor for the exhaust gas
collection when exposing.
3201 M11H : Lock pin (Home)

M11H:Lock pin (Home) Out In
Activates the lock pin on the Home side.
M11H:Blancer pin (Home) Out In M11H : Balancer pin (Home)
M11A:Lock pin (Away) Out In Activates the balancer pin on the Home side.
M11A : Lock pin (Away)
M11A:Blancer pin (Away) Out In
Activates the lock pin on the Away side.
ESC OK
M11A : Balancer pin (Away)
Activates the balancer pin on the Away side.

D.Operation panel
3202
M20 : Squeeze roller
M20:Squeeze roller Up Down
Activates the squeeze roller.
M20:Trail edge clamp arm Up Down
M20 : Trail edge clamp arm
M24:Trail edge clamp hook Hold Rele Activates the trailing edge clamp arm motor.
M30:Leading edge clamp Up Down
M24 : Trail edge clamp hook
Activates the trailing edge clamp hook drive
ESC OK
motor
M30 : Leading edge clamp
Activates the motor for opening/closing the
leading edge clamp.
3203 M58 : Door open

M58:Door open On Off
Activates the solenoid for the operation door.
BZ1:Buzzer On Off (*1) (SL58 for the PT-R4300)
PS2:Power supply(Servo pack) On Off
BZ1 : Buzzer
Activates the buzzer.
PS43:Power supply(LD) On Off
PS2 : Power supply (Servo pack)
ESC OK Switches ON/OFF the excitation of the servo
pack.
When ON, the drum is held still.
When OFF, the drum is released.
PS43 : Power supply (LD)
Activates the power supply for the laser diodes.
1) For PT-R4000 (II)

Whenever you set Door open to ON, be sure
to set it to OFF afterwards.
The solenoid will remain ON until the Door
open is set to OFF.
3204 M52 : Niproller

M52:Niproller Up Down
Activates the nip roller in the trans port unit.
SL53:Shutter Close Open SL53 : Shutter
M55:Path Up Down Activates the shutter.
M55 : Path
Activates the transport unit.
ESC OK

D.Operation panel
3205
SL59-1 : Load clatch
SL59-1:Load clatch On Off
Activates the transport clutch (on the plate load-
SL59-2:Unload clatch On Off
ing side).
SL59-2 : Unload clatch
Activates the transport clutch (on the plate un-
loading side).
ESC OK
3206
M60-1 : Punch 1
M60-1:Punch 1 On Off
Activates Punch 1.
M60-2:Punch 2 On Off
M60-2 : Punch 2
M60-3:Register punch(Home) On Off Activates Punch 2.
M60-4:Register punch(Away) On Off
M60-3 : Register punch (Home)
Activates the registration punch.
ESC OK
M60-4 : Register punch (Away)
Activates the registration punch.
3207
M60-5 : Punch 5
M60-5:Punch 5 Up Down
Activates Punch 5.
Off
M60-6:Punch 6 On
M60-6 : Punch 6
Activates Punch 6.
ESC OK
3208
M93 : Paper nip roller
M93:Paper nip roller Up Down
Activates the interleaf nip roller.
M90:Paper transport roller On Off
M90 : Paper transport roller
SL97:Carrier lock On Off Activates the interleaf discharge roller.
VP100:Vacuum pump On Off
SL97 : Carrier lock
Activates the cassette lock. (only SA-L)
ESC OK
VP100 : Vacuum pump
Activates the vacuum pump.

D.Operation panel
3209
V102-1 : Plate pad valve1
V102-1:Plate pad valve 1 Close Open
Activates the solenoid valve operation for plate
pad (zoon1).
V102-3:Plate pad valve 3 Close Open V102-2 : Plate pad valve2
pad (zoon2).
ESC OK
pad (zoon3).
pad (zoon4).
3210 V102-5 : Paper pad valve1

V102-5:Paper pad valve 1 Close Open
Activates the solenoid valve operation for
V102-6:Paper pad valve 2 Close Open interleaf pad (zoon1).
V102-7:Paper pad valve 3 Close Open V102-6 : Paper pad valve2
V102-8:Paper pad valve 4 Close Open
interleaf pad (zoon2).
ESC OK
V102-7 : Paper pad valve3
V102-8 : Paper pad valve4
3211 SL209 : Mal door

SL209:Mal door Close Open
Releases the door lock of the multi-cassette
M200:Lift motor -> Lift On Off unit.
-> Cas On Off
After the door lock has been released, closing the

ESC OK door will automatically lock it.
M200 : Lift motor -> Lift

Moves the cassette transportation motor.
: Lift motor -> Cas
Moves the cassette transportation motor.
For the machine’s protection, the motor will not

operate when the part is in a wrong position (e.g.,
when the height of the lift is not correct).

D.Operation panel
3212
M210 : Arm motor -> Lift
M210:Arm motor -> Lift Out In
Moves the arm motor.
SL207:Lift brake On Off
In order to protect the machine, once the motor

has moved to the Out direction, the motor cannot
ESC OK move again. In such a case, return the cassette
to the multi-cassette unit side until the lock works.
SL207 : Lift brake

Moves the electromagnetic brake used for the
lift tray.
If the M220 servo is turned OFF, the brake can-

not be released. (e.g., when an interlock is re-
leased and a door is opened)

D.Operation panel
3-5.Drum Test screens
3050
Sensor test
Actuator test With this command, you can check each of the drum
Drum test unit’s various operations.
Recording head test key brings up the Drum Unit Op-
eration Check screen.
ESC OK NEXT

3300
NEXT
Zero Leading
Fast Slow
Return Clamp Switches to the next screen. (The NEXT key
Squeeze
Front Tail Edge switches the display among the Sensor Selec-
check clamp sense
tion screens.)
Servo Servo Error Brake
(ON) (OFF) Clear On/Off Pressing the OK key after selecting any of
ESC OK
the test items executes its operation.
Pressing the OK key after selecting any of the

above commands brings up the screen shown on the
left.
Returns you to the previous screen.

OK
The drum starts the selected command opera-

tion.
Cancel
Halts the current operation of the drum.
Zero Return:
Detects the drum (encoder) unit’s z-pulse point.
Fast:
Rotates the drum at the exposure speed. (The
drum rotates at the speed used during the last
image exposure.)
Slow:
Rotates the drum at the plate transfer speed.
Leading Clamp:
Moves the drum to the plate loading position
where the leading edge clamps can be opened to
load a plate.

D.Operation panel
Squeeze:
Moves the drum to the position where the
squeeze roller can be lowered.
Front check:
Rotates the drum to the position for the plate
leading edge check when loading.
Tail clamp:
Moves the drum to the position where the trail-
ing edge clamps can hold or release a plate.
Edge sensor:
Not used.
Servo (ON):
Prevents the drum from rotating.
Servo (OFF):
Prevents the drum from rotating.
Error Clear:
Clears errors in the servo.
Brake On/Off:
Not used.
1050
1 Plate 1
2 Plate 2 The screen shown on the left for selecting plate

3 Plate 3 size only appears if this command is selected.
4 Plate 4
This is because the grip’s trailing edge clamp po-
5 Plate 5
sitions are controlled by the plate size.
ESC OK NEXT
After you select the plate size, a confirmation

screen asking you whether to execute the se-
lected command appears.

D.Operation panel
3-6.Pulse Motor Test screens
3050
Sensor test
Drum test the pulse motor.
Motor test Individually activates each pulse motor.
Recording head test
ESC OK NEXT
Pressing the OK key after selecting the pulse
motor you want to check starts its operation.
3450
M50:Transport roller(In)
M50 : Transport roller (In)
M50:Transport roller(Out)
Activates the transport motor on the plate load-
ing side.
M61:
M50 : Transport roller (Out)
Activates the transport motor on the plate un-
loading side.
ESC OK NEXT
M61 :
Activates the plate side alignment drive motor.
NEXT NEXT
3451
M91:Plate pad motor M91 : Plate pad motor
M92:Plate transport rollor
Activates the plate pad drive motor.
M98:Paper pad motor
M92 : Plate transport roller
Activates the transportation motor of the AT
M95:Lift motor
section.
M98 : Paper pad motor
ESC OK NEXT
Activates the interleaf pad drive motor.
M95 : Lift motor
Activates the lift drive motor.

D.Operation panel
Distance setting button Distance setting button
3400 Sets the distance units for moving the selected
CLR
pulse motor. Repeatedly pressing this button
7 8 9
0 [pulse] changes the indication in the following order.
4 5 6
0.0 [mm/sec] (Allowable range: -9999 to 9999):
1 2 3
Currently, this button cannot be used for any of
0 .
the listed pulse motor tests.
ESC OK ENT
(Allowable range: -999.9 to 999.9):
Sets the distance to move the pulse motor in
3400
“mm”
CLR
• To operate the pulse motor continuously, input
7 8 9 “0” in both fields of the screen shown on the left
0 [mm]
4 5 6 and press the OK key.
0.0 [mm/sec]
1 2 3 • If you want to execute the M61 command, enter
0 . the plate’s width in this field.
ESC OK ENT
• If there is no plate loaded on the drum when

you execute the M61 command, an error ap-
pears. Therefore, be sure to set a plate on the
drum before executing this command.
Returns the selected pulse motor to its home

position for initialization.
This button cannot be used with either the M50
and M54 command.
0.0 [mm/sec] (Allowable range: 0 to 999.9):

Sets the operation speed of the pulse motor.
Setting this parameter to “0” will operate the pulse
motor at the default speed (normal operating speed).
Only use this parameter if you want to operate
the pulse motor at a different speed.
Pressing the OK key after completing the

setting brings up the screen for pulse motor op-
eration shown on the left.

D.Operation panel
3452
OK
Operates or initializes the pulse motor. When

the operation is completed, the screen for dis-
Start OK ?
tance setting reappears.
ESC OK Cancel

D.Operation panel
3-7.Recording Head Unit Test screens
3050
Sensor test
Drum test the recording head unit.
Recording head test key brings up the Recording Head
Unit Operation screen.
ESC OK NEXT

NEXT
Switches to the next screen. (The NEXT key

tion screens.)
Returns the recording head to its home position.

(Refer to D-31)
Positions the recording head at a desired point

in the secondary scanning direction.
(Refer to D-32)
NEXT NEXT
Returns the focus motor to its home position.

(Refer to D-31)
Positions the focus motor at a desired point.

(Refer to D-32)
Returns the zoom motor to its home position.

(Refer to D-31)
Positions the zoom motor at a desired point.

(Refer to D-32)
Executes an operation test for the Peltier unit.

(Refer to D-33)
NEXT NEXT Executes LD channel calibration.

(Refer to D-34)

D.Operation panel
Turns the laser diodes ON.

(Refer to D-36)
Adjusts the position of the calibration sensor.

(Refer to D-38)
3507
Move to cal. pos.
Temperature Moves the recording head to the calibration po-

Laser power measure sition.
Iopd-Iop (Refer to D-39)
ESC OK NEXT Displays the temperatures in the recording head

and in the PT-R unit.
(Refer to D-40)
Measures the laser power.

(Refer to D-41)
Iopd-Iop
Displays the value obtained by calculating Iopd

- Iop. (Refer to D-44)

D.Operation panel
3-7-1.Zero Return screen for recording head unit/focus motor/zoom motor
Allows you to return the recording head unit, focus

motor, and zoom motor to their home positions.
above keys brings up the zero return confirmation
screen.
Starts the zero return operation. When the zero

return operation is completed, the Recording
Head Unit Test screen reappears.

D.Operation panel
3-7-2.Positioning screens for recording head unit/focus motor/zoom motor
Allows you to position the recording head unit, focus

motor, and zoom motor.
above keys brings up the position entry screen.
3520 After inputting values for the positions of each

CLR
unit, press the ENT key and then the
7 8 9
0.00 mm key to start the positioning operation.
4 5 6
1 2 3 Allowable range
0 •
RH positioning [mm]: 0.0 to 903.0
ESC START ENT Focus positioning [pulse]: 101 to 4000
Zoom positioning [pulse]: 201 to 9970
Screen display for RH positioning
• For the zero return operation, the home posi-
3540
CLR
tion is regarded as the absolute position “0”.
7 8 9
• 1 pulse corresponds to about 1 µm movement
2080 [pulse]
for Focus positioning and Zoom positioning.
4 5 6
1 2 3 When the positioning operation is completed,

0 • the Recording Head Unit Test screen reappears.
ESC START ENT
Screen display for Focus posi-

tioning and Zoom positioning

D.Operation panel
3-7-3.Peltier Test screen
Allows you to execute an operation test for the Peltier

unit.
key brings up the Peltier Test Input
screen.
3570 A value ranging from 0 to 255 can be input in

Peltier ctl. DAC
CLR
the “Peltier ctl. DAC” field.
0 7 8 9
Values in the range from 0 to 255 correspond to
4 5 6
Peltier drive voltages ranging from 0 to 12V.
1 2 3
0 . -
ESC OK ENT
3571
Pressing the OK key after inputting a value
in this field activates the Peltier unit.
Processing Now
Please wait !
STOP
• When an “Error Exe20” is displayed (LD block
temperature too high), the key
is used to identify whether the malfunction is in
the Peltier unit itself or in the board driving the
Peltier unit.
• To identify the source of the error, run the
Peltier unit and check whether output occurs
normally from the Peltier unit’s terminal box and
whether the area where the dew condensation
sensor is attached has cooled down.

D.Operation panel
3-7-4.Laser Calibration screen
Executes LD channel calibration.

The operation for calibrating the laser diodes is
the same as that executed by the “Laser calibra-
tion” command from the User Setting Selection
screen.

key brings up the Resolution Selec-
tion screen.
Press the OK key after selecting the resolu-

tion at which you want to calibrate the laser di-
odes.
The Channel Selection screen for selecting a la-
ser diode channel appears.
3581 Input the number of the laser diode channel you

CLR
want to calibrate, and then press the ENT
7 8 9
LD No. (0-31 32 : ALL) key.
4 5 6
32
1 2 3 0-31 : Calibrates only the selected channel.
0 . - 32 : Calibrates all channels.
ESC START ENT
Then, press the key to execute calibra-
tion.
It takes approximately 20 seconds to calibrate a
channel. To calibrate all the channels, it takes ap-
proximately 3 minutes.
When laser calibration is completed, the Re-

cording Head Unit Test Menu screen reappears.

D.Operation panel
32-ch recording head
Definition Application Screen
Electric current to Used as electric

output the rated current that Service/Input parameter/RH
Iopd
power of laser determines the life parameter/Reference laser power
diodes of laser diodes
Electric current to
Service/Input parameter/RH
Iop light the laser ←
parameter/Laser power confirm
diodes
32-ch recording head
Warning Iopd-Iop ≤ 50mA
Error Iop = Iopd

D.Operation panel
3-7-5.LD ON screen
Turns the laser diodes ON at each resolution setting.
Although the laser diodes in the PT-R are not di-

rectly visible, NEVER operate them while the RH
unit’s cover is open.

key brings up the Resolution
Selection screen.
Select the exposure resolution for which the la-

ser diodes will be used, and then press the
OK key.
The Laser Power Setting screen appears.
Input the desired laser power, and then press the

ENT key.
Then, press the OK key. The Channel Input

screen for selecting the number of the LD chan-
nel to turn ON appears.
3592 Input the number of the channel you want to

CLR
turn ON, and then press the ENT key. Press
7 8 9
LD No. (0-31) the key. The laser on the channel you
4 5 6
0 selected is then lighted.
1 2 3
0 •
ESC START ENT

D.Operation panel
Pressing the key terminates the laser il-
lumination and returns you to the Recording
Head Unit Test Menu screen.

D.Operation panel
3-7-6.Calibration Position screen
With this command, you can automatically detect and

adjust the position of the calibration sensor board.
Whenever you replace the RH unit and/or cali-

bration sensor, be sure to use this command.

key brings up the Calibration Sen-
sor Position Detection screen.
Detects the position of the calibration sensor

board.
When detection of the calibration sensor board

is completed, the Calibration Sensor Position
Detection screen reappears.
The resulting detection data is also displayed on
this screen.
Saves the new data.
Press and then OK to save the posi-

tion of the calibration sensor board.
If you want to cancel the save, press and
then OK .

D.Operation panel
3-7-7.Moving to Calibration Position screen
3507
Move to cal. pos.
Temperature Allows moving of the recording head to the calibra-

Laser power measure tion position.
Iopd-Iop Pressing the OK key after selecting the
key moves the recording head to the
position where the calibration is executed.
ESC OK NEXT
When the recording head movement is completed, the

menu screen shown on the left appears

D.Operation panel
3-7-8.Temperature Display screen
3507
Move to cal. pos.
Temperature Allows displaying of the temperatures in the recording

Laser power measure head and in the PT-R unit.
key displays the Temperature
screen.
ESC OK NEXT

3620
Temperature
Temperature
Machine env. 27.1 Machine env. :
LD bolck 25.0
Head env. 28.1 Displays the temperature in the PT-R
Fin 28.0
Dew condens 0 unit.
Warning status:
OK Temperature in the PT-R unit > 28 °C or
temperature in the PT-R unit < 18 °C
LD block :
Displays the LD base temperature.
Error status: LD base temperature >28 °C
Head env. :
Displays the temperature around the re-
cording head.
Error status: Temperature around the re-
cording head >35 °C
Fin :
Displays the temperature of a radiating
fin.
Error status: Radiating fin temperature >
55 °C
Dew condens :
Displays the dew condensation sensor
status.
(Unit: kW)
Normal status: 0 to 20 kW
Warning status: Over 20 kW
Error (dew condensation) status:
Over 100 kW

D.Operation panel
3-7-9.Laser Power Measurement and Cable Disconnection Check screens
3507
Move to cal. pos.
Temperature Allows you to measure the laser power.

Laser power measure Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Iopd-Iop key brings up the Resolution Se-
lection screen.
ESC OK NEXT
2260 Select the resolution by which you wish to mea-

Resolution
sure the laser power and then press the OK
1200 2000 2400
dpi dpi dpi key.
4000 2438 2540
The Laser Power Measurement screen appears.
dpi dpi dpi
ESC OK
2400,2438 and 2540dpi only are

displayed for PTR4100.
2261
Then, press the OK key to activate the laser
power measurement.
Start OK ?
ESC OK
2262 While the laser power is being measured, the

display shown to the left appears.
When the measurement of laser power is com-
Processing Now. pleted, the following screen appears.
Please wait !

D.Operation panel
2263
Target values (Lpw):
0ch 270 8ch 270 16ch 270 24ch 270
1ch 270 9ch 270 17ch 270 25ch 270
These values have been specified in the Laser
2ch 270 10ch 270 18ch 270
3ch 270 11ch 270 19ch 270
26ch
27ch
270
270
power setting screen, which is accessible by se-
4ch
5ch
270
270
12ch
13ch
269
270
20ch
21ch
270
270
28ch 270 lecting Service Maintenance → Input param-
29ch 270
6ch 270 14ch 270 22ch 270 30ch 270 eter → RH parameter.
7ch 270 15ch 270 23ch 270 31ch 270
1200 dpi: 240 mW/ch 2000 dpi: 270 mW/ch
OK
2400 dpi: 240 mW/ch 2438 dpi: 240 mW/ch
16ch only are displayed
2540 dpi: 230 mW/ch 4000 dpi: 240 mW/ch
for PTR4100.
NEXT
The measured values are indicated in % in the
user mode screen.
2264 Pressing OK brings up the screen shown on the left.

0ch 100% 8ch 100% 16ch 100% 24ch 100% In this screen, you can make sure that the cables run-
1ch 100% 9ch 100% 17ch 100% 25ch 100%
2ch 100% 10ch 100% 18ch 100% 26ch 100% ning from the RB31 board to the recording head are
3ch 100% 11ch 100% 19ch 100% 27ch 100%
4ch 100% 12ch 100% 20ch 100% 28ch 100% not disconnected.
5ch 100% 13ch 100% 21ch 100% 29ch 100%
6ch 100% 14ch 100% 22ch 100% 30ch 100% • When the measured light intensity is 50% or more of
7ch 100% 15ch 100% 23ch 100% 31ch 100%
the target light intensity.
OK • When the measured light intensity is less than 50%
16ch only are displayed of the target light intensity.
for PTR4100. The measured values are indicated using ¡ or ×
in the user mode screen.
1) Operation conditions
The screen to check for the disconnection of image signal cables between the RB31
board and the recording head is displayed when the following conditions are satis-
fied.
• The firmware version of the main unit is:
• A plate has been loaded.
• The Machine Type 2 parameter (Service Maintenance → Set misc. data) has
been set to “4”. (Factory set value: 0)
• The 16 ch exposure mode has not been set.
1) There is no disabled or lowered light intensity LD.
2) The 16 ch exposure mode has not been selected in the Service Maintenance →
Machine option select screen.

D.Operation panel
2) Description of the operation
The cable disconnection is checked by issuing a pseudo-image signal from the
RB31 board to light up the LDs. The light intensity of each LD is measured using the
calibration sensor. When the measured LD power is insufficient, the sensor identi-
fies it as a cable disconnection.
The check for cable disconnection can be performed only when the recording head
is in the calibration position.
3) Timing of the check

The cable disconnection check timing is:
• After the regular light intensity measurement
1) Before exposing the first plate after turning ON the power supply
2) Before exposing a plate after completing exposure of 24 plates (default value)
Note that if the output laser power of any of the LDs is out of the ± 5% (default value)
range of the target output value, the cable disconnection will not be checked.
4) When the disconnection of any cable between the RB31 board and the recording
head is detected:
If the output laser power of any of the LDs is less than 50% of its target value, the
following error will be issued.
Ex839 The cable between RB31 board and recording head is disconnected.
When this error is issued, the exposure operation is canceled and it can be resumed
after resetting the error and performing an initialization.

D.Operation panel
3-7-10.Iopd - Iop screen
3507
Move to cal. pos. Iopd-Iop
Temperature Displays the lives of the laser diodes according to the

Laser power measure calculation.
Iopd-Iop key brings up the screen to select
the resolution.
ESC OK NEXT
Returns you to the upper layer screen.

3700
Resolution
Select the resolution and press the OK key.
1200 2000 2400
dpi dpi dpi
4000 2438 2540

dpi dpi dpi
ESC OK

3701 The values listed in the screen shown on the left
0. 392 8. 332 16. 353 24. 408 indicate the results of following calculation for-
1. 381 9. 357 17. 394 25. 399
2. 374 10. 333 18. 412 26. 329 mula.
3. 367 11. 345 19. 386 27. 401
4. 414 12. 330 20. 393 28. 407 Iopd - Iop
5. 365 13. 339 21. 394 29. 418
6. 356 14. 342 22. 387 30. 400
7. 412 15. 359 23. 408 31. 408 Indicated value ≤ 50 mA
OK
Life warning status of laser diode
Indicated value > 50 mA
for PTR4100.
Normal status of laser diode
Indicated value = 0 mA
Life error status of laser diode

D.Operation panel
3-8.Input Parameter screen
3051
Input parameter
Machine option select With this command, you can enter and change various
I/O Read/Write parameters for the PT-R.
Initialize data Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Special action
key brings up the Input Parameter
Menu screen.
ESC OK NEXT
Allows you to set correction values for pre-

cisely
adjusting the image length to be exposed on a
plate (in the secondary scanning direction) and
adjusting the exposure start origin.
(Refer to D-47)
NEXT
Allows you to register the data for preset plate

types.
(Refer to D-49)
Allows you to correct for the deviation between

the drum reference point and the encoder Z
pulse point.
(Refer to D-50)
Allows you to precisely adjust the positioning

of the drum.
(Refer to D-52)
Allows you to set a correction value for posi-

tioning the punch unit with reference to a
plate’s center, and adjusts the spring tension in
the plate side alignment unit.
(Refer to D-54)
NEXT
Allows you to input a correction value for the
position of the calibration sensor.
(Refer to D-55)

D.Operation panel
Allows you to set parameters for optional punch

units.
(Refer to D-56)
Allows you to set parameters for the board and

laser diodes in the RH unit.
(Refer to D-57)
Allows you to set parameters for the drum mo-

tor driver.
(Refer to D-73)
The Mfg. No of the machine is already entered.

(Refer to D-80)
Sets the address in the parameter table for regis-

tering the RH unit’s settings for each resolution.
(Refer to D-81)
Sets the weights of the trailing edge clamps and

the balancer.
(Refer to D-82)
Sets the sizes of the plates to be used in the

zones 2 and 3.
(Refer to D-83)
Sets the password for various special functions.

(Refer to D-86)

D.Operation panel
3-8-1.Correction Data Setting screens
Allows you to set correction values for precisely ad-

justing the image length to be exposed on a plate (in
the secondary scanning direction) and adjusting the
exposure start origin.
key brings up the Correction Data
Setting screen. From this screen you can input correc-
tion values, precisely adjust the image length to be ex-
posed on a plate in the secondary
scanning direction, and adjust the exposure start ori-
gin.

3740
R 0.000 [%] CLR R [%] (Allowable range: -9.999 to 9.999)

R 0.000 [mm] 7 8 9 This correction value precisely adjusts the
R 0.00 [mm]
4 5 6
length of an image exposed on a plate in the sec-
R 0.00 [mm]
ondary scanning direction.
1 2 3
0.00 [µ]
+ The correction value is used to adjust the image
0.00 [mm] 0 . -
length exposed on a plate in the secondary scan-
ESC OK ENT
ning direction.
For example, if an image which is 800 mm in the
secondary scanning direction is exposed on a
plate while this correction value is set to “0”, if the
resulting length of the exposed image on the
plate is 799 mm, the image deviation equals:
(800 - 799)/800 x 100 = 0.125 (%)
Inputting this value as the correction value above
allows you to precisely
expose an image on a plate with exactly the
same length as its secondary scanning dimen-
sion.
Input a correction value for the exposure start

origin in the main scanning direction.
Input a correction value for the exposure start
origin in the secondary scanning direction.
R
Input a correction value for the plate feed
amount when loading.
This setting can correct deviation from the stan-
dard pin position within a range of 50µm.
D.Operation panel
Input a correction value for the image position
in the primary scanning direction.
3741 This table is for inputting the cylindricality correction

Refarence Y size data CLR
1. 0 9. 0 17. 0 values.
2. 0 10. 0 18. 0 7 8 9
3. 0 11. 0 19. 0 It is not necessary to input any correction values.
4. 0 12. 0 4 5 6
5. 0 13. 0
All data have been set to “0” at the factory.
6. 0 14. 0 1 2 3
7. 0 15. 0
8. 0 16. 0 0 •
ESC OK ENT
3742 Vacuum threshold:

CLR
Vacuum threshold 30 This value is used to chaeck that the vacuum
7 8 9
Max paper count 30
hose has not been disconnected.
----------------- 0 4 5 6
Temp. offset 0 Max paper count: (Allowable range: 0 to 100):
1 2 3
Input the maximum number of interleafs that
0 .
can be stored in the interleaf collection box.
ESC OK ENT
When the number of interleafs exceeds this
value, a warning message indicating the
interleaf disposal will be displayed.
Temp.offset: [0.1°C] (Allowable range: -50 to 50):
Input a correction value for the temperature
sensor. For details, refer to “7.Temperature cor-
rection sensor adjustment” in chapter C.
Press and then OK to save the setting

data.
If you do not want to save the data, press
and then OK .

D.Operation panel
3-8-2.Preset Plate Type Setting screen
Allows you to register the data for preset plate types.

key brings up the Preset Plate Type
Setting screen.
1057
Select the number of the plate type option you
31 FUJIFILM LH-PI 0.24mm want to modify, and then change or correct its
32 FUJIFILM LH-PI 0.30mm data.
33 FUJIFILM LH-NI 0.24mm • The default plate type data has already been
34 FUJIFILM LH-NI 0.30mm set in the factory before shipment.
35 KODAK IR 0.24mm • For details on how to change or correct plate
ESC OK NEXT type data.
1058
36 KODAK IR 0.30mm
37 Media Type 37
38 Media Type 38
39 Media Type 39
40 Media Type 40
ESC OK NEXT

D.Operation panel
3-8-3.Drum Base Position Setting screen
Allows you to correct for the deviation between the

drum reference point and the encoder Z pulse point.
key brings up the Drum Base Posi-
tion Setting screen in which you can correct the devia-
tion (in pulses) between the drum reference point and
the encoder Z pulse point.
Returns Detects the deviation (in pulses) be-

tween the drum reference point and the encoder
Z pulse point.
Before using this command, be sure to in-

stall the drum positioning jigs.
After completing the detection of the deviation

between the drum reference point and the en-
coder Z pulse point, the screen shown on the left
appears. Press the OK key.
The resulting data is then displayed on the

screen.
Allows you to save the new data.

D.Operation panel
Press and then OK to save the result-
ing data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
3-8-4.Drum Position Setting screen
Allows you to precisely adjust the positioning of the

drum.
key brings up the Drum Position
Precise Adjustment screen.

1 pulse = 0.28 mm
3850 Lead clamp (load)

Drum position [pulse] CLR
Lead clamp (load): 0 Not use
Front Sensor: 10 7 8 9
Tail clamp: 12
Squeeze roller: 0 4 5 6 Front Sensor [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)
Balancer pin: 0
Pick up clamp: 4 1 2 3 Perform the fine adjustment for the position
Tail clamp (unload): 1
Length Sensor: -5 0 . - check for plate leading edge when loading.
ESC SAVE ENT (Adjust the position of the sensor so that the
sensor turns from On to Off.)
Tail clamp [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)

Precisely adjusts the drum position at which the
trailing edge clamps will hold a plate.
Squeeze rollor [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)

squeeze roller will be lowered.
Balancer pin
Not use
Pick up clamp [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)

Precisely adjusts the drum position to the pick
up clamp position.
Tail clamp (unload) [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)

trailing edge clamps will be released from the
drum.
Length Sensor [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)

Sets a value to correct the plate size in the pri-
mary scanning direction.
Adjust the value in the screen accessed by the
following order.
(Select User Maintenance → .)

D.Operation panel
data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
3-8-5.Punch Adjustment screen
Allows you to set a correction value for positioning

the punch unit with reference to a plate’s center, and
adjusts the spring tension in the plate side alignment
unit.
Pressing the key after selecting the
OK
key brings up the Punch Adjust-

ment screen in which you can correct the punch posi-
tion with reference to the plate center and adjust the
tension of the spring in the plate side alignment unit.

3860
Punch adjust CLR : Coarse adjustment for the cam follower po-
7 8 9 sition is performed.
0.000 [mm]
4 5 6 : Fine adjustment for the cam follower posi-
0.000 [mm]
1 2 3
tion at Home side sensor is performed.
0.000 [mm]
.
: Fine adjustment for the cam follower posi-
0 -
tion at Away side sensor is performed.
ESC SAVE ENT

data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
3-8-6.Calibration Sensor Position Adjustment screen
Allows you to input a correction value for the position

of the calibration sensor.
key brings up the Calibration Sen-
sor Position Adjustment screen in which you can set a
correction value for the position of the calibration sen-
sor.
It is possible to simply input the correction

value from this screen. However, to assure a
more precise correction value, be sure to adjust
the value following the procedure described in
“3-7-6 Calibration Position screen”.

data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
3-8-7.Punch Data Setting screen
Allows you to set parameters for optional punch units.

key brings up the Punch Data Set-
ting screen in which you can set data for the optional
punch units.
Enter the punch unit position number (connec-

tor number) for the optional punch unit
mounted on the machine.
Entering a number for a punch unit position
where no punch unit is mounted could cause an
error during punch operation.
Also input the punch pitch into the Set punch

name field to simplify later settings of the
punch unit name.

data.
then OK .
Home side Away side
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 No.6
Registration punch Registration punch

D.Operation panel
3-8-8.Recording Head Parameter Setting screens
Allows you to set parameters for the board and laser

diodes in the RH unit.
key brings up the menu screen for
setting RH parameters.
3895
Laser power setting
Laser power adjust Allows entry of the target laser power used for
Laser power confirm channel calibration at each resolution.
Reference laser power (Refer to D-59)
Temperature setting
ESC OK NEXT Allows precise adjustment of the power of each

LD channel at each resolution.
NEXT NEXT (Refer to D-60)
Allows the checking of the electric current (Iop)

used in a laser diode channel at each resolution
and the output power values of Ip1, Ip2, and
Ip3, which are specified in Laser power setting.
(Refer to D-61)
Reference laser power
Allows the checking of the rated output current

(Iopd) at each resolution.
(Refer to D-62)
Allows entry of the parameters for temperature

in the RH unit.
(Refer to D-63)

D.Operation panel
3896
Laser running time
Writing time clear Displays or clears the cumulative laser illumi-

Board costant setting nation time.
Auto calibration (Refer to D-64)
Set temp. warning
ESC OK NEXT Displays or clears the number of times that the

laser illumination time data has been written to
the EEPROM.
(Refer to D-65)
Allows the checking of parameters that are

unique to each board of recording head.
(Refer to D-66)
Allows you to set the execution time for auto

calibration.
(Refer to D-69)
Allows you to set the warning error level for

temperature.
(Refer to D-72)

D.Operation panel
1) Laser Power Setting screen
3895
Laser power setting
Laser power adjust Allows entry of the target laser power used for channel
Laser power confirm calibration at each resolution.
Reference laser power Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Temperature setting key brings up the Resolution Selec-
tion screen.
ESC OK NEXT
Select a resolution and then press the OK
key.
The Data Input screen appears.
Input the target laser power for channel calibra-

tion and the power output percentage at each
specified measurement point.
displayed for PTR4100. Lpw value
1200dpi : 240mw
2000dpi : 270mw
2400dpi : 240mw
4000dpi : 270mw
2438dpi : 240mw
2540dpi : 230mw
Ip1 value
90%(Fixed and applied to all resolutions.)
Ip2 value
Ip3 value

data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
2) Laser Power Adjustment screen
3895
Laser power setting
Laser power adjust Allows precise adjustment of the power of each LD

Laser power confirm channel at each resolution.
Temperature setting
tion screen.
ESC OK NEXT
key.
The Data Input screen appears.

All the parameter setting values in this screen are

fixed. Therefore, be sure to never modify any of
them.
A: 1.00
B: 0

for PTR4100.
Allow you to save the new data.

data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
3) Laser Power Confirmation screen
3895
Laser power setting
Laser power adjust Allows the checking of the power output of LD with
Laser power confirm the value set in the Ip1, Ip2, and Ip3 fields in the Laser
Reference laser power Power setting screen at each resolution.
Temperature setting
ESC OK NEXT
tion screen.
key.
The Data confirmation screen appears.
Iop: [mA] (Allowable range: 0 to 2000)

Electric current required to obtain a light inten-
sity of Lpw (target laser power used for channel
3921 calibration)
CLR
Pw1 : Power measured when an LD is lit using the
Iop Pw1 Pw2 Pw3 7 8 9
[mA] [mw] [mw] [mw] electrical current value “lop” × “lp1”.
ch.0 836 244 194 102 4 5 6
ch.1 827 237 193 105 Pw2 : Power measured when an LD is lit using the
ch.2 797 239 186 103 1 2 3
ch.3 788 239 185 102
electrical current value “lop” × “lp2”.
0 . Pw3 : Power measured when an LD is lit using the
ESC OK ENT electrical current value “lop” × “lp3”.
for PTR4100.
Although it is possible to change the data settings
for each LD channel in this screen, modifying any
of them could adversely affect the resulting beam
balance of the recording head.
Therefore, never change the data setting in this
screen.

data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
4) Reference Laser Power Setting screen
3895
Laser power setting Reference laser power
Laser power adjust Allows the checking and entry of the rated output cur-
Laser power confirm rent (Iopd) of the LD channels at each resolution.
Reference laser power Pressing OK key after selecting the
Temperature setting key brings up the screen in which
Reference laser power
you can input parameter settings.

ESC OK NEXT
Select the resolution and press the OK key.

The screen in which you can input parameter
settings is displayed.

3921
CLR lopd : (Allowable range : 0 to 2000)
Iop Pw1 Pw2 Pw3 7 8 9
Maximum rated current for each LD chan-
[mA] [mw] [mw] [mw]
ch.0 836 244 194 102 nel
4 5 6
105
ch.1 827 237 193
lmd : Fixed to 0.00. (NEVER change this set-
ch.2 797 239 186 103 1 2 3
ch.3 788 239 185 102 ting.)
0 .
lthd : Fixed to 120. (NEVER change this set-
ESC OK ENT
ting.)
for PTR4100.

data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
5) Temperature Setting screen
3895
Laser power setting
Laser power adjust Allows entry of the parameter for the temperature in
Laser power confirm the RH unit.
Temperature setting
key brings up the Temperature Set-
ting screen in which you can input parameter settings.
ESC OK NEXT
All the values appearing in this screen are fixed

values. NEVER modify any of them.
Temperature:
The control temperature of the Peltier element
has been set.
Alarm level :
The temperatures at which an error will occur
during temperature checks (of the following
items) have been set.
LD : Temperature of the laser diodes.
Fin : Temperature of the Peltier element’s cooling
fan.
Env. : Temperature of the periphery of the RH unit.

data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
6) Laser Illumination Time screen
3896
Laser running time
Writing time clear Displays or clears the cumulative laser illumination

Board costant setting time.
Auto calibration Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Set temp. warning
key brings up the Laser Illumina-
tion Time Display/Clear screen.
ESC OK NEXT

3950
[Hour]
0. 123 8. 123 16. 123 24. 123
1. 123 9. 123 17. 123 25. 123 Displays the screen in which you can clear the
2. 123 10. 123 18. 123 26. 123
3. 123 11. 123 19. 123 27. 123 laser illumination time.
4. 123 12. 123 20. 123 28. 123
5. 123 13. 123 21. 123 29. 123
6. 123 14. 123 22. 123 30. 123
7. 123 15. 123 23. 123 31. 123
ESC SAVE CLEAR

for PTR4100.
3951
CLR
Input the number of the ID channel whose illu-
mination time you want to clear, and then press
7 8 9
LD No. (0-31 32 : ALL) the ENT key.
4 5 6
32
1 2 3 0-31 : Clears the laser illumination time for only the
0 . selected LD channel.
ESC START ENT 32 : Clears the laser illumination time for all the LD
channels.
Then, press the key. The Laser Illumina-

tion Time Clear screen appears.
Pressing the OK key clears the specified la-

ser illumination time.
The Laser Illumination Time Display/Clear

screen reappears.

D.Operation panel
7) EEPROM Write Count Clear screen
3896
Laser running time
Writing time clear Displays or clears the number of times that the laser
Board costant setting illumination time data has been written to the
Auto calibration EEPROM.
Set temp. warning (The number of times that the laser illumination time
has been written to the EEPROM, equivalent to the
ESC OK NEXT
image exposure count, is displayed.)
key brings up the EEPROM Write
Count Clear screen.
Brings up the screen in which you can clear the

EEPROM write count.
Pressing the OK key clears the EEPROM
write count. On command completion, the up-
per layer menu screen reappears.

D.Operation panel
8) Recording Head Board Parameter Input screen
3896
Laser running time
Writing time clear Allows entry of parameters that must be set for an in-
Board costant setting dividual board when it is replaced.
Auto calibration
Set temp. warning
key brings up the Recording Head
Board Parameter Input screen.
ESC OK NEXT

Parameters that are set in this menu are unique
values for each CPU and driver board of the re-
cording head.
Always set these parameter values whenever re-
placing these boards.
3970
CPU Board Parameters of CPU board for recording head
Temparature sensor
CLR
Tm1 Tm2
Temperature sensor
7 8 9
50C 19.4 30.0 50C : Corrects the input/output differences oc-
100C 30.2 59.5
4 5 6
Dew condensation sensor curring in the board’s circuitry when re-
R1 10 R2 101 1 2 3
Calibration sensor
ceiving input from the temperature sen-
0 . -
Cal1 488 Cal2 3965 sors provided for the LD base and ma-
ESC OK ENT
chine interior.
Tm1: 20ºC
Tm2: 30ºC
100C : Corrects the input/output differences oc-
curring in the board’s circuitry when re-
ceiving input from the temperature sen-
sors provided for the Peltier fan.
Tm1: 30ºC
Tm2: 60ºC
Dew condensation sensor
Corrects the input/output differences oc-
ceiving input from the dew condensation
sensors.
R1: 10 kW
R2: 100 kW

D.Operation panel
3971
CLR
Calibration sensor
Corrects the input/output differences oc-
Cal. Sensor Gain
7 8 9
7759 4 5 6
ceiving input from calibration sensors.
1 2 3
Cal1: 500 mV
0 .
Cal2: 4000 mV
ESC OK ENT
Cal. Sensor Gain
Displays the Gain value attached to the
calibration sensor board.
3972 Driver Board 1

CLR
Parameters of driver board for recording head
Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch.26 235 949 Im1, Im2
7 8 9
ch.19 267 966
ch.12 265 993 Corrects the input/output differences occurring
ch. 5 242 969
4 5 6
ch. 6 251 982 in the driver board’s circuitry when outputting
ch.13 261 994 1 2 3
ch.20 242 966 current to run the LD.
ch.27 251 970 0 .
ESC OK ENT
3973 Driver Board 2

CLR
Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch.28 248 969 7 8 9
ch.21 264 986
ch.14 235 955
ch. 7 246 970
4 5 6
ch. 0 258 972
ch.15 251 971 1 2 3
ch.22 238 971
ch.29 256 973 0 .
ESC OK ENT
3974 Driver Board 3

CLR
Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch. 8 243 960 7 8 9
ch. 1 239 957
ch.30 251 974
ch.23 263 988
4 5 6
ch.16 237 958
ch. 9 262 979 1 2 3
ch. 2 254 977
ch.31 272 1001 0 .
ESC OK ENT
3975 Driver Board 4

CLR
Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch.24 254 968 7 8 9
ch.17 249 971
ch.10 243 966
ch. 3 254 967
4 5 6
ch. 4 258 978
ch.11 257 958 1 2 3
ch.18 249 975
ch.25 258 968 0 .
ESC SAVE ENT

for PTR4100.

D.Operation panel
data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
9) Auto Calibration setting screen
3896
Laser running time
Writing time clear Allows you to set the time for auto calibration and the
Board costant setting temperature at which an error warning will occur.
Auto calibration Pressing OK key after selecting the
Set temp. warning
key brings up the setting screen for
auto calibration time and the error warning levels.
ESC OK NEXT
Returns you to the upper level Menu screen.
3980 Meas. thd (%) (Allowable range: 0 to 9999)

CLR
Auto calibration
Default setting value is 2405.
7 8 9
Meas. thd(%) 2405 Former two digits
Cal. period (Hour) 10 4 5 6
Sets the number of plates to process before
Iopd-Iop 50 1 2 3
Cal. low temp 16
the light intensity is measured.
0 . Default setting value is 24 plates.
ESC OK ENT
Latter two digits
Sets the allowable range in % for the mea-
sured value of light intensity. If the mea-
sured value falls out of this range, a calibra-
tion is performed.
Default setting value is 5%.
Cal. period (Hour) (Allowable range: -60 to 999)
Once the exposure is performed for the period
specified in this parameter, a calibration is auto-
matically performed. A negative value indicates
minutes while a positive value indicates hours.
When “0” is set here, calibration is not per-
formed. When “-1”, “-2”, or “-3” is set here, cali-
bration is executed before each time an exposure
is performed. Default setting value is 10 hours.
Iopd - Iop (Allowable range: 0 to 100)
A warning message appears on screen when the
value obtained by calculating the following for-
mula is smaller than the value that was specified
in this parameter when performing the calibra-
tion.
Iopd - Iop
Default setting value is 50 mA.

D.Operation panel
Cal. low temp (Allowable range: 0 to 300)
The calibration is prohibited when the tempera-
ture for an LD block is lower than the tempera-
ture specified in this parameter.
Default setting value is 16 °C.

data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
Auto calibration
The following describes the detailed operations of the items that are
shown in the tables.
Light intensity measurement:

Measures light intensity of all channels. If the measured value deviates
from the target light intensity, it performs a calibration of the channel.
Laser calibration:
Changes the electric current supplied to channels to match the light inten-
sity of the channels with the target light intensity.
Panel message displayed

Calibration condi- Channel to be
Operations when performing calibration
tions calibrated
xx plates ago.
After PT-R8600 Light intensity When light inten- All channels Since the light intensity of la-
power is turned ON measurement sity for any channel ser diodes is detected as hav-
and before the first falls out of range of ing deviated more than the
plate exposure the target value ± permitted range from the
5% specified value, the equip-
ment executes the calibration.
After exposure of Light intensity When light inten- All channels xx plates ago.
24th plate and be- measurement sity for any channel Since the light intensity of la-
fore exposure of the falls out of range of ser diodes is detected as hav-
next plate the target value ± ing deviated more than the
5% permitted range from the
specified value, the equip-
ment executes the calibration.
After 10 hours of Laser calibra- All channels No message displayed
exposure time has tion
elapsed and before –
exposure of the
next plate
When the resolution Laser calibra- All channels No message displayed
has been changed tion
(when calibration
has been performed
–
with another reso-
lution before the
present resolution
was changed)

D.Operation panel
10) Temperature Warning and Error Level Setting screen
3896
Laser running time
Writing time clear Allows setting of the temperature warnings and error
Board costant setting levels.
Auto calibration Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Set temp. warning
key brings up the screen in which
you can set the temperature warnings and error levels.
ESC OK NEXT

4140
CLR
Set temp. 2
(35) 35 7 8 9 Do not change the parameters of (##) displayed

(28) 28
(22) 22 4 5 6 in this screen. These parameters are used when
(16) 16
(17) 17
1 2 3
switching error displays that are related to tem-
--- 28
Grip 150
0
peratures.
After-Grip 128 .
ESC OK ENT (35) : Temperature around recording head

(28) : Temperature in the PT-R unit
This section varies depending on
the PT-R4000II and the PT-R4300. (22) : LD base temperature
(18) : Temperature in the PT-R unit
(16) : LD base temperature
Password/--- :
PT-R4000 (II)
Password : Input the password when the 12 mm
clamps are supported.
PT-R4300
Password : Not used
Grip : (Allowable range: 110 to 999)
After-Grip : (Allowable range: 110 to 999)
Adjusts the unexposed area of leading grip mar-
gin (Grip) and trailing grip margin (After-Grip).
• When input value is 120 to 999
Sets the unexposed area. Input an appropriate
size, 1 enlarges the area by 0.1 mm.
For the PT-R4000 and PT-R4000II (up to Ver.

4.00), the lower limit value of the input range is 140.

data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
3-8-9. Drum Parameters Input screen
Allows setting of the parameters for the drum motor

driver.
key brings up the menu screen for
the drum parameter.
Allows the checking of the servo pack param-

eter value. (for PT-R4300 only)
(Refer to D-74)
Displays the status of the servo pack.

(Refer to D-75)
Initialize
Sends the default parameters of the servo pack

to the servo pack.
(Refer to D-77)
Adjusts the Offset value for the servo pack.

(Refer to D-78)
Adjusts the Gain value for the servo pack.

(Refer to D-79)

D.Operation panel
1) Servo Pack Parameter Check screen
• For PT-R4000 (II)
Not used.
Allows checking of the servo pack parameter value.
key brings up the servo pack pa-
rameter check screen.
4010 The screen shown on the left is displayed. How-

A CLR
ever, you are not allowed to change the param-
B 7 8 9
eter setting.
CN- 4 C 4 5 6
D 1 2 3
E 0 •
ESC OK F ENT
• For PT-R4300
4010
CLR
The screen shown on the left includes the parameters
Positioning Pn100 15
Pn101 25 relevant to the operation of the primary-scanning mo-
7 8 9
Pn103 3000
Pn100 300 tor.
4 5 6
Pn101 4000
Pn103 100 1 2 3
0
0 0 . Do not change these parameter values as they
ESC OK ENT are fixed.
4015
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK

D.Operation panel
• For PT-R4100
4010
CLR
The screen shown on the left includes the parameters
Positioning Pn100 50
Pn101 25 relevant to the operation of the primary-scanning mo-
7 8 9
Pn103 3000
Pn100 300
tor.
4 5 6
Pn101 4000
Pn103 100 1 2 3
0
0 0 . Do not change these parameter values as they
ESC OK ENT are fixed.
4015
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK

D.Operation panel
2) Servo Pack Status screen
Allows displaying of the status of the servo pack.

key brings up the servo pack status
screen.
4020
Sarvo pack status
850A : Current status
0804 0099 0844 0099 8500 to 8509 : History of the primary-
0808 0014 0846 0099
080A 00C1 0848 0099 scanning servo pack status
080C BC6B 084A 0099
0820 0000 084C 0099 Other than above : Unique parameter values
0822 0000 084E 0099
0840 0099 0850 0099 for the servo pack
0842 0080 0852 0099
ESC
Indication Name Description Remedy

Parameter corruption There is an error in the EEPROM data for the Replace the servo pack.
02 servo pack.
Main circuit’s detection There is an error in the detection data of the Replace the servo pack.
03 section error power circuit.
Parameter setting error The value set by the user is out of the allowa- Initialize or replace the servo pack.
04 ble range.
Compatibility error The capacity of the motor is incompatible with Replace the servo pack, the regenerative resist-
05 that of the servo pack. ance, and/or the motor.
Overcurrent or heat sink Overcurrent was detected or the heat sink of Check the wiring connection, check the periph-
10 overheat the servo pack was overheated. eral temperature, replace the servo pack, and/or
replace the motor.
Regenerative error The regenerative resistance was disconnected Replace the servo pack and/or regenerative re-
30 or the regenerative transistor was damaged. sistance.
Regenerative overload The regenerative energy exceeds the capacity Initialize the servo pack or replace the regener-
32 of the regenerative resistance. ative resistance.
Overvoltage The DC voltage of the main circuit is abnor- Check the input voltage and/or replace the ser-
40 mally high. vo pack.
Undervoltage The DC voltage of the main circuit has been Check the input voltage and/or replace the ser-
41 lowered. vo pack.
Overspeed The number or rotation of the motor is abnor- Check the wiring connection, initialize the ser-
51 mally high. vo pack, and/or replace the servo pack.
Overload (instantaneous The operation was carried out for some sec- Check the wiring connection, replace the mo-
71 maximum load) onds at a torque that exceeded the rated value tor, and/or replace the servo pack.
significantly.
Overload (continuous max- The operation was carried out continuously at Same as above
72 imum load) a torque that exceeded the rated value signifi-
cantly.
Overload of DB The rotational energy of the dynamic brake Replace the servo pack.
73 operation exceeded the capacity of the
dynamic brake resistance value.
Overload of incoming The power supply to the main circuit was Replace the servo pack.
74 resistance turned ON/OFF frequently.
Heat sink overheat The heat sink of the servo pack was Check the peripheral temperature and/or
7A overheated. replace the servo pack.
Encoder backup alarm The encoder power supplies were deactivated Initialize the servo pack, replace the motor,
81 entirely and the position data was cleared. and/or replace the servo pack.
Encoder sum check alarm There is an error in the result of the encoder Initialize the servo pack, replace the motor,
82 memory sum check. and/or replace the servo pack.
Encoder battery alarm The voltage for the backup battery of the Initialize the servo pack and/or replace the
83 absolute value encoder has been lowered. motor.
Encoder data alarm There is an error in the encoder internal data. Check the wiring connection and/or replace the
84 servo motor.
Encoder overspeed The encoder rotated at a high speed when the Check whether the recording drum is rotating
85 power was turned ON. and/or replace the servo pack.

D.Operation panel
Indication Name Description Remedy
Encoder overheat The motor temperature in the encoder is too Check the peripheral temperature, replace the
86 high. (This is detected only when the absolute servo pack, and/or replace the servo motor.
value encoder is used.)
Speed command A/D There is an error in the A/D converter for Replace the servo pack.
b1 converter error inputting the speed command.
Torque command A/D There is an error in the A/D converter for Replace the servo pack.
b2 converter error inputting the torque command.
bF System alarm A servo pack system error occurred. Replace the servo pack.
Detection of runaway The servo motor ran away. Check the wiring connection, replace the servo
C1 protection pack, and/or replace the motor.
Encoder clear error/multi- The number of rotations for the multi-turn Replace the motor and/or replace the servo
C8 turn limit setting error setting of the absolute value encoder could not pack.
be cleared or set correctly.
Encoder communication The communication between the encoder and Check the wiring connection, replace the
C9 error the servo pack cannot be established. motor, and/or replace the servo pack.
Encoder parameter error An encoder parameter has been corrupted. Replace the servo pack and/or replace the
CA
motor.
Encoder echo back error The communication with the encoder is Check the wiring connection, replace the
Cb
inaccurate. motor, and/or replace the servo pack.
Disagreement of the multi- The multi-turn limit values of the encoder and Initialize the servo pack.
CC turn limit value the servo pack disagree.
Excessive positional The positional deviation pulse exceeded the Check the wiring connection, initialize the
d0 deviation user set value. servo pack, and/or replace the servo pack.
Open-phase of the power One of the three phases for the power supply Check the wiring connection and/or replace the
F1 supply line of the main circuit is disconnected. servo pack.

D.Operation panel
3) Servo Pack Initialization screen
Initialize
Allows sending of the default parameters of the servo

pack to the servo pack.
Initialize key sends the default parameters of
the servo pack to the servo pack.
4030

Send initial parameter
Data send OK ?
ESC OK

D.Operation panel
4) Servo Pack Offset Adjustment screen
Allows adjusting of the Offset value for the servo

pack.
key brings up the servo pack Offset
value adjustment screen.
Make sure to perform this procedure when re-

placing the motor, servo pack, and PIO.

2262
It takes approximately 20 seconds until the
screen shown on the left is displayed.
After the adjustment has been completed, the
Processing Now.
Please wait ! Menu screen is displayed.

D.Operation panel
5) Servo Pack Gain Adjustment screen
Allows adjusting of the Gain value for the servo pack.

key brings up the servo pack Gain
value adjustment screen.
Be sure to check the Gain value whenever you

replace the motor, the servo pack, or the PIO
board.
When performing the above procedure, be care-

ful as the recording drum will rotate.

4050
It will take about 20 seconds before the screen on
Adjust Gain
the left appears.
Offset : A5 + Use the POI board trimmer to adjust the value

to “A0 ± 8”.
The adjustment value is common to the PT-
ESC R4000 and the PT-R4300.

D.Operation panel
3-8-10.Miscellaneous Data Setting screen
Displays miscellaneous machine information includ-

ing the manufacturing number of the machine.
key brings up the data input screen
for miscellaneous machine information including the
manufacturing number of the machine.
4100 Machine Type 2:

CLR
Mfg.no(high): 0 Default setting value: 0
Mfg.no(low):
7 8 9
600
“0”
Mfg.year: 2 4 5 6
Mfg.month: 5 Normal operation with the main unit firmware
Machine type 2: 0 1 2 3
as mentioned below.
Machine type : 2
0 .
“4”
ESC SAVE ENT
Disconnection of image signal cables (X103 -
X810) between the RB31 board and the record-
ing head is checked (refer to “3-7-9 Laser
Power Measurement and Cable Disconnection
Check screens”) only with the following firm-
ware versions.
Machine Type:
The serial numbers (s/n) mentioned below are
common to the PT-R4000 (II) and the PT-
R4300.
“0”
When the black tape for the displacement sen-
sor is not affixed to the drum. (s/n: up to 100)
“2”
When the black tape for the displacement sen-
sor is affixed to the drum. (s/n: 101 onward)
4105

Save Data ? data.
YES NO
then OK .
ESC OK

D.Operation panel
3-8-11.Recording Head Data Control screen
Allows controlling of the data for each resolution used

by the recording head.
Pressing the OKkey after selecting the
key brings up the recording head
data control screen.
Do not change any of the data.

4120
CLR
Set density
dpi ZP 7 8 9 Returns you to the upper layer Menu screen.
1200 2
2000 1 4 5 6
2400 2
4000 3 1 2 3
2438 2
2540 4 0 .
ESC SAVE ENT

data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
3-8-12.Clamp Weight Setting screen
Allows inputting of the weights of the trailing edge

clamps and the balancers.
you can input the weights of the trailing edge clamps
and the balancers.
4130 Clamper [g] (Allowable range: 0.00 to 999.99)

CLR
Input the total weight of four trailing edge
7 8 9
Clamper: 381.89[g] clamps.
4 5 6
Balancer: 165.00[g] Balancer [g] (Allowable range: 0.00 to 999.99)
1 2 3
Input the average weight of four balancers.
0 .
ESC SAVE ENT
4135
data.
Save Data ? If you want to cancel the save, press and
YES NO then OK .
ESC OK

D.Operation panel
3-8-13.Cassette Data Setting screen
Allows the setting of the plate size to be used for each

cassette zone.
you can set the plate size for each cassette zone.
4140 Paper pad suck [0.1 mm] (Allowable range: -20 to 20)
Set cassette data [mm] CLR
The interleaf pad position for securing inter-
Paper pad suk 10 7 8 9
Paper pad nip
Y size base A
190
0
leaves is corrected. The reference point is where
4 5 6
Y size base B
Y size base C
9808
478
the metal sensor of the interleaf pad turns ON.
Zone-2 min. size 460 1 2 3
Zone-3 min. size 610
Paper pad nip [0.1 mm]:
Zone-4 min. size 730 0 .
Positional relationship between the interleaf
ESC NEXT ENT
pad and the nip roller while an interleaf is dis-
charged is corrected. Set the distance from the
interleaf pad origin.
Y size base A, B, C:
The plate size in the Y (primary scanning) di-
rection is checked while the plate is transferred
from the SA-L/MA-L in reference to the value
specified for this parameter.
The values of these parameters must be set

again in case of the following conditions.
• The nip roller used at the bridge section of the
SA-L/MA-L has been replaced.
• The distance between sensor 1 and sensor 2 of
the SA-L/MA-L has been changed.
• The sensor 1 amplifier trimmer of the SA-L/MA-
L has been turned.
Zone 2 min. size:

Minimum size for zone area 2
Zone 3 min. size:
Zone 4 min. size:

D.Operation panel
4141 The screen shown on the left is displayed when the
Set cassette data [mm] CLR
motion Para1 0
firmware of the main unit is as below.
7 8 9
0
----
---- 0
4 5 6
---- 0
---- 0
---- 0 1 2 3
---- 0 PT-R4300 : Ver. 1.00 or higher
---- 0 0 .
motion para 1 (Allowable range: 0 to 9999)
ESC SAVE ENT
Sets an operation when returning the plate pad.
Each digit of the parameter value has meaning.
1 0 3 9
ABCD
A [10%] (Allowable range: 0 to 9)
Increases the amount by percentage of the first
raising of the plate pad that has picked up a
plate. During the operation, the plate pad is first
raised and lowered slightly. The “first raising”
however, refers to the operation that follows
this movement.
The plate pad is raised by 50 mm.
Example:
When “1” is set, the plate pad unit is raised
10% more than the default (50 mm).
B [10%] (Allowable range: 0 to 9)
Increases by percentage the distance that the
plate pad is lowered from the A position in or-
der to shuffle the plate.
Default distance
• When the plate size in the X direction is
less than 600 mm or the plate thickness is
0.15 mm: 10 mm
• Other cases than above: 25 mm
The distance that the plate is to be moved
varies with the plate size and thickness.
Once this value is changed, a variety of
checks are required.
We recommend that you use the default
value.
Example (plate thickness: 0.15 mm):
When “1” is set, the plate pad unit is lowered
10% more than the default (10 mm).

D.Operation panel
C [sec.] (Allowable range: 0 to 9)
Waiting time at the A position until the B opera-
tion starts.
This sets the waiting time of the plate pad at its
first raised position.
Example:
When “3” is set, the plate pad pauses for 3
seconds.
D [sec.] (Allowable range: 0 to 9)
Additional increment to the waiting time be-
tween when the shuffling operation has been
performed four times consecutively and when
the plate is raised again.
This sets the waiting time of the plate pad at the
A position after the plate has been shuffled be-
tween A and B four times.
The plate pad waits for 4 seconds.
Example:
When “9” is set, 9 seconds are added to the
default of 4 seconds.
As of April 2002, we recommend that you should
set “motion para 1” to “1039” when handling the
interleaves for the new type of “LT-2/3” plate
made by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation.

data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
3-8-14.Password Setting screen
Allows setting of the password for various special

functions.
Pressing the OKkey after selecting the
you can set the passwords to support various special
functions.
3850 Password 1 : Not used.

Password for s CLR
Password 2 : Not used.
Password 1 0 7 8 9
Password 2 0 Password 3 : Not used.
Password 3 0 4 5 6
Password 4 0 Password 4 : Not used.
Password 5 0
1 2 3
Password 6 0
0
Password 7
0
Password 8 0 • Password 6 : Not used.
ESC SAVE ENT Password 7 : Not used.

data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
3-9.Machine Option Selecting screen
3051
Input parameter
Machine option select Allows setting of the options for the PT-R.
I/O Read/Write Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Initialize data key brings up the screen in which
Special action you can set options for the PT-R.
ESC OK NEXT
4203 Network
OFF
Network Turned ON when remote maintenance is used.
LD/Stocker OFF LD/Stocker
CASSETTE OFF LD : It is possible to discharge plates to
Valid LD channel 32ch the processor (rear discharge). The
Error and Busy signals are used for
ESC SAVE communication.
Be sure to select “LD” when the
AT-T is connected.
Stocker : Although it is possible to discharge
plates to the processor (rear dis-
charge), the Error and Busy signals
are ignored.
OFF : Plates are discharged within the ma-
chine. The rear discharge is not
available.
CASSETTE
OFF : Select when the PT-R is used alone.
Single : Select when the SA-L is connected.
Multi : Select when the MA-L (three cas-
settes) is connected.
Valid LD channel
32ch : All channels are used for exposure.
0-15 : Half of the LD channels (channels 0
to 15) are used for exposure.
16-31 : Half of the LD channels (channels
16 to 31) are used for exposure.

D.Operation panel
3-10.I/O Reading and Writing screen
3051
Input parameter
Machine option select Allows reading or writing of the I/O port number.
Initialize data key brings up the port number input
Special action
screen.
ESC OK NEXT
Input the port number to read and write the pa-

rameters of the PT-R.

D.Operation panel
3-11.Initialization screens
3051
Input parameter
Machine option select Allows initializing of various data.

Initialize data key brings up the menu screens for
Special action
data initialization.
ESC OK NEXT
Initializes all data.

(Refer to D-90)
Allows selection of the brand name.

(Refer to D-91)
Only initializes the user data.

(Refer to D-90)
Initializes the Consumables Timer.

(Refer to D-92)
Initializes the preset plate data.

(Refer to D-90)

D.Operation panel
3-11-1.Data initialization
Allows initializing of all data.
Allows initializing of only the user data.
Allows initializing of the preset plate data.
When initialization is performed using any of the

above keys, all selected data will be cleared.

D.Operation panel
3-11-2.Brand Name Selection screen
Allows selecting of the brand name.

key brings up the brand name selec-
tion screen.
4401 Press the key after selecting the brand

SCREEN
name.
FUJIFILM
HEIDELBERG
HEIDELBERG(52)
ESC SAVE

data.
then OK .

D.Operation panel
3-11-3.Consumable Timer screen
Allows initializing of the Consumable Timer.

P r e s s i n g t h e OK key after selecting the
key brings up the Consumable
Timer initialization screens.
2240 Running time :

Running time
78 h Displays the total time the PT-R power is ON.
Actual running time
21 h
Actual running time :
Exposure time
Displays the cumulative amount of time that the
10 h
Plate winding cycles PT-R4300 has actually run.
215
Exposure time :
ESC SAVE NEXT
Displays the cumulative amount of time that the
exposure has been carried out.
Plate winding cycles :
Displays the number of plate loading cycles.
2241 Exterior cover filter :
Exterior cover filter
(Max:1000h) 78 h
RESET Initializes the cumulative amount of time that
Clamp cycles
RESET the exterior cover filter has been used.
786
Plate winding cycles/ye
RESET
Clamp cycles :
786
Initializes the number of cycles that the trailing
edge clamps are detached from and attached to
ESC SAVE NEXT the clamp arm.
Plate winding cycles/ye :
Initializes the number of plate loading cycles in
the past year.
2242 Punch cycles No.1-8 :
Punch cycles No.1
(Max:10000) 78
RESET Initializes the number of times that the punch
Punch cycles No.2
(Max:10000) 78
RESET operates for each punch.
Punch cycles No.3
(Max:10000) 78 RESET
Punch cycles No.4
(Max:10000) 78 RESET
ESC SAVE NEXT

D.Operation panel
2245
data.
Save Data ? If you want to cancel the save, press and
YES NO then OK .
ESC OK

D.Operation panel
3-12.Special Action screen
3051
Input parameter
Machine option select Allows executing of some special operations such as

I/O Read/Write trailing edge clamp attachment and status initializa-
Initialize data tion.
Special action Pressing the OK key after selecting the
key brings up the special action
ESC OK NEXT
screens.
Initialize
Initializes the PT-R. (Refer to D-95)
Initializes the status of the PT-R. (Refer to D-95)
Picks up the trailing edge clamps. (Refer to D-96)
NEXT NEXT
Not used. (Refer to D-97)
Attaches the trailing edge clamps to the drum.

(Refer to D-96)
4451
Front sensor offset Front sensor offset
Centering test Adjusts the positioning offsets at the Home and

Adjust Displacement sensor Away sides for the plate leading edge detection
NVRAM backup sensors automatically. (Refer to D-98)
NVRAM restore Centering test
ESC OK NEXT Allows you to perform the centering operation.

(Refer to D-99)
NEXT NEXT Adjust displacement sensor
4452
Adjusts the positioning install the displacement
Register test
sensor. (Refer to D-100)
Backs up the NVRAM data in the flash

memory. (Refer to D-101)
ESC OK NEXT
Restores the NVRAM data from the flash
memory. (Refer to D-102)
Register test
Adjusts the positioning offsets at the Home and

Away sides for the plate leading edge detection
sensors automatically. (Refer to D-103)
D.Operation panel
3-12-1.Machine Initialization screen
Initialize
Allows initializing of the PT-R.
Allows initializing of the status of the PT-R.
OK
Executes the initialization of the PT-R and of its

status. Once the initialization has been com-
pleted, the upper layer Menu screen will appear.

D.Operation panel
3-12-2.Pickup Clamp, Trailing Edge Clamp Attachment screen
Allows picking up of the trailing edge clamps.
Allows attaching of the trailing edge clamps onto the

drum.
This command should be used when the trailing edge
clamps need to be taken out from the clamp arm for
cleaning.
OK
Executes the pickup of the trailing edge clamps

or the “Put clamp on drum” operation. Once the
initialization has been completed, the upper
layer Menu screen will appear.
When a plate is discharged, secure the drum at
the position where the leading edge clamps open
and then execute “Put clamp on drum”.

D.Operation panel
3-12-3.ORG-EZ Check screen
Not used.

D.Operation panel
3-12-4.Front Sensor Offset screen
4451
Front sensor offset Front sensor offset
Centering test Adjusts the positioning offsets at Home and Away

Adjust Displacement sensor sides for the plate leading edge detection sensors auto-
NVRAM backup matically.
NVRAM restore For the adjustment method, refer to page B-60.
ESC OK NEXT
Front sensor offset key brings up the plate type screen.
1050
Press the OK key after selecting the plate type and
1 Plate 1
the screen for execution confirmation appears.
2 Plate 2
3 Plate 3
4 Plate 4
5 Plate 5
ESC OK NEXT
OK
Executes the automatic adjustment of the posi-

tioning offsets at Home and Away sides for the
plate leading edge detection sensors.
The screen during the operation is as shown on

the left.
Once the adjustment has been completed, the

Menu screen will appear.
The offset value is input in Front offset that is
included in the Set media type screen.

D.Operation panel
3-12-5.Centering Test screen
4451
Front sensor offset Centering test
Centering test Allows you to perform the centering operation.

Adjust Displacement sensor Pressing the OK key after selecting the
NVRAM backup Centering test key brings up the plate type screen.
NVRAM restore
ESC OK NEXT
1050
1 Plate 1
2 Plate 2
3 Plate 3
4 Plate 4
5 Plate 5
ESC OK NEXT
OK
Pressing the OK key after setting the plate

executes the centering operation.

the left.
4050
Once the operation has been completed, the
screen shown on the left will appear and the op-
Centering test
eration will be on standby.
Waiting
Completes the centering operation and dis-

charges the plate.
ESC

D.Operation panel
3-12-6.Adjust Displacement Sensor screen
4451
Front sensor offset Adjust displacement sensor
Centering test It is used when adjusting the position to install the dis-
Adjust Displacement sensor placement sensor.
NVRAM backup Pressing the OK key after selecting the
NVRAM restore
Adjust displacement sensor key plate type and the screen for
execution confirmation appears.
ESC OK NEXT
OK
Displays the screen for adjusting the position to

install the displacement sensor
Secure the sensor to the position at the point
that the buzzer sounds.
• Allowable adjustment range when the black
tape for the displacement sensor is not affixed
to the drum (s/n: up to 100):
D7 ± 5
• Allowable adjustment range when the black
tape for the displacement sensor is affixed to
the drum. (s/n: 101 onward)
A0 ± 5
The above-mentioned serial numbers (s/n) are s/

n of PT-R4000 (II).
4050
Float sensor offset

D4
ESC

D.Operation panel
3-12-7.NVRAM Backup screen
4451
Front sensor offset
Centering test Allows storing of the NVRAM data in the flash

Adjust Displacement sensor memory.
NVRAM restore key brings up the screen by which
you can store the NVRAM data in the flash memory.
ESC OK NEXT
OK
Executes NVRAM data storing in the flash

memory.
• Always carry out this operation whenever you
replace the RCP board.
This enables you to restore the NVRAM data.
• Before performing this operation, be sure to
turn ON the DipSW bit 2 on the RCP board.
Also be sure to return the setting to the original
state after the operation has been completed.

the left.

D.Operation panel
3-12-8.NVRAM Data Restore screen
4451
Front sensor offset
Centering test Allows restoring of data from the flash memory to the
Adjust Displacement sensor NVRAM.
NVRAM restore
key brings up the NVRAM data re-
store screen.
ESC OK NEXT
OK
Executes NVRAM data restoring to the

NVRAM from the flash memory.
• Always carry out this operation whenever you
replace the RCP board.
This enables you to restore the NVRAM data.
• Before performing this operation, be sure to
turn ON the DipSW bit 2 on the RCP board.
Also be sure to return the setting to the original
state after the operation has been completed.
Once data restoring has been complated, the

screen returns to the Menu screen.

D.Operation panel
3-12-9.Register Test screen
4452
Register test Register test
Allows you to perform the centering and punching

operations of the plate as well as to check the registra-
tion.
Register test key brings up the plate type screen.
ESC OK NEXT
1050
Place the plate that you wish to check the registration
1 Plate 1
onto the insertion table.
2 Plate 2
3 Plate 3
4 Plate 4
5 Plate 5
ESC OK NEXT
OK
Loads the plate and performs centering and

punching operations.

the left.
Once the operation has been completed, the
plate will be returned to the insertion table.

D.Operation panel
3-13.Special Action 2 screens
3052
Special action 2
Allows displaying of the maintenance jig command

screens.
key brings up the maintenance jig
command screens.
ESC OK NEXT
Initialize
Performs step-by-step initialization.

(Refer to D-105)
Tests the balancer operations.

(Refer to D-106)
NEXT NEXT Tests the mail function of the remote mainte-

nance.
(Refer to D-107)
Tests the auto loader operations.

(Refer to D-108)
Tests the plate pad unit operations.

(Refer to D-110)
Tests the interleaf pad unit operations.

(Refer to D-111)
Tests the multi auto loader operations.

(Refer to D-112)

D.Operation panel
3-13-1.Machine Initialization screen
Initialize
Allows executing of step-by-step initialization.

Initialize key brings up the machine initial-
ization screen.
4461 1:---
CLR
Initialize 1
Not used.
1:--- 7 8 9
2:Head, 3:2nd motor 2:Head
4:Trans error check 4 5 6
5:Actuator Initializes the recording head.
6:Main motor 1 2 3
7:Punch 8:Path up 3:2nd motor
9:Init. status 0 . -
Initializes the sub shaft motor and returns it to
ESC OK ENT
the origin.
4:Trans error check
Checks the transportation system errors.
5:Actuator
Initializes the transportation system actuators.
6:Main motor
Initializes the drum and then searches the bal-
ancers.
7:Punch
Initializes the punch system.
8:Path up
Raises the transportation section.
9:Init. status
Initializes the data that controls the sequence.
OK
Starts the selected initialization.
Once the initialization has been completed, the

upper layer Menu screen will appear.

D.Operation panel
3-13-2.Balancer Testing screen
Allows testing of the balancer operations.

key brings up the screen by which
you can test the balancer operations.
0 : Searches the balancers and displays their

positions.
1 to 15 : Moves the balancers to the appropriate po-
sitions depending on the plate size used in
the specified printer setting.
-1 to -15 : Displays the positions of balancers depend-
ing on the plate size used in the specified
printer setting.
OK
Starts Starts the selected initialization.

screen for balancer operations will appear.

D.Operation panel
3-13-3.Mail Testing screen
Allows testing of the mail function of the remote

maintenance.
key brings up the mail testing
screen.
4469
CLR
1 : Sends an error mail.
Mail test
1 11 : Sends a warning mail.
7 8 9
1-:Error 21 : Sends a work request mail.
11-:Warning 4 5 6
21-:Request 31 : Sends a user information mail.
31-:User Info 1 2 3
51-54:Relating light 51 to 54: Performs the pilot lamp test.
55:Dummy communi. 0 .
55 : Spare
ESC OK ENT
OK

mail testing screen will appear.

D.Operation panel
3-13-4.Auto Loader Testing screen
Allows testing of the auto loader operations.

you can carry out various auto loader tests.
4463
CLR
1:Initialize
Auto loader test 1
Executes the initialization sequence.
1:Initialize 7 8 9
2:Disch. paper 2:Disch. paper
3:Trans plate(1/2) 4 5 6
4:Cont. loader seq Executes the interleaf discharge sequence.
5:Cont. all seq 1 2 3
6:Trans plate(2/2) 3:Trans plate (1/2)
7:Cont. Multi seq 0 •
Transports a plate to the AT section.
ESC OK ENT
4:Cont. loader seq
Executes the continuous operation of the SA-L
by itself.
(For individual unit adjustment)
The system assumes that one sequence has been
completed when the AT pass sensor turns OFF
and then ON again. It then starts the next se-
quence.
5:Cont. all seq
Sequentially executes SA-L (MA-L) operation,
PT-R’s plate winding and discharge operations.
Before using this function in the MA-L, the de-

sired cassette must be transported to the loader
section beforehand using “11-13: Load cassette”
of “Multi auto loader”.
6:Trans plate (2/2)

Transports the plate at the AT section to the
transportation table of the PT-R.
7:Cont. Multi seq
Please do not use this command since it is only

used for debugging at the factory.

D.Operation panel
OK

screen for balancer operations will appear.

D.Operation panel
3-13-5.Plate Pad Unit Testing screen
Allows testing of the plate pad unit operations.

you can carry out various plate pad unit tests.
4466 1:Init
CLR
Plate pad test 1
Initializes the plate pad unit.
1:Init, 3:Separation 7 8 9
2:Down until H1 on 2:Down until H1 on
4:Move to waiting pos 4 5 6
5/6:Vacume On/Off Moves the plate pad unit until the pressure sen-
7:Zone 1 8:Zone 2 1 2 3
9:Zone 3 10:Zone4 sor shows the set value (H1).
10:Close 0 .
3:Separation
ESC OK ENT
Executes the plate separation sequence.
4:Move to waiting pos
Moves the plate pad unit to the position to
which the interleaf pad is lowered.
5/6:Vacume On/Off
Turns the vacuum pump ON or OFF.
7:Zone 1
Opens the Zone 1 valve of the plate pad.
8:Zone 2
9:Zone 3
10:Zone 4
11:Close
Closes the plate pad valves.
OK

plate pad unit testing screen will appear.

D.Operation panel
3-13-6.Interleaf Pad Unit Testing screen
Allows testing of the interleaf pad unit operations.

you can carry out various interleaf pad unit tests.
4467
CLR
1:Init
Paper pad test 1
Initializes the interleaf pad unit.
1:Init 3:Down metal 7 8 9
2:Judge 4:Suck paper 2:Judge
5:Up to nip 4 5 6
6/7:Vacume On/Off The paper pad is lowered to the paper/plate
8:Zone 1 9:Zone 2 1 2 3
10:Zone 3 11:Zone 4 judgment position and stopped.
12:Close 0 .
3:Down metal
ESC OK ENT
Moves the interleaf pad to the position where
the metal sensor turns ON
4:Suk paper
The paper suction is performed.
5:Up to nip
Moves the interleaf pad to the interleaf rollers’
nipping position.
6/7:Vacume On/Off
Turns the vacuum pump ON or OFF.
8:Zone 1
Opens the Zone 1 valve of the interleaf pad.
9:Zone 2
10:Zone 3
11:Zone 4
12:Close
Closes the interleaf pad valves.
OK

interleaf pad unit testing screen will appear.

D.Operation panel
3-13-7.Multi Auto Loader Testing screen
Allows testing of the multi auto loader operations.

you can carry out various multi auto loader tests.
4468
CLR
1:Initialize
Multi auto loader test 1
Initializes the MA-L.
1:Initialize 7 8 9
2/3:Door Unlock/lock 2/3:Door Unlock/lock
4:Unload cassette 4 5 6
11-13:Load cassette Locks or unlocks the cassette door.
20-23:Lift position 1 2 3
5:C->Lift, 6:Lift->C 4:Unload cassette
0 •
Returns the cassette tray on the lift side to its
ESC OK ENT
original position.
11-13:Load cassette
11: Moves the 1st slot cassette tray to the lift side.
12: Moves the 2nd slot cassette tray to the lift side.
13: Moves the 3rd slot cassette tray to the lift side.
The cassette tray stands by at the loading posi-
tion height on the lift side.
20-23:Lift positioning
20: Moves the lift to the loading position
height.
21: Moves the lift to the 1st slot cassette height.
22: Moves the lift to the 2nd slot cassette
height.
23: Moves the lift to the 3rd slot cassette height.
5:C->Lift
Moves the cassette tray from the cassette stor-
ing side to the lift side.
6:Lift->C
Moves the cassette tray from the lift side to the
cassette storing side.
OK

multi auto loader testing screen will appear.

E. Reference
E.Reference PT-R4300/4100 (Ver1.0X)
1.Sequence explanations (PT-R4300/4100)
1-1.Initialization sequence (PT-R4300)
T h e p ro c e ss in g b e fo re
in itia liz in g InitS e q1
T h e p ro c e s s in g o f
S e rv o P a c k a la rm E rro r
p la te o n tra n s p a s s
c h e c k in g
in itia liz in g
It re s e ts S e rv o p a c k , if it
o c c u r s o v e r lo a d a la rm
a c u tu a te rs in itia liz in g
It re tu rn s to th e
A fte r to m a k e in itia liz in g
g e n e ra lly m o d e , if No
is o n c e e n d e d , it is n 't O ff
lo o p g a in o f s p e e d
a p o w e r s u p p ly ?
a n d in te g ra tio n
c o n s ta n t a re a h ig h - Yes
s p e e d tu rn m o d e .
S e rv o re s e t
S V C in itia liz in g
S e rv ic e c a ll e rro r B Yes
o c c u rs
No It c h e c k s w h e th e r o r
Ok
n o t p la te is le ft in th e
It w a its 5 s e c o n d , a fte r it
e q u ip m e n t.
s e rv o O N .
It c h e c k s lo a d a n d u n lo a d
c o n d itio n w h ic h is
m e m o riz e d in N v R a m Yes
E q u a l to o r m o re th a n 5
d e v ia tio n c o u n te rs ?
Is it in th e c la m p in g o n ly Yes No A d ju s tm e n t o f
w ith le a d in g c la m p s ? a u to m a tic a lly O ffs e t
z e ro
No
InitS e q1
D ru m : It d e c id e s o n th e E rro r E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
T h e s ta te a t w h ic h it
Yes p o s itio n o f S q u e e z e E x 1 6 7 ,E x 1 6 e
re m o v e s ta il c la m p s b y
d is c h a rg in g .
No It d e c id e s o n th e
InitS e q2 ta rg e t p o s itio n o f E rro r E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 6 7
s q u e e z e if n o t b e in g
E x 1 6 e ,E x 1 7 5
w ith in th e + -1 1 p u ls e
a n d it re trie s 5 tim e s .
T h e s ta te a t w h ic h p la te
is w ra p p e d a ro u n d d ru m Yes
a n d ta il c la m p s p u t o n
E rro r E x 1 0 7 ,E x 1 c 6
drum . It lo w e rs s q u e e z e .
E x1c7
No
InitS e q3
E rro r
D ru m : It d e c id e s o n th e E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
T h e s ta te a t w h ic h p la te p o s itio n o f ta il c la m p s . E x 1 6 6 ,E x 1 6 d
is tra n s la te d fro m th e Yes
s u p p ly s id e b y th e
w in d in g ? It d e c id e s o n th e
ta rg e t p o s itio n o f ta il E rro r
No E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 6 6
c la m p if n o t b e in g
InitS e q4 E x 1 6 d ,E x 1 7 4
w ith in th e + -2 p u ls e
a n d it re trie s 5 tim e s .
Yes
P ro c e s s in g o f p u n c h in g E rro r
It c lo s e s s h u tte r Ex111
No
InitS e q5
E rro r E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c 2 ,E x 1 c 3
It lo w e rs tra n s p a th
E x 1 c 4 ,E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b
T o m a in p ro c e s s in g o f
It re tu rn s p la te to th e
in itia liz in g
d is c h a rg e s id e tra n s
pass
End
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL E-1

PT-R4300/4100 (Ver1.0X) E.Reference
T he processin g o f actuaters
InitSeq2 initializing
Do the tail clam ps m atch a Yes

It closes shutter
clam p arm ?
No C lamp bolts in the middle

p o siti o n Erro r
It raises clam p arm E x 1 0 5 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
Erro r Erro r
It lo wers clam p arm E x 1 0 6 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7 It closes th leading clam p s E x 1 0 e,E x 1 c 0 ,E x 1 c 1
T o the d ru m lo ck p osition Erro r It returns the lock p in of Erro r

Ex10a E x1 9b,E x19 c
of th e clam p bo lt drum
Erro r
It raises clam p arm E x 1 0 5 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7 Servo OFF
T he processing o f Erro r
It raises niproller Ex101
actuaters initializing
It m em orizes th at plate is
winded onto the drum in End
Nv Ram
End
InitSeq3
T he processing o f
End
InitSeq4
E rro r r eco v e ry 4
End
InitSeq5
The punch
m echanizm is
initialized.
End
E-2 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Initialization sequence (PT-R4100)
The processing before

initializing InitSeq1
Error The processing of plate

Servo Pack alarm checking on trans pass
initializing
It resets Servo pack, if it
occur sover load alarm
The processing of
acutuaters initializing
It returns to the After to make initializing is

generally mode, if loop No
once ended, it isn't Off a
gain of speed and power supply?
integration constant are
a high-speed turn Yes
mode.
The processing of SVC
Servo reset
Yes initializing
Service call error B occurs
No It checks whether or
Ok
not plate is left in the
equipment. It waits 5second, after it
servo ON.
It checks load and unload
condition which is
memorized in NvRam Equal to or more than 5 Yes
deviation counters?
Is it in the clamping only Yes No Adjustment of

with leading clamps? automatically Offset
zero
No
InitSeq1
Drum : It decides on the Error Ex11b,Ex13b

The state at which it position of Squeeze Ex167,Ex16e
Yes
removes tail clamps by
discharging.
No It decides on the target

InitSeq2 position of squeeze if Error Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex167
not being within the +-
Ex16e,Ex175
11pulse and it retries
5times.
The state at which plate is Yes
wrapped around drum and
tail clamps put on drum. Error Ex107,Ex1c6
It lowers squeeze.
Ex1c7
No
InitSeq3
Drum : It decides on the Error Ex11b,Ex13b

position of tail clamps. Ex166,Ex16d
The state at which plate is Yes
translated from the supply
side by the winding? It decides on the target
position of tail clamp if Error
No Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex166
InitSeq4 not being within the +-
Ex16d,Ex174
5times.
Yes
Processing of punching Error
It closes shutter Ex111
No
InitSeq5
Error Ex104,Ex1c2,Ex1c3
It lowers trans path
Ex1c4,Ex1c5,Ex1cb
To main processing of
initializing It returns plate to the
discharge side trans
pass
END

The processing of actuaters

Do the tail clamps match a Yes

It closes shutter
clamp arm?
No Clamp bolts in the middle

position Error
It raises clamp arm Ex105,Ex1c6,Ex1c7
Error Error
It lowers clamp arm Ex106,Ex1c6,Ex1c7 It closes th leading clamps Ex10e,Ex1c0,Ex1c1
To the drum lock position Error It returns the lock pin of Error
Ex10a Ex19b,Ex19c
of the clamp bolt drum
Error
It raises clamp arm Ex105,Ex1c6,Ex1c7 Servo OFF
The processing of Error

It memorizes that plate is

NvRam
End
InitSeq3
The processing of
End
InitSeq4
Error recovery 1
End
InitSeq5
The punch mechanizm

is initialized.
Error recovery 5
End

1-2.Main processing of initializing (PT-R4300/4100)
Start
Parallel processing
C hecking of supply door Erro r T he reg istered p unch

Ex189
is open/close are Idled 5times.
No
T h e 2 n d e rro r?
Interlock checking o f Erro r
Ex14c
fra m e co v er No Yes
End?
Yes E x 1 3 1 ,E x 1 3 2 ,E x 1 3 3
B lower of drum resets
E x 1 3 4 ,E x 1 3 5 ,E x 1 3 6
af ter th a t O N
It returns the side Erro r

T he processing o f Erro r align m ent m echan ism to E x1 2d,E x13 f
plate on trans p ass th e sta rti n g p o in t .
initializing
B lower of drum is OFF

End
After to m ak e initializing
Yes
is once ended, it isn't Off
a power supply?
No
T he processing o f
Servo reset
SVC Initializing
Servo ON , it waits
5seconds
It adjusts an offset
autom atic zero if the
Erro r
deviatio n cou nter is
equal to o r m ore th an
5.
Yes
Is plate wrapped on drum ?
No Drum : It decides on tail

clam p position(Nv R am A
m em orized) in th e
Do the tail clam ps m atch Erro r p o siti o n
Ex155
a clam p arm ?
Drum : It decides on Erro r E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
It d ecides o n the
leading clamp position in E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c
target positio n of tail
Erro r the p osition .
clam p if n ot b ein g
B alancer search
within the + -2pulse
and it retries 5times. It d ecides o n the
B lower of drum is OFF target positio n of
Erro r
leading clam p if not E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 165
Servo OFF It low ers tran s path being within the +- E x 1 6 c,E x 1 7 3
E x 1 2 8 ,E x 1 5 1 ,E x 1 9 f 5times.
E x 1 a0 ,E x 1 a1 ,E x 1 a2 It r etu r n s p l ate t o th e
discharge side of trans Sensor detected head is Erro r
T he B low er o peratio n Erro r pass E x 1 7 c,E x 1 7 f
ON
checking

It raises trans path Servo OFF
Ex18c Sensor detected head is

Ex14f
OF F
Drum vaccum pressure Erro r
checking
Is a pu nch o f o ptio n Yes
B lower of drum is OFF set t o O N ?
B lower of drum is Off No

P H 6 1 H /A ,P H 6 2 Erro r
E x1 7b,E x17 d,E x 17e
Sensor checking
Ex186
Sensor detected head is
ON
End
It waits 1seco nd

1-3.Processing of trans pass initializing (PT-R4300/4100)
Start
B o th P H 5 4 an d P H 7 0 Yes
detect plate?
No No Is trans path at the

high est positio n?
Yes
C lutch of supply side is OFF

C lutch of discharge side is ON
T ran s m o to r: It tra n sf ers

66 0m m at speed o f
40 m m /s
Ex603
Is th ere plate o n sen sor of Yes

PH54 only?
No C lutch of supply side is OFF

C lutch of discharge side is ON
T ran s m o to r: I t re tu rn
Erro r
plate u ntil P H5 4's O FF
at 40 m m /s.
T ran s m o to r is stop ped.
Ex145
Isn't there plate o n senso r Yes

of PH 59?
No
E x 1 ce
Ex14f

Ex1b7
PH70 only?
No

Ex14f
PH59?
No
Do sen sor o f PH 50 detect Yes

p la te?
No Erro r
It closes shu tter
Erro r
End It lo wers niproller. Ex102
Ex150
Erro r
It op ens shu tter. Ex110
C lutch of supply side is ON

C lutch of discharge side is OFF
T ran s m o t o r: It ret u rn s p la te
until PH50's OFF at 50mm /s.
B ut, it stops even if it doesn't
OFF and it passes in the
(194 .5/50 )sec.
Erro r
It closes shutter. Ex111
Erro r
T ran s m o to r: It tra n sf ers

31 .5m m at sp eed of
40 m m /s
Ex150

1-4.Processing of punch sequence (PT-R4300/4100)

Start B
D o it d e te ct an in terlea f Yes
Ex1c8
p a p e r?
Error
It lo w e rs n ip ro ller
No
It lo w ers tra n s p ath a t th e Error E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c 2 ,E x 1 c 3 *1

p u n ch p o sitio n . E x 1 c 4 , E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b
Sid e alig nm ent Error Ex102

starting p oin t re tu rn
D o e s it d ete ct a n in te rle af Yes
It ra ises tra n s p ath p a p e r?
No
*1
E x 1 2 d ,E x 13 f
It occurs an erro r w ithin Yes Ex1c8

the id ling of pu nch at
p late b efo re .
Error
Error It d rive s th e se t p u n c h
No Idling o f pun ch
*1
It ra ises tra n s p ath
Error
It lo w e rs n ip ro ller
E x 1 3 1 ,E x 1 3 2 ,E x 1 3 3
E x 1 3 1 ,E x 1 3 2 ,E x 1 3 3 E x 1 3 4 ,E x 1 3 5 ,E x 1 3 6
E x 1 3 4 ,E x 1 3 5 ,E x 1 3 6
It ra ises tra n s p ath
P arallel p ro ce ssin g
C lu tch of su pply side is O N
C lu tch of discharge side is O FF
Ex102
Sid e alig nm ent Error It re tu rn b a ck p late to Error
Error starting p oin t re tu rn trans pass
It o p e n s sh u tter
Isn 't it p u n c h's O N a n d Yes
retryin g ?
It ra ises tra n s p ath *1
No Error
It strik es a set p u n ch
R e t ry
It ra is es n ip ro ller E x 1 2 d ,E x 13 f It clo se s sh u tte r.
Ex110 It raise s n ip ro lle r.
T ra n s m o to r: It tra n s T im e o u t
p late u n til O N o f P H 62
se ns or a t 7 0 m m /s Ex130
No Is th e re p la te o n se n so r o f
PH62? Error
It clo se s sh u tte r Ex111
Yes
It raise s n ip ro ller an d Error Is it p o ssib le to h a v e Yes

it tran s p la te to se ns e w ith draw n p late b y Ex1ca
ON of PH62.
retrin g?
Error
It lo w e rs n ip ro ller Ex102 No
Error D o e s it d ete ct a n in te rle af Yes

It ra is es n ip ro ller
p a p e r?
Error
It o p e n s sh u tter Ex110
No
E rro r r e c o v e ry 1 It ra ises tra n s p ath
T ran s m o to r: if it's
0 .3 m m o f pla te th ick n e ss,
End
it tran s b y in term issio n T ra n s m o to r : It re t u r n s T im e o u t
m al at 5 0 m m /s. If n o t it p late u n til P H 5 0 's O F F a t
trans by continuo usly at Ex101 5 0 m m /s It ra is es n ip ro ller
5 0 m m /s
No Is th e re p la te o n se n so r o f
It adju sts side alig nm ent PH50?
Error
ac co rd in g to th e p la te Ex1c8
size. Yes
It clo se s sh u tte r
It waits 0.5 second .
Sid e alig nm ent m oto r: Error

It m o v e 3 m m in re v e rs e
at s pe ed of 5 m m /s It trans plate to shu tter Error
and it raises trans path E x 1 0 1 ,E x 1 0 3
at th e sa m e tim e . Ex111
T h e w a itn g tim e
ac co rd in g to p late
Ex12f
Sid e alig nm ent m oto r:

Error
It m o v e 3 m m a t s p e e d o f
5 m m /s
A fter 0 .5 se c, tran s m o to r *1
is sto pped .
Sid e alig nm ent
It w aits 2s ec on d
starting p oin t re tu rn
*1
E rro r r e c o v e ry 1
B
E x 1 2 d ,E x 1 5 6 ,E x 1 5 7
E x 1 5 8 ,E x 1 c 9

1-5.Processing of winding sequence (PT-R4300)
Start
C
Error Error
D o e s it d e tec t a lea f p a p er? Ex1c8 It closes lead ing clam p s
T ra n s m o t o r : s to p
Error It o p en lea d in g c lam p s
E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c 2 ,E x 1 c 3 T ra n s m o t o r : s to p
It lo w ers tra n s p ath .
E x 1 c 4 , E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b C lutch of supply sid e is O ff.
D rum : It decides o n the Error

leadin g clam p p osition S erv o O N Ex10e,Ex1c0
Ex1c1
W hen the SV C status
do esn't R eady, it
adju sts and it retries Yes It retu rn s th e b oth side Error
E x 1 9 b ,E x 19 c
an au to m atic o ffset dru m lo cking pin .
ze ro if n ev e r retry in g
It adjusts an o ffset P arallel p ro ce ssin g
au to m atic zero if th e No
deviation coun ter is equal
to o r m o re th a n 5 . D rum : It decides o n the Error It lo wers squeeze roller
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c po sition of squeeze to a ha lf
It decid es on target
leadin g clam p in the Error E x 1 1 b ,E x 13 b ,E x 1 6 5 It de cid e s o n th e
p o sitio n if n ot b ein g Ex16c,Ex173 target squeeze Error
w ithin + -3and it retries. p o sitio n if n ot b ein g
w ithin+ -11p ulse an d it
retrie s
Is th ere p late in th e su p p ly No E rro r r e c o v e ry 2

Ex810
side?
L ead ing edg e detection
Yes
se nso r O N
E x 1 1 b ,E x 13 b ,E x 1 6 7
D o e s it d ete ct a n in terlea f Yes Ex16e,Ex175
Ex1c8
p a p e r?
Error
No It low ers sq ueeze roller.
A re th ere ta il clam p s in th e No L ead ing edg e detection

E x1b0
cla m p arm ? se nso r O F F
B low er of d rum is O N It raises squeeze roller
It puts out the d rum Error

E x 1 9 9 ,E x 1 9 a E rro r r e c o v e ry 2
lock ing p in
E x 1 0 7 ,E x 1 c 6 ,E x 1 c
Servo O FF
7
Error E x 1 0 f ,E x 1 c 0
It op e n s lea d in g c lam p s
Ex1c1 Error Error Error
D isp lac em e n t se n so r It d e cid es o n th e p os itio n Error M id dle po sition o f clam p T he leading edg e
checkin g. o f ta il clam p o f d ru m . bo lt p o sitio n c h ec k ing
Error
It lo w e rs n ipro ller Ex102
R ec ov e ry o f th e siz e It m a ke s a c lam p b o lt a E rro r r e c o v e ry 4
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 1 c ,E x 1 2 7
E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 5 d e rr o r dru m unlo cking position .
C lutch of su pply side is O N

C lutch of discharge sid e is O FF E x 1 b 9 ,E x 1 3 9
E x 1 1 2 ,E x 1 1 5 ,E x 1 1 b E rro r r e c o v e ry 4
E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 6 6 ,E x 1 6 d
Error
It o p e ns sh u tter Ex110
Ex10a
T ra n s m o t o r: It tra n s p l a te
(1 30 + A )m m a t sp ee d 1 0 5 m m /s.
A is the revision v alue w hich is Error
T h e v ac cu m p ressu re
p ec u lia r to th e m a ch in e.
ch e ck in g
Error E rro r r e c o v e ry 4
It ra ise s n ipro ller
T ran s m o to r : d riv in g o f Ex186
sp eed 5 0m m /s
It d etec ted a n in te rle af Yes

Ex101
p a p e r?
D o e s it d ete ct a n in terlea f Yes
No
p a p e r? E rro r r e c o v e ry 4
No
T ra n s m o to r : s to p
It w aits 2secon ds Ex1c8

It de cid e s o n th e
E rro r r e c o v e ry 1 targ et tail cla m p Error
p o sitio n if n ot b ein g
w ithin +-3 pulse and it
C retrie s
Ex1c8
D E x 1 1 b ,E x 13 b ,E x 1 6 6
E x 1 6 d ,E x 1 7 4

Erro r
It lo wers clam p arm
It m akes a clam p bolt a

drum unlocking position.
It closes shutter
It raises a clam p arm in th e

middle position.
E x 1 0 6 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
It m ak es a clam p b olt the

po sition of th e drum Erro r
locking.


middle position.
Ex10a

It m ak es a clam p b olt the Erro r
po sition of th e drum
locking.
No
M o re th an retry tw o tim es?
Yes


middle position.
Ex1b2
It m em orizes th e d ru m
present p ositio n as th e
po sition w hich tail clam ps
were p ut on.
Erro r
Is tail clam ps locked up the Erro r

Ex11d
drum?
T he blow er o peratio n Erro r

Ex18c
checking
End

Processing of winding sequence (PT-R4100)
Start
C
Parallel processing
Error Error
Does it detect a leaf paper? Ex1c8 It closes leading clamps
Trans motor : stop

Error It open leading clamps
Ex104,Ex1c2,Ex1c3 Trans motor : stop
It lowers trans path.
Ex1c4,Ex1c5,Ex1cb Clutch of supply side is Off.
Error recovery 1
Drum: It decides on the Error

leading clamp position Servo ON Ex10e,Ex1c0
Ex1c1
When the SVC status
doesn't Ready, it
adjusts and it retries an Yes It returns the both side drum Error
Ex19b,Ex19c
automatic offset zero if locking pin.
never retrying
It adjusts an offset Parallel processing
automatic zero if the No
deviation counter is equal to
or more than 5. Ex11b,Ex13b Drum: It decides on the Error It lowers squeeze roller
Ex165,Ex16c position of squeeze to a half
It decides on target leading

clamp in the position if not Error Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex165 It decides on the target
being within +-3and it Ex16c,Ex173 squeeze position if not Error
retries. being within+-11pulse
and it retries
Is there plate in the supply No Error recovery 2

Ex810
side?
Yes Leading edge detection
sensor ON
Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex167
Does it detect an interleaf Yes Ex16e,Ex175
Ex1c8
paper?
Error
No It lowers squeeze roller.
Are there tail clamps in the No Leading edge detection

Ex1b0
clamp arm? sensor OFF
Blower of drum is ON It raises squeeze roller
It puts out the drum locking Error

Ex199,Ex19a Error recovery 2
pin
Servo OFF Ex107,Ex1c6,Ex1c7
Parallel processing
Error Ex10f,Ex1c0
It opens leading clamps
Ex1c1 Displacement sensor Error It decides on the position of Error Middle position of clamp Error The leading edge Error
checking. tail clamp of drum. bolt position checking
Error
It lowers niproller Ex102
Recovery of the size It makes a clamp bolt a drum Error recovery 4
Ex11b,Ex11c,Ex127
Ex13b,Ex15d error unlocking position.
Clutch of supply side is ON

Clutch of discharge side is OFF Ex1b9,Ex139
Ex112,Ex115,Ex11b Error recovery 4
Ex13b,Ex166,Ex16d
Error
It opens shutter Ex110
Ex10a
Trans motor: It trans plate

(130+A)mm at speed 105mm/s.
A is the revision value which is Error
The vaccum pressure
peculiar to the machine.
checking
Error Error recovery 4

It raises niproller
Error recovery 1
Trans motor : driving of Ex186
speed 50mm/s
It detected an interleaf Yes

Ex101
paper?
Does it detect an interleaf Yes
No
paper? Error recovery 4
No
Trans motor : stop
It waits 2seconds Ex1c8
Error recovery 1 It decides on the target

tail clamp position if Error
not being within +-
C 3pulse and it retries
Error recovery 4
Ex1c8
D Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex166
Ex16d,Ex174

Error
It lowers clamp arm
It makes a clamp bolt a drum

unlocking position.
It closes shutter
It raises a clamp arm in the

middle position.
Error recovery 4
Ex106,Ex1c6,Ex1c7
It makes a clamp bolt the Error

position of the drum locking.

unlocking position.

middle position.
Error recovery 4
Ex10a

Error unlocking position.
It makes a clamp bolt the
position of the drum locking.
No
More than retry two times?
Yes

unlocking position.

middle position.
Error recovery 4
Ex1b2
It memorizes the drum
present position as the
position which tail clamps
were put on.
Error
Is tail clamps locked up the Error

Ex11d
drum?
The blower operation Error

Ex18c
checking
End

1-6.Discharge Sequence (PT-R4300/4100)
Start E
Parallel op eration T ran s m o to r: It re tu rn

plate at th e speed o f
125m m/s.
Erro r E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c 2 ,E x 1 c 3
It low ers tran s path E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c5 ,E x 1 cb
C lutch of the discharge
Erro r side is OFF.
It returns drum locking pin E x1 9b,E x19 c
Parallel op eration
Drum : It decides on the Erro r E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b Drum : It decides on the Erro r If it becom es the po sition
po sition of tail clam p E x 1 6 6 ,E x 1 6 d po sition of lead in g clam p of 1 50m m to a leading
clam p position, it is begun
to raise a squeeze roller
T ran s m o to r : sto p
It d ecides o n the
target tail clam p Erro r E x1 1b,E x13 b,Ex 16 6
po sition if not b ein g E x 1 6 d ,E x 1 7 4
within +-2pulse and it E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
retries E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c
Do in g PH5 4 and PH 59 Yes

sensor Plate deing? It d ecides o n the
target leading clam p
No Erro r
It raises trans path po sition if not b ein g
within + -3 and it
retries until 5tim es.
Ex143
E x1 1b,E x13 b,Ex 16 5

Is there tail clam p in th e Yes
Ex1b1 E x 1 6 c,E x 1 7 3
clam p arm .
No
It puts out the drum Erro r
E x 1 9 9 ,E x 1 9 a
It m ak es a clam p bolt the locking pin.
Erro r
po sition of th e drum Ex10a
locking.
Erro r
C lutch of the supply side Off.

It raises clam p arm C lutch of the discharge side is ON
E x 1 0 6 ,E x 1 c 6 ,E x 1 c 7 Servo OFF
It m ak es a clam p bolt the Erro r

Yes
unlocking. Is it senso r of P H54 O FF? Ex11f
It m akes a clam p bo lt
No
locking.
Erro r
It o pens lead in g clam p s E x 1 0 f,E x 1 c 0 ,E x 1 c1
It raises clam p arm
Drum blower OFF
T ran s m o to r: It re tu rn s Erro r
un til P H54 O FFs at th e
Ex109 speed of 160m m/s.
C lutch of the supply side is OFF
C lutch of the discharge side is OFF T ran s m o to r : sto p
It raises a clamp arm in Erro r

Ex11f
the m idd le po sition .
Yes
It lo wers clam p arm Is it senso r of P H59 O FF?
No
E x 1 ce
It m ak es a clam p bolt the
Is there p late to wind Yes
locking.
con tinu ously?
No
Erro r
It closes leading clam ps E x 1 0 e,E x 1 c0 ,E x 1 c1
E x 1 0 8 ,E x 1 c 6 ,E x 1 c 7
It retu rn s d ru m lo cking Erro r
E x1 9b,E x19 c
pin
Is there tail clam p in th e Erro r
Ex11d
clam p arm ?
End

E.Reference
E rro r r ec o v ery 1 E rro r r ec o v ery 3
It r etu r n s p l ate t o th e Erro r

side of supply plate.
No
It retried?
Erro r
It op ens shu tter Ex110
Yes
It closes shutter Drum : It decides on the Erro r E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b

position of squeeze E x 1 6 7 ,E x 1 6 e
E x 1 0 2 ,E x 1 1 0 ,E x 1 4 6 It d ecides o n the
target squeeze Erro r E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 167
po sition if not being E x 1 6 e,E x 1 7 5
within +-11 and it
Erro r retries.
Erro r
T ran s m o to r : st o p
E rro r r ec o v ery 2
Erro r
It raises niproller
It raises trans path

End
C lutch on the supply side is
OF F
Ex101
Erro r E rro r R e co v e ry 4
It closes leading clamps
Do sen sor of PH5 4 d etect Yes

Ex142
p la te?
E x 1 0 e,E x 1 c 0 ,E x 1 c 1 No
Erro r E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c2 ,E x 1 c3
Erro r E x 1 0 3 ,E x 1 c2 ,E x 1 c3 It low ers tran s path
It raises trans path E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b
E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b

End
It discharg es plate to the

discharge side of pass.
End
Do in g PH5 0 senso r, plate Yes
Ex000
being?
R ecov ery o f size error

Drum : It decides on the Erro r E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
position of leading clamp. E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c
It d ecides o n the Yes

Do sen sor of PH5 0 d etect
target leading clamp Erro r E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 165 p la te?
po sition if not being E x 1 6 c,E x 1 7 3
within +-3 and it No Erro r
retries. Drum : It decides on the tail
clam p po sition with Ysize
of 6 50 m m in the p osition .
Erro r B ut it stops drum forcing B lower of drum is OFF
wh en plate p asses PH5 0
senso r.
E x 1 1 5 ,E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 1 c
Servo OFF E x 1 2 7 ,E x 1 3 b
Drum : It decides on the tail
clam p po sition with th e
Erro r E x1 1b,E x11 c
Ysize which calculated
Erro r E x 1 2 7 ,E x 1 3 b
It o pens lead in g clam ps E x 1 0 f,E x 1 c 0 ,E x 1 c 1 fro m th e p o siti o n o f P H 5 0
senso r OF F in the positio n.
E rro r r ec o v ery 1 It closes shutter
End
End

1-7.Drum high speed rotating sequence
The
Deceleration
acceleration
Erro r E x 1 4 c,E x 1 4 e,E x 1 5 f

T he all kind checking (* 1) E x 1 6 1 ,E x 1 6 2 ,E x 1 6 4 T u rn S to p co m m an d
Ex18c
Drum h ig h speed rotation It w aits for the sp eed

agreement signal and the Erro r
error latch signal clear.
speed Zero signal to ON.
T he tim e out is 15 seco nds.
Erro r Erro r E x 1 4 c,E x 1 4 e,E x 1 5 f
Vaccum pressure checking Ex186 T he all kind checking (* 1) E x 1 6 1 ,E x 1 6 2 ,E x 1 6 4
Ex18c
It waits 1seco nd
Loose plate checking is enable

Vaccum pressure checking is B it2,5 of address 05h are Yes E x 1 5 f,E x 1 6 4 ,E x 1 8 8
enable ON E x 1 a3 ,E x 1 a4
No
It sets sp eed loop gain and
In t eg ra tio n c o n stan t to
high speed rotational m ode It w aits for the sp eed
agreement signal and the
Start com mand of drum T he tim e out is 15 seco nds.
high sp eed ro tatio n
T he b alancer po sito n Erro r It clears drum high speed

checking rotation erro r latch sig nal
Ex15b
L oo se plate latch signal ch eck E r r o r
Ex15e
Loose plate latch signal disable
Erro r
It waits 2seconds
T he vaccum pressure
*2 decline latch signal
checking Erro r
Ex188
Vaccum pressure checking
Erro r disable
T he all kind checking (* 1)
*3 T h e E rr o r o f st o p p ed Erro r
Ex183
tim eou t
Yes
B it4 of address fc00h is ON Ex180
It clears SVC mode, a
No distance, a speed register
Yes
Speed OK? It m ak es speed loo p gain,
In t eg ra tio n c o n stan t to
No generally m od e.
It waits until it reaches Erro r

specification speed.
End
*2
Erro r
*3
Yes
No
It waits 0.5 second until the Erro r

turn is stable.
*2
Erro r
*3
*1 *2 *3
Serv o sto p (L S 58-1,-2, S W 58 )
Yes C ov er interlock (LS 57 -1,-2 ,-3)
B it4 of address fc00h is ON Ex180 A ctu a ter (P H 2 0 ,P H 1 1 -2 A ,P H 1 1 -2 H ,P H 3 0 ,P H 3 0 H ) Drum sto p Drum sto p
Drum blower (INVAL M )
No
B it2 of address fc00h is Yes E x 1 4 c ,E x 1 4 e ,E x 1 5 f

Ex181 E x 1 5 e,E x 1 8 4 ,E x 1 8 5
OF F E x 1 6 1 ,E x 1 6 2 ,E x 1 6 4
E x 1 8 8 ,E x 1 a 3 ,E x 1 a 4
Ex18c
No
End

Drum high speed rotating sequence (PT-R4100)
Start E
Parallel operation
Trans motor: It return plate
at the speed of 125mm/s.
It lowers trans path Ex1c4,Ex1c5,Ex1cb
Clutch of the discharge side
Error is OFF.
It returns drum locking pin Ex19b,Ex19c
Parallel operation
Drum: It decides on the Error Ex11b,Ex13b Drum: It decides on the Error If it becomes the position of
position of tail clamp Ex166,Ex16d position of leading clamp 150mm to a leading clamp
position, it is begun to raise
a squeeze roller
Trans motor : stop
It decides on the target
Error Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex166
tail clamp position if
not being within +- Ex16d,Ex174
2pulse and it retries Ex11b,Ex13b
Ex165,Ex16c
Doing PH54 and PH59 Yes

sensor Plate deing? It decides on the target
leading clamp position
No Error
It raises trans path if not being within +-3
and it retries until
5times.
Trans motor : stop
Ex143
Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex165
Is there tail clamp in the Yes
Ex1b1 Ex16c,Ex173
clamp arm.
No
It puts out the drum locking Error
Ex199,Ex19a
It makes a clamp bolt the pin.
Error
position of the drum Ex10a
locking.
Trans motor : stop
Error
It lowers clamp arm
Clutch of the supply side Off.

It raises clamp arm Clutch of the discharge side is ON
Ex106,Ex1c6,Ex1c7 Servo OFF
It makes a clamp bolt the Error

position of the drum
unlocking. Yes
Is it sensor of PH54 OFF? Ex11f
It makes a clamp bolt
No
locking.
Error
It opens leading clamps Ex10f,Ex1c0,Ex1c1
It raises clamp arm
Drum blower OFF
Trans motor: It returns until Error
PH54 OFFs at the speed of
Ex109 160mm/s.
Clutch of the supply side is OFF
Clutch of the discharge side is OFF Trans motor : stop
It raises a clamp arm in the Error

Ex11f
middle position.
Yes
It lowers clamp arm Is it sensor of PH59 OFF?
No
Ex1ce
It makes a clamp bolt the
Is there plate to wind Yes
locking.
continuously?
No
It raises clamp arm
Error
It closes leading clamps Ex10e,Ex1c0,Ex1c1
Ex108,Ex1c6,Ex1c7
Error
It returns drum locking pin Ex19b,Ex19c
Is there tail clamp in the Error

Ex11d
clamp arm?
End

Error recovery 1 Error recovery 3 Error recovery
It returns plate to the Error It returns plate to the Error

Blower of drum is OFF
side of supply plate. side of supply plate.
No
It retried? It retried?
Error
It opens shutter Ex110
Yes Yes
It closes shutter Drum: It decides on the Error Ex11b,Ex13b It closes shutter

position of squeeze Ex167,Ex16e
Ex102,Ex110,Ex146 It decides on the target Ex102,Ex110,Ex146

Error Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex167
squeeze position if not
being within +-11 and Ex16e,Ex175
it retries.
Error Error
It closes shutter Ex111 It closes shutter Ex111
Error
Trans motor : stop Trans motor : stop
Error recovery 2
Error Error
It raises niproller It raises niproller
It raises trans path End It raises trans path

Clutch on the supply side is Clutch on the supply side is
OFF OFF
Ex101 Ex101
Error Error Recovery 4

Do sensor of PH54 detect Yes Error Ex103,Ex1c2,Ex1c3

Ex142 It raises trans path
plate? Ex1c4,Ex1c5,Ex1cb
Ex10e,Ex1c0,Ex1c1 No
Error Ex104,Ex1c2,Ex1c3 End

Error Ex103,Ex1c2,Ex1c3 It lowers trans path
It raises trans path Ex1c4,Ex1c5,Ex1cb
Ex1c4,Ex1c5,Ex1cb

End
Trans motor : stop

Error recovery 2
It discharges plate to the

Ex1c4,Ex1c5,Ex1cb
Doing PH50 sensor, plate Yes
Ex000
being?
Recovery of size error

Drum: It decides on the Error Ex11b,Ex13b
position of leading clamp. Ex165,Ex16c
End
It decides on the target Do sensor of PH50 detect Yes
Error Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex165 plate?
leading clamp position
if not being within +-3 Ex16c,Ex173
and it retries. No Error
Drum: It decides on the tail
clamp position with Ysize of
650mm in the position.
Error But it stops drum forcing Blower of drum is OFF
It returns drum locking pin Ex19b,Ex19c when plate passes PH50
sensor.
Ex115,Ex11b,Ex11c
Servo OFF Ex127,Ex13b
Drum: It decides on the tail
clamp position with the
Error Ex11b,Ex11c
Ysize which calculated from
Error Ex127,Ex13b
It opens leading clamps Ex10f,Ex1c0,Ex1c1 the position of PH50 sensor
OFF in the position.
Error recovery 1 It closes shutter
End Error recovery 4
End

1-8.Auto Balance Sequence
B alancer m ov em en t
Start
processing
It calcu lates the po sition of Yes T h e m o v em en t d ista n ce o f

balancer fro m plate size balancer w hich m o ves to
and thickness. the 1st is within 3pulse?
No
It fixes th e order and the T h e m o v em en t d ista n ce o f

po sition wh ich m oves balancer w hich m o ves to Erro r E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 168
balancers (Home side) the 1st is within 3pulse? E x 1 6 f,E x 1 7 6
W h en bum p in g b y the Erro r

Detection o f balan cer E x 1 2 0 ,E x 1 9 d
balancer m o vem ent, it
m o v es o n e to t h e B alancer search
te m p o r ary p o sit io n .
Erro r
Yes It puts out balancer pin E x 1 9 9 ,E x 1 9 a
B alancer m ov em en t Erro r E x1 20 an d less than retry
processing (H om e
two tim es?
Side)
Erro r E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
No It m oves 1 st balan cer
E x 1 6 9 ,E x 1 7 0
Servo OFF
Erro r
It returns balancer pins. E x1 9b,E x19 c
Erro r
It fixes th e order and the Detection o f balan cer E x 1 2 1 ,E x 1 9 e
po sition wh ich m oves
balancers (Away side)
It renews the present drum

Po sition as the positio n of
W h en bum p in g b y the balancer.
Yes Yes
T h e m o v em en t d ista n ce o f
B alancer m ov em en t Erro r Ex19d and less than two balanser which m oves to
processing (Away
times. the 2nd is within 3pulse?
side)
No No
It d oes the 1
Servo OFF
processing
End
End

E.Reference PT-R4000II (Ver4.0X)
2.Sequence explanations (PT-R4000II)
2-1.Initialization sequence
The processing before

initializing InitSeq1
T he processing o f
Erro r
Servo Pack alarm checking plate on tran s p ass
initializing
It resets Servo p ack , if it
occur sover load alarm
T he processing o f
acutuaters initializing
It re tu rn s to th e
generally mode, if No
loop g ain of speed
a power supply?
and integration
con stant are a hig h- Yes
speed turn m ode.
T he processing o f
Servo reset
Yes SVC initializing
Service call error B occurs
No It checks wh eth er or
Ok
no t plate is left in the
It waits 5second, after it
equ ipm en t.
servo ON .
It checks load and unload
condition which is
m em orized in Nv R am E qu al to or m o re th an 5 Yes
dev iatio n co unters?
Is it in the clam ping o nly Yes No Ad ju stm en t of

with leading clamps? autom atically Offset
zero
No
InitSeq1

T he state at w hich it
Yes position of Squeeze E x 1 6 7 ,E x 1 6 e
removes tail clam ps by
discharging.
No It d ecides o n the
InitSeq2 target positio n of Erro r E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 167
squeeze if not being
E x 1 6 e,E x 1 7 5
within the +-11pulse
and it retries 5times.
T he state at wh ich p late is Yes
wrapped around drum and
tail clam ps put on drum. Erro r E x 1 0 7 ,E x 1 c 6
It lowers squeeze.
E x 1 c7
No
InitSeq3

po sition of tail clam p s. E x 1 6 6 ,E x 1 6 d
T he state at wh ich p late is Yes
translated from th e sup ply
side by the winding? It d ecides o n the
target positio n of tail Erro r
No E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 166
InitSeq4 clam p if n ot b ein g
E x 1 6 d ,E x 1 7 4
and it retries 5times.
Yes
Processing o f p un ch in g Erro r
It closes shu tter Ex111
No
InitSeq5
Erro r E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c 2 ,E x 1 c 3
It low ers tran s path
E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c5 ,E x 1 cb
T o m ain p ro cessing o f
It r etu r n s p l ate to th e
initializing
discharge side trans
pass
End

PT-R4000II (Ver4.0X) E.Reference
T he processin g o f actuaters
Do the tail clam ps m atch a Yes

It closes shutter
clam p arm ?
No C lamp bolts in the middle

p o siti o n Erro r
Erro r Erro r
It lo wers clam p arm E x 1 0 6 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7 It closes th leading clam p s E x 1 0 e,E x 1 c 0 ,E x 1 c 1
T o the d ru m lo ck p osition Erro r It returns the lock p in of Erro r

Ex10a E x1 9b,E x19 c
of th e clam p bo lt drum
Erro r
It raises clam p arm E x 1 0 5 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7 Servo OFF
It m em orizes th at plate is
Nv Ram
End
InitSeq3
T he processing o f
End
InitSeq4
End
InitSeq5
The punch
m echanizm is
initialized.
End

2-2.Main processing of initializing
Start
Parallel processing
C hecking of supply door Erro r T he reg istered p unch

Ex189
is open/close are Idled 5times.
No
T h e 2 n d e rro r?
Interlock checking o f Erro r
Ex14c
fra m e co v er No Yes
End?
Yes E x 1 3 1 ,E x 1 3 2 ,E x 1 3 3
B lower of drum resets
af ter th a t O N E x 1 3 4 ,E x 1 3 5 ,E x 1 3 6
It returns the side Erro r

T he processing o f Erro r align m ent m echan ism to E x1 2d,E x13 f
plate on trans p ass th e sta rti n g p o in t .
initializing

End
Yes
a power supply?
No
T he processing o f
Servo reset
SVC Initializing
Servo ON , it waits
5seconds
It adjusts an offset
autom atic zero if the Erro r
deviatio n cou nter is
equal to o r m ore th an
5.
Yes
Is plate wrapped on drum ?
No Drum : It decides on tail

clam p position(Nv R am A
m em orized) in th e
Do the tail clam ps m atch Erro r p o siti o n
Ex155
a clam p arm ?
Drum : It decides on Erro r E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
It d ecides o n the
leading clamp position in E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c
target positio n of tail
Erro r the p osition .
clam p if n ot b ein g
B alancer search
and it retries 5times. It d ecides o n the
B lower of drum is OFF target positio n of
Erro r
leading clam p if not E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 165
Servo OFF It low ers tran s path being within the +- E x 1 6 c,E x 1 7 3
E x 1 2 8 ,E x 1 5 1 ,E x 1 9 f 5times.
E x 1 a0 ,E x 1 a1 ,E x 1 a2 It r etu r n s p l ate t o th e
discharge side of trans Sensor detected head is Erro r
T he B low er o peratio n Erro r pass E x 1 7 c,E x 1 7 f
ON
checking

It raises trans path Servo OFF
Ex18c Sensor detected head is

Ex14f
OF F
Drum vaccum pressure Erro r
checking
Is a pu nch o f o ptio n Yes
B lower of drum is OFF set t o O N ?
B lower of drum is Off No

P H 6 1 H /A ,P H 6 2 Erro r
E x1 7b,E x17 d,E x 17e
Sensor checking
Ex186
Sensor detected head is
ON
End
It waits 1seco nd

2-3.Processing of trans pass initializing
Start
B o t h P H 5 4 an d P H 7 0 Yes
d etect p late?
No No Is trans p ath at the

h ig hest p ositi on ?
Yes
C lutch of supply side is O FF

C lutch of discharge side is O N
T ra n s m o to r: It tran sfers
6 45 m m a t sp eed o f
4 0m m /s
Ex603
Is th ere p late o n sen so r of Yes

PH 5 4 o nly?
No C lutch of supply side is O FF

C lutch of discharge side is O N
T ra n s m o to r: It re tu rn E r ro r
p late u nti l P H 5 4's O FF
at 4 0 m m /s.
T ran s m o to r is sto pp ed .
Ex145
T ra n s m o to r : It tra n s E r ro r
p late 1 0m m at 4 0m m / s
T ran s m o to r is sto pp ed .
Ex14f
Isn't the re p late on senso r Yes

of PH54?
No
It retries at o n ce
Ex14f
Ex124
Is th ere p late o n sen so r of Yes

Ex1b 7
PH 7 0 o nly?
No
D o sen so r o f PH 5 0 d etect Yes

p la te ?
No E r ro r
It closes sh utter
E r ro r
End It lo w e rs n ip rol ler. Ex102
Ex150
E r ro r
It op en s sh ut ter. Ex110
C lutch of supply side is O N

C lutch of discharge side is O FF
T ra n s m o to r: It re tu rn s p l a t e
until PH 50's O FF at 50m m /s.
B ut, it stops even if it doesn't
O FF and it passes in the
(1 94 .5 /5 0)sec.
E r ro r
It closes shu tte r. Ex111
E r ro r
It raises n iproll er Ex150
T ra n s m o to r: It tran sfers
3 1.5 m m at sp eed o f
4 0m m /s
Ex150

2-4.Processing of punch sequence
S tart
B
D o it d etect an in te rleaf Y es
E x 1 c8
p a p e r?
E r ro r
It lo w ers n ip ro ller
No
It lo w ers tran s p ath at th e E r ro r E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c2 ,E x 1 c 3 *1

p un ch po sitio n . E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b
S id e alig n m en t E r ro r Ex102
sta rtin g p o in t retu rn
D o es it de tect an in terle af Y es
It raises tran s pa th p a p e r?
No
*1
E x1 2d ,E x 13 f
It occurs an error w ithin Y es E x 1 c8

the idling of punch at
p late b efo re. E r ro r
E r ro r It driv es th e set pu nch
No Id lin g o f p u n ch
*1
It raises tran s pa th
E r ro r
It lo w ers n ip ro ller
E x 1 3 1 ,E x 1 3 2 ,E x 1 3 3
E x 1 3 1 ,E x 1 3 2 ,E x 1 3 3 E x 1 3 4 ,E x 1 3 5 ,E x 1 3 6
E x 1 3 4 ,E x 1 3 5 ,E x 1 3 6
It raises tran s pa th S id e alig n m en t E r ro r
*1
Ex102
E r ro r
It op ens shu tter E x1 2d ,E x 13 f
It return back plate to E r ro r

C lu tc h o f su p p ly sid e is O N
tran s p ass
C lu tc h o f d isch a rg e sid e is O F F
It raises n ip ro ller Isn 't it p un ch 's O N and Y es
re trying ?
It w aits 0 .5 seco n d No E r ro r
It strik es a set pu nch
Ex110
R e try
T ra n s m o to r: It tra n s It closes shu tter.
T im e o u t
p late u ntil O N o f P H 6 2
sen so r a t 4 0m m /s
No Is th ere p late on sen so r o f

It raise s n ip ro ller.
PH62?
Y es
Ex130
It raise s n ip ro ller an d E r ro r
it trans p late to sen se
ON of PH62.
E r ro r
E r ro r It closes sh utte r Ex111
It lo w ers n ip ro ller Ex102
E r ro r
It raises n ip ro ller Is it po ssible to hav e Y es
E r ro r w ithdraw n plate by E x 1 ca
retrin g ?
E rro r rec o v e ry 1
T ran s m o tor: if it's No
0 .3 m m o f p late th ic k n ess,
it tran s b y in term issio n T ra n s m o to r : It re tu rn s T im e o u t
p late u n til P H 5 0's O F F at Y es
m a l at 5 0 m m /s. If n o t it Is it set punch's O N ?
trans by continuously at Ex101 5 0m m /s
5 0m m /s
No
No Is there p late on sen so r o f It idles the se t p un ch .
It ad ju sts sid e align m en t PH50?
E r ro r
acc ord ing to th e plate
size. Y es
D o es it de tect an in terle af Y es
It closes sh utte r p a p e r?
It w aits 1 seco n d .
No
End
S id e alig n m en t m o to r: E r ro r
It m o v e 3 m m in re v e rse
at speed o f 5m m /s It tran s p late to sh u tter E r ro r It raises n ip ro ller
and it raises trans path E x 1 0 1 ,E x 1 0 3
at th e sam e tim e. Ex111
T he w aitng tim e
acc ord ing to p late E x 1 c8
Ex12f
S id e alig n m en t m o to r:
E r ro r
It m o v e 3 m m a t sp ee d o f
5 m m /s
A fter 0 .5 sec , tran s m o to r *1
is stopped.
S id e alig n m en t
It w a its 5 seco n d
*1
E rro r rec o v e ry 1
B
E x 1 2 d ,E x 1 5 6 ,E x 1 5 7
E x 1 5 8 ,E x 1 c9

2-5.Processing of winding sequence
S tart
C
Pa rallel p ro cessin g
E r ro r E r ro r
D o es it d etect a leaf p ap er? E x 1 c8 It c loses leading c la m ps
T ra n s m o to r : st o p
E r ro r It op en lead in g clam p s
E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c2 ,E x 1 c 3 T ra n s m o to r : st o p
It lo w ers tran s p ath .
E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b C lutch of supply side is O ff.
E rro r rec o v ery 1
D rum : It decides on the E r ro r

leading clam p position S e rv o O N E x 1 0 e ,E x 1 c 0
E x 1 c1
W hen the SV C status
doesn't R eady, it
adjusts and it retries Y es It retu rn s th e b o th sid e E r ro r
E x1 9b ,E x 19 c
an au to m atic offset drum locking pin.
zero if ne ver retrying
It ad ju sts an o ffset
au to m atic zero if th e No D rum : It decides on the E r ro r
deviation counter is equal position of squeeze
to o r m o re th an 5 .
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c
It d ecid es o n th e
target squeeze E r ro r
It d ec id es o n targ et
p osition if no t b eing
leading clam p in the E r ro r E x1 1b ,E x 13 b,E x1 65
w ithin+ -11pulse and it
p osition if no t b eing E x 1 6 c ,E x 1 7 3
re tries
w ithin +-3and it retries.
L e ad in g ed g e d etectio n
Is th ere p late in th e sup p ly No sen so r O N
Ex810
side?
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 6 7
Y es E x 1 6 e ,E x 1 7 5
E r ro r
D o es it de tect an in terle af Y es It low ers squeeze roller.
E x 1 c8
p a p e r?
L e ad in g ed g e d etectio n
No
sen so r O F F
A re th ere tail cla m p s in th e No

Ex1b0
clam p arm ?
It raises sq u eeze ro ller
B lo w er o f d ru m is O N
It p u ts o u t th e d ru m E r ro r
E x 1 9 9 ,E x 1 9 a
locking pin
E x 1 0 7 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c
7
Pa rallel p ro cessin g
S erv o O F F
It decid es o n th e po sitio n E r ro r M id dle p o sitio n o f c lam p E r ro r The leading edge E r ro r

o f tail cla m p o f drum . bolt p osition ch eck in g
E r ro r E x 1 0 f,E x 1 c0
It o p en s lea d in g clam p s
E x 1 c1
R ec ov ery of th e size It m ak es a c lam p b olt a E rro r rec o v ery 4

e rro r drum unlocking position.
E r ro r
It lo w ers n ip ro ller Ex102
E x 1 b 9 ,E x 1 3 9
E x 1 1 2 ,E x 1 1 5 ,E x 1 1 b E rro r rec o v ery 4
C lu tc h o f su p p ly sid e is O N E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 6 6 ,E x 1 6 d
C lutch of discharg e side is O F F
Ex10a
E r ro r
T he v acc um p re ssu re E r ro r
It w aits 5 s eco n d s ch eck in g

T ra n s m o to r: It tra n s p la te
(1 3 0 + A )m m at sp eed 70 m m /s.
A is the revision value w hich is
p eculiar to th e m achin e. Ex186
E r ro r It d ete cte d an in terleaf Y es

It raises n ip ro ller
p a p e r?
No
E rro r rec o v ery 1 E rro r rec o v ery 4
T ran s m o to r : driv ing o f
sp e ed 5 0 m m /s
Ex101 E x 1 c8
Y es It d ecid es o n th e
D o es it de tect an in terle af
targ et tail clam p E r ro r
p a p e r?
p osition if no t b eing
No w ithin +-3pulse and it
T ra n s m o t o r : sto p re tries
It w aits 3 s eco n d s

D E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 6 6
E x 1 6 d ,E x 1 7 4
C
E x 1 c8

Erro r

It closes shutter

middle position.
E x 1 0 6 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
It m ak es a clam p b olt the

po sition of th e drum Erro r
locking.


middle position.
Ex10a

It m ak es a clam p b olt the Erro r
locking.
No
M o re th an retry tw o tim es?
Yes


middle position.
Ex1b2
It m em orizes th e d ru m
present p ositio n as th e
po sition w hich tail clam ps
were p ut on.
Erro r
Is tail clam ps locked up the Erro r

Ex11d
drum?
Disp lacem en t senso r Erro r E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 1 c,E x 1 2 7

checking. E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 5 d
T he blow er o peratio n Erro r

Ex18c
checking
T he b alancer po siton Erro r

checking
B alancer search
Auto balance sequence
End

2-6.Discharge Sequence
E
Start
Parallel o peratio n T ran s m o to r: It retu rn

plate at th e sp eed o f
95m m /s.
E rro r E x 1 0 4 ,E x1 c 2 ,E x 1 c 3
It low ers trans path E x 1 c 4, E x 1 c5 , E x 1 cb
Clutch of the discharge
E rro r side is OFF.
It returns drum locking pin E x19 b,Ex1 9c
Parallel o peratio n
Drum : It decides on the E rro r E x 1 1 b ,E x1 3 b Drum : It decides on the E rro r If it becom es the p ositio n
po sition of tail clam p E x 1 6 6 ,E x1 6 d po sition o f leading clam p of 150 m m to a leading
clam p position, it is begun
to raise a squeeze roller
It d ecides o n th e
target tail clam p E rro r E x11 b,Ex1 3b,E x16 6
po sition if no t b ein g E x 1 6 d ,E x1 7 4
within +-2pulse and it E x 1 1 b ,E x1 3 b
retries E x 1 6 5 ,E x1 6 c
D oin g PH 5 4 senso r Plate Y es

deing? It d ecides o n th e
target leading clam p
No E rro r
po sition if no t b ein g
It raises trans p ath
within +-3 and it
retries until 5times.
Ex143
E x11 b,Ex1 3b,E x16 5

Is th ere tail clam p in the Y es
Ex1b1 E x 1 6 c, E x 1 7 3
clam p arm .
No Y es
Is it sensor o f PH 54 O FF? Ex11f
It m akes a clam p bo lt th e
E rro r No
po sition o f the drum Ex10a
locking.
It puts out the drum E rro r
E x 1 9 9 ,E x1 9 a
locking pin.
E rro r
It low ers clam p arm
Servo OFF
E rro r
It o pens lead ing clam ps E x 1 0 f, E x 1 c0 , E x 1 c1
E x 1 0 6 ,E x1 c 6 ,E x 1 c 7
It m akes a clam p bo lt th e E rro r

po sition o f the drum Clutch of the supply side Off.
unlocking. Clutch of the discharge side is ON
It m akes a clam p bolt
po sition o f the drum
locking.
T ran s m o to r: It retu rn s E rro r
un til PH 54 O FFs at the
speed of 80m m /s.
Ex109
Ex11f
Drum blow er OFF
It raises a clam p arm in E rro r T ran s m o to r: It tran sfer

the m id dle po sition . p l at e 1 0 m m t o PH 5 4 's
O N at 48m m /s
It low ers clam p arm

Y es
Is it sensor o f PH 54 O FF?
It m akes a clam p bo lt th e
po sition o f the drum No No
It retried?
locking.
Y es

It closes leading clam ps
E x 1 0 8 ,E x1 c 6 ,E x 1 c 7
Ex124
Is th ere tail clam p in the E rro r

Ex11d Is there p late to w in d Y es
clam p arm ?
contin uou sly?
No
Clutch of the supply side is O FF
Clutch of the discharge side is OFF E rro r
It closes leading clam ps E x 1 0 e, E x 1 c0 , E x 1 c1
It w aits 0 .5 second It returns drum lockin g E rro r

E x19 b,Ex1 9c
pin
End

E rro r r ec o v ery 1 E rro r r ec o v ery 3
It r etu r n s p l ate t o th e Erro r

side of supply plate.
No
It retried?
Erro r
Yes
It closes shutter Drum : It decides on the Erro r E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b

position of squeeze E x 1 6 7 ,E x 1 6 e
E x 1 0 2 ,E x 1 1 0 ,E x 1 4 6 It d ecides o n the
target squeeze Erro r E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 167
po sition if not being E x 1 6 e,E x 1 7 5
within +-11 and it
Erro r retries.
Erro r
Erro r
It raises niproller

End
C lutch on the supply side is
OF F
Ex101
Erro r E rro r R e co v e ry 4
Do sen sor of PH5 4 d etect Yes

Ex142
p la te?
E x 1 0 e,E x 1 c 0 ,E x 1 c 1 No
Erro r E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c2 ,E x 1 c3
Erro r E x 1 0 3 ,E x 1 c2 ,E x 1 c3 It low ers tran s path
It raises trans path E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b
E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b

End
It discharg es plate to the

End
Do in g PH5 0 senso r, plate Yes
Ex000
being?
R ecov ery o f size error

position of leading clamp. E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c
It d ecides o n the Yes

Do sen sor of PH5 0 d etect
target leading clamp Erro r E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 165 p la te?
po sition if not being E x 1 6 c,E x 1 7 3
within +-3 and it No Erro r
retries. Drum : It decides on the tail
clam p po sition with Ysize
of 6 50 m m in the p osition .
Erro r B ut it stops drum forcing B lower of drum is OFF
wh en plate p asses PH5 0
senso r.
E x 1 1 5 ,E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 1 c
Servo OFF E x 1 2 7 ,E x 1 3 b
Drum : It decides on the tail
clam p po sition with th e
Erro r E x1 1b,E x11 c
Ysize which calculated
Erro r E x 1 2 7 ,E x 1 3 b
It o pens lead in g clam ps E x 1 0 f,E x 1 c 0 ,E x 1 c 1 fro m th e p o siti o n o f P H 5 0
senso r OF F in the positio n.
E rro r r ec o v ery 1 It closes shutter
End
End

2-7.Drum high speed rotating sequence
The
Deceleration
acceleration
It waits in the stability tim e

T u rn S to p co m m an d
of 0.5 seconds
Erro r E x 1 4 c,E x 1 4 e ,E x 1 5 f It w aits for the sp eed

T he all kind checking (* 1) E x 1 6 1 ,E x 1 6 2 ,E x 1 6 4 agreement signal and the Erro r
Ex18c speed Zero signal to ON.
T he tim e out is 1 5 seco nds.
Erro r E x 1 4 c,E x 1 4 e ,E x 1 5 f
Drum h ig h speed rotation
T he all kind checking (* 1) E x 1 6 1 ,E x 1 6 2 ,E x 1 6 4
error latch signal clear.
Ex18c
It waits 1secon d
Erro r
Vaccum pressure checking Ex186 B it2,5 of address 05h are Yes E x 1 5 f,E x 1 6 4 ,E x 1 8 8
ON E x 1 a3 ,E x 1 a 4
No
Loose plate checking is enable
Vaccum pressure checking is
enable It w aits for the sp eed
agreement signal and the
It sets sp eed loop gain and T he tim e out is 1 5 seco nds.
In te g ra tio n c o n stan t t o
high speed rotational mode
Start com mand of drum It clears drum high speed

high speed ro tatio n rotation error latch sign al
Erro r L oo se plate latch sig nal ch eck E r r o r

It waits 2seconds Ex15e
Loose plate latch signal disable
*2
T he vaccum pressure
decline latch signal
Erro r checking Erro r
T he all kind checking (* 1) Ex188
Vaccum pressure checking
disable
*3
T h e E rr o r o f st o p p ed Erro r
Ex183
Yes tim eou t
No
It clears SVC mode, a
Yes
distance, a speed register
Speed OK?
No It m ak es speed loo p gain,

In te g ra tio n c o n stan t t o
It waits until it reaches Erro r generally m od e.
specification speed.
*2
End
Erro r
*3
Yes
No
It waits 1 second until the Erro r

turn is stable.
*2
Erro r
*3
Yes *1 *2 *3
B it4 of address fc00h is ON Ex180 Serv o sto p (L S5 8-1,-2, S W 58)
C ov er interlock (L S 57-1,-2 ,-3 )
No A ctu a ter (P H 2 0 ,P H 1 1 -2 A ,P H 1 1 - 2 H ,P H 3 0 ,P H 3 0 H ) Drum sto p Drum sto p
Drum blower (INVAL M )
B it2 of address fc00h is Yes

Ex181
OF F
E x 1 5 e,E x 1 8 4 ,E x 1 8 5 E x 1 4 c ,E x 1 4 e ,E x 1 5 f
No
E x 1 8 8 ,E x 1 a3 ,E x 1 a4 E x 1 6 1 ,E x 1 6 2 ,E x 1 6 4
Ex18c
End

2-8.Auto Balance Sequence
B alancer m ov em en t
Start
processing
It calcu lates the po sition of Yes T h e m o v em en t d ista n ce o f

balancer fro m plate size balancer w hich m o ves to
and thickness. the 1st is within 3pulse?
No
It fixes th e order and the T h e m o v em en t d ista n ce o f

po sition wh ich m oves balancer w hich m o ves to Erro r E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 168
balancers (Home side) the 1st is within 3pulse? E x 1 6 f,E x 1 7 6
W h en bum p in g b y the Erro r

Detection o f balan cer E x 1 2 0 ,E x 1 9 d
Erro r
Yes It puts out balancer pin E x 1 9 9 ,E x 1 9 a
B alancer m ov em en t Erro r E x1 20 an d less than retry
processing (H om e
two tim es?
Side)
Erro r E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
No It m oves 1 st balan cer
E x 1 6 9 ,E x 1 7 0
Servo OFF
Erro r
It returns balancer pins. E x1 9b,E x19 c
Erro r
It fixes th e order and the Detection o f balan cer E x 1 2 1 ,E x 1 9 e
po sition wh ich m oves
balancers (Away side)
It renews the present drum

Po sition as the positio n of
W h en bum p in g b y the balancer.
Yes Yes
T h e m o v em en t d ista n ce o f
B alancer m ov em en t Erro r Ex19d and less than two balanser which m oves to
processing (Away
times. the 2nd is within 3pulse?
side)
No No
It d oes the 1
Servo OFF
processing
End
End

E.Reference
3. Part names and sensor positions
3-1. Front side of Main unit
PT-R4300/4100
PH56
M55 LS57-2 M58 PH58
S0
PH55
M11A PH10H
PH11-2A PH10A
M11H
M41
ENC1
M2
PH11-1A
M1
LS4A P1 PH2 LS4H
ENC1 : Rotary encoder

LS57-2 : Front cover interlock switch
M1 : AC servomotor
M2 : Scanning pulse motor
M11A : Balancer drive motor (Away)
M11H : Balancer drive motor (Home)
M41 : Vacuum pump
M55 : DC motor for raising/lowering the transport path
M58 : Motor for operation door
PH2 : Scanning origin sensor
PH11-1A : Balancer pin position detection sensor
PH11-2A : Balancer pin sensor
PH58 : Motor for Open/Close the operation door
S0 : Power switch

E.Reference
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
PH56
M55 LS56 LS57-2 SL58
LS57-3
PH55
M11A
PH10A PH10H
PH11-2A M11H
M41
ENC1
M2
PH11-1A M1
LS4A P1 PH2 LS4H

LS57-2 : Front cover interlock switch
LS57-3 : Right side cover interlock switch
M1 : AC servomotor
M2 : Scanning pulse motor
M11A : Balancer drive motor (Away)
M11H : Balancer drive motor (Home)
M41 : Vacuum pump
M55 : DC motor for raising/lowering the transport path
PH2 : Scanning origin sensor
PH11-1A : Balancer pin position detection sensor
PH11-2A : Balancer pin sensor
SL58 : Operation door solenoid

E.Reference
3-2. Back side of Main unit
PT-R4300/4100
LS58-2 LS58-1
LS57-1
KA40
PH30H PH30A
XT2
M30H M30A
KA2
PH20
PH31H PH31A
KA1
KA30MH
XT10
M20 PH6 PH29H PH29A PH21 KA30MA BL40
KA1 : Relay for interlock power

KA2 : Relay for servomotor ON/OFF power
KA30MA : Relay for M30A
KA30MH : Relay for M30H
KA40 : Relay for gas suction blower ON/OFF power
LS57-1 : Interlock switch for rear cover
LS58-1 : Soft switch for drum slowdown
M20 : Trailing edge clamp arm drive motor
M30A : Leading edge clamp open/close motor (Away)
M30H : Leading edge clamp open/close motor (Home)
PH6 : Sensor for detecting multiple plate feeding or loose plate
PH20 : Trailing edge clamp arm origin point sensor
PH21 : Trailing edge clamp arm end point sensor
PH30A : Leading edge clamp open/close origin point sensor (Away)
PH30H : Leading edge clamp open/close origin point sensor (Home)
PH31A : Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Away)
PH31H : Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Home)
XT2 : Terminal block
XT10 : AC outlet

E.Reference
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
SL58-2 SL58-1
SL57-1
PH30H PH30A
KA40
M30H M30A XT2
KA2
PH31H PH31A
PH20
KA1
XT10
M20 PH6 PH29H PH29A PH21 BL40
KA1 : Relay for interlock power

KA2 : Relay for servomotor ON/OFF power
KA40 : Relay for gas suction blower ON/OFF power
LS57-1 : Interlock switch for rear cover
M20 : Trailing edge clamp arm drive motor
M30A : Leading edge clamp open/close motor (Away)
M30H : Leading edge clamp open/close motor (Home)
PH6 : Sensor for detecting multiple plate feeding or loose plate
PH30A : Leading edge clamp open/close origin point sensor (Away)
PH30H : Leading edge clamp open/close origin point sensor (Home)
PH31A : Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Away)
PH31H : Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Home)
XT10 : AC outlet

E.Reference
3-3. Left side of Main unit
PT-R4300/4100
CON-PTR4 KA3
R1 U6 XT3 PMD50 LS57-4 PMD61
PMD2
U5 S1&FU1
U3 TH1
U2
FAN2 RCP
U1 FAN1
XT4
U9
BZ1
U4
LS4A
SPX32
RB31
E1A
PIO(The back)
BZ1 : Buzzer
CON-PTR4(2) : CON-PTR4(2) board
E1A : AC servo pack
FAN2 : Fan
FU1 : Fuse for interlock circuits
LS57-4 : Interlock switch for left side cover
PMD2 : Pulse motor driver (for M2 scanning motor)
PMD50 : Pulse motor driver (for M50 plate transport motor)
PMD61 : Pulse motor driver (for M61 plate side alignment motor)
R1 : Enamel resistor
S1 : Maintenance switch
U1 : Switching regulator (5V_100W)
U3 : Switching regulator (-15V_75W)
TH1 : Temperature sensor
KA3 : Relay for operation door interlock
RCP : RCP2 board

RB31 : RB31 board
SPX32 : SPX32 board
PIO : PIO-PTR4(2) board
E.Reference
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
U7 CON-PTR4
U5 XT3 PMD50 PMD61
R1
U6 PMD2
TH1
U3
FAN2 RCP FAN1

U2
U1
U4 XT4
BZ1
SPX32
LS4A
RB31
E1A
PIO(The back)
BZ1 : Buzzer
CON-PTR4 : CON-PTR4 board
E1A : AC servo pack
FAN2 : Fan
PMD2 : Pulse motor driver (for M2 scanning motor)
PMD50 : Pulse motor driver (for M50 plate transport motor)
PMD61 : Pulse motor driver (for M61 plate side alignment motor)
R1 : Enamel resistor
RCP : RCP2 board

RB31 : RB31 board
SPX32 : SPX32 board
PIO : PIO-PTR4 board

E.Reference
3-4. Rite side of Main unit
PT-R4300/4100
PANEL SW58
LS56
PH58
M58
M11H QF1
LS57-3
Z1
PH11-1H PH11-2H
SRGE
XT1
XT10
CAL-Sens ENC1 M1
S0 : Main switch
CAL-sens : Calibration sensor board
SRGE : Serge protection board
LS57-3 : Interlock switch for right side cover
LS56 : Interlock switch for operation door
M1 : AC servomotor
M11H : Balancer drive motor
PANEL : Touch panel
PH11-1H : Balancer pin position detection sensor1 (Home)
QF1 : Circuit protector
SW58 : Drum rotation stop switch
XT0 : Terminal block (for AC input)
XT1 : Terminal block (for SAL/MAL connection)
Z1 : Power noise filter

E.Reference
PT-R400/PT-R4000II
PANEL SW58 LS57-3
C1
C2
M11H
Z1
PH11-1H PH11-2H
FV1
QF1
XT1
CAL-Sens ENC1 M1
C1 : Capacitor
C2 : Capacitor
CAL-sens : Calibration sensor board
FV1 : Surge absorber
LS57-3 : Interlock switch for right side cover
M1 : AC servomotor
M11H : Balancer drive motor
PANEL : Touch panel
QF1 : Circuit protector
SW58 : Drum rotation stop switch
Z1 : Power noise filter

E.Reference
3-5. Top side of Main unit
PT-R4300/4100
SL53 PH53 PH70 PH50
PH57
M52
PH52
PH54 PH59
PH56 M50
TH1
PH58
M55 PH51 M58

LS56

M50 : Plate transport motor
M52 : Nip rollor drive motor
M55 : DC motor for raising/lowreing the transport path
PH51 : Sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of the plate
PH51 : Amplifier for the sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of
the plate
PH52 : Nip rollor origin sensor
PH53 : Shutter origin sensor
PH54 : Plate pass sensor1 on the plate transport path
SL53 : Rotary solenoid for shutter

E.Reference
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
SL53 PH53 PH70 PH50
PH57
M52 LS57-3
PH52
M50 PH54
PH56
TH1
M55 PH51 LS56 SL58

M55 : DC motor for raising/lowreing the transport path
PH51 : Amplifier for the sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of
the plate

E.Reference
3-6. Transport unit of Main unit

PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II/PT-R4100
SL53 SL59-2 M52 M50 PH51 PH51
PH70
PH55
PH53 PH57 SL59-1 PH56

PH51 : Amplifier for the sensor for detecting an interleafe on the back
of the plate
SL59-1 : Transport clutch on the plate loading side
SL59-2 : Transport clutch on the plate unloading side

E.Reference
3-7. Plate side alignment of Main unit
PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II/PT-R4100
PH61H PH61A M61
PH62 PH63
M61 : Plate side alignment drive motor

PH61A : Sensor for detecting the Away side edge of a plate for side
alignment
PH61H : Sensor for detecting the Home side edge of a plate for side
alignment
PH62 : Plate edge detection sensor for the punch unit
PH63 : Side alignment origin sensor
3-8. Clamp arm unit of Main unit

PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II/PT-R4100
PH24-1
PH27-1 PH27-2 M24 PH27-3 PH24-2
PH24-1 : Trailing edge clamp open/close position sensor

PH24-2 : Trailing edge clamp open/close position sensor
PH27-1 : Trailing edge clamp presence detection sensor
M24 : Trailing edge clamp hook drive motor

E.Reference
3-9. Recording Head Unit PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
Focus motor driver

Parabolic mirror
PM80
LS80
Zoom lens
PM81
Dew condensation
sensor
Cylindrical lens
Temperature
Stereographic sensor
projection lens
No.1 Lens
Reflective mirror Fan for Peltier element
Cooler for Peltier element
LD block
PH84
Stereographic
projection lens
Fainal lens Parabolic mirror
PH86
PH85 PH83
PH82
Focus motor driver
PH82 :Focus origin(on the RH’s “Home” side)

PH83 :Focus origin(on the RH’s “Away” side)
PH84 :Origin for rotating the focus motor
PH85 :Zoom origin(on the RH’s “Home” side)
PH86 :Zoom origin(on the RH’s “Away” side)
PM80 :Focus motor

PM81 :Zoom motor

E.Reference
PT-R4100
Parabolic mirror
Focus motor driver
LS80
Zoom lens
PM81
Cylindrical lens Dew condensation

sensor
Stereographic
projection lens Fan for Peltier
No.1 lens element
Temperature
Reflective mirror sensor
Cooler for Peltier element
LD block
PM80
PH84
Fainal lens
Parabolic mirror
PH86 PH83
PH85
PH82
Focus motor driver
PH82 :Focus origin(on the RH’s “Home” side)

PH83 :Focus origin(on the RH’s “Away” side)
PH84 :Origin for rotating the focus motor
PH85 :Zoom origin(on the RH’s “Home” side)
PH86 :Zoom origin(on the RH’s “Away” side)
PM80 :Focus motor

PM81 :Zoom motor

E.Reference
3-10. RCP2 board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II/PT-R4100)
X166 X163 X162 X161

X150
X160
U4 X159
U13 U14 X158

TEST
U15 ROM for debuging X157
U18 X156
X155
CPU DIP SW1
X154
OFF ON
HL 1-8
1
HL 9-16
U62
8 X153
HL 17-24
RESET
HL 25-32
ALTERA
X164
HL 33-40 PLL
X167
X151 X152
HL 41-42 HL 43-51
Connectors marked with tint are not used.

E.Reference
U4 : Program ROM (flash memory)
U13 : Program ROM (flash memory)
U14 : NV RAM (to write data for exposure conditions, error logs and timer settings)
U15 : User data, individual machine data (flash memory)
U18 : User data, individual machine data (flash memory)
X150 : Power supply (+5V, -5V)
X151 : I/F with the PIO-CTP board
X152 : I/F with the RB31 board
X153 : Secondary scanning motor’s control signal
X154 : I/F with the operation panel
X155 : Not used
X156 : PIF (RS-232C)
X157 : I/F (RS-232C) with the primary scanning motor
X158 : I/F (RS-232C) with the optical head
X159 : I/F (RS-232C) for remote maintenance
X160 : Not used
X161 : Temperature sensor (for machine interior)
X162 : AT unit
X163 : Not used (RS-232C)
X164 : Not used
X166 :Not used
X167 : Not used
RESET : Reset switch
DIPSW1 :
No.1 :Validates the command input from the terminals. (However, this setting
prevents the PT-R4XXX from communicating with the downloader and
the remote maintenance PC.)
No.7: Prevents updating of the machine setting data when the software version
is updated.
No.8: Allows the PT-R4XXX to start up in the Boot mode. (In this mode, only
firmware downloading can be performed.)
TEST : Short The ROM for debugging is used.

Open The Flash ROM is used.

E.Reference
3-11. RB31 board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
X105 X101
X100
X102
Test pattern
generation circuit
X106
3P
6P
1P
Interlace
control ROM
Test pattern
ROM
X103
7H
SW1
HL 1-50
X100 : Power supply (+5V)

X101 : I/F with the RCP board
X102 : I/F with the PIF
X103 : Beam output to the recording head
X105 : I/F with the SPX32
X106 : Not used
SW1 : Reset switch

E.Reference
3-12. SPX32 board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
X107
5D 2D
LED1-27

E.Reference
3-13. LTB16 board (PT-R4100)
X101
V5
X100
X102
Test pattern ROM
S6
Test pattern generating circuuit
M6
L10
SW
L6 Spiral compensation circuit
K2
K4
Memory read control X103

Memory write control
HL1-22
X100 :Power supply (+5V,5VE)

X101 :I/F with the RCP2 board
X102 :I/F with the PIF
X103 :Beam output to the recording head (RH).
SW1 :Reset SW
L6,L10 :Program ROM for hardwares

E.Reference
3-14. PIO-PTR4(2) board (PT-R4300/4100)
X111 X112
TP1
X110
TP2 TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
X122
X113
TP7 TP9
TP8 TP10
X114
TP11 TP14 X116
TP18
X125 TP15
U32
TP19
X115
1 2
ALTERA
X118 TP20
TP21 J2
TP22 TP24
LED1
19 20
TP25 ALTERA
TP26
TP27
LED7
LED8 TP28 TP30
X120 TP34
X117 TP33
TP32
VR1 X119 X124
TP31

E.Reference
X110 : Power supply (+5V, +5VE, +-15V, +-15VE, +24V, +24VE)

X113 : Input signal (PH58, PH59, S1)
X114 : I/F with the CON-PTR4 board
X115 : Not used (for the auto loader)
X116 : For debugging
X117 : Primary scanning motor positioning signal output
X118 : Test pin for debugging
X119 : I/F for controlling the primary scanning motor
X120 : Encoder input
X122 : Blower vacuum pressure sensor input (digital signal)
X124 : Loose plate detection sensor input (analog signal)
X125 : Servo pack power supply (for the primary scanning motor) ON output
U32 : Program ROM for hardware

E.Reference
PIO-PTR4 board (PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
X111 X112
TP1
X110
TP2 TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
X122
TP7 TP9
TP8 TP10
X114
TP11 TP14 X116
TP18
X125 TP15
U32
TP19
X115
1 2
ALTERA
X118 TP20
TP21 J2
TP22 TP24
LED1
19 20
TP25 ALTERA
TP26
TP27
LED7
LED8 TP28 TP30
X120 TP34
X117 TP33
TP32
VR1 X119 X124
TP31

E.Reference
X110 : power supply (+5V, +5VE, +-15V, +-15VE, +24V, +24VE)

X114 : I/F with the CON-PTR4 board
X115 : Not used (for the auto loader)
X116 : For debugging
X117 : Primary scanning motor positioning signal output
X118 : Test pin for debugging
X119 : I/F for controlling the primary scanning motor
X120 : Encoder input
X122 : Blower vacuum pressure sensor input (digital signal)
X124 : Loose plate detection sensor input (analog signal)
X125 : Servo pack power supply (for the primary scanning motor) ON output
U32 : Program ROM for hardware

E.Reference
3-15. CON-PTR4 board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II/PT-R4100)
X23
LED2A LED A TP5 TP3
LED4A LED3H
TP2 LED5A
LED6A TP6 TP7 TP8
LED8A LED7A
LED 0A LED9A TP9 FU10 JP3
LED7H LED A
LED 3A FU2
LED 4A
FU9
LED 6A LED 5A C07
LED 4H LED 3H
LED20A LED 9A
LED22A LED2 A C04
LED2H LED H
LED4H LED3A
LED 5H CB1 FU11 C06
LED 6H
LED30A LED29A C03 C02
LED32A LED3 A C05
LED34A LED33A CO9
LED30H LED29H C08
LED32H LED 7H
LED42A LED2 H
LED44H LED43A TP4
LED24H LED23H CP1
LED26H LED25H
LED24A LED23A
CA4
JP1
JP2
CA1
CH1
CA2
CA3
X11 CS1
CP2
TP1

E.Reference
CA1 : PH11-1A, PH11-2A, PH10A, PH30A, PH31A, PH21, PH24-1, PH24-2, PH27-1,
PH27-2, PH27-3
CA2 : PH56, PH57, PH61A, PH61H, PH63, PH62, PH70
CA3 : PH50, PH52, PH54, PH53, PH55
CA4 : PH29A, PH29H, PH51, LS28-1 to LS28-6, PD_READY, PD_ERROR, AT-ON
CH1 : PH11-1H, PH11-2H, PH10H, PH20, PH30H, PH31H, LS4H, LS4A, PH2
CS1 : LS57-1, LS57-2, LS57-3, LS58-1, LS58-2, SW58
CP1 : M60-1, M60-2, M60-3, M60-4, M60-5, M60-6
CP2 : SB60-1, SB60-2, SB60-3, SB60-4, SB60-5, SB60-6
CB1 : Drum suction blower ON/OFF, Inverter reset, Inverter alarm (INVALM)
Fan for the inverter (spare)
CO1 : M11A, M20, M30A, M24, M11H, M30H
CO2 : M52, SL53, SL59-1, SL59-2, SL58
CO3 : Blower pump, Alarm buzzer, Gas suction blower
CO47 : M50
CO5 : M61
CO6 : M2
CO7 : M55
CO8 : Not used
CO9 : Not used
FU1 : Nip rollor drive motor M52

FU2 : Balancer drive motor (Away) M11A
FU3 : Trailing edge clamp arm drive motor M20
FU4 : Leading edge clamp open/close motor (Away) M30A
FU5 : Trailing edge clamp hook drive motor M24
FU6 : Balancer drive motor (Home) M11H
FU7 : Leading edge clamp open/close motor (Home) M30H
FU8 : Motor for operation door M58 (PT-R4300)
FU9 : DC motor for raising/lowreing the transport path M55
FU10 : Solenoid for transport unit
Rotary solenoid for shutter SL53
Transport clutch on the plate loading side SL59-1
Transport clutch on the plate unloading side SL59-2
Operation door solenoid SL58 (PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
FU11 : Vacuum pump M41
“An automatic return type over-current protection element”
LED1A : PH11-1A (Balancer pin position detection sensor 1 (Away))

LED1H : PH11-1H (Balancer pin position detection sensor 1 (Home))
LED2A : PH11-2A (Balancer pin sensor 2 (Away))
LED2H : PH11-2H (Balancer pin sensor 2 (Home))
LED3A : Processor ready (PD_READY)
LED3H : PH20 (Trailing edge clamp arm origin sensor
LED4A : PH21 (Trailing edge clamp arm end point sensor)
LED4H : Processor error (PD_ERROR)
LED5A : PH24-1 (Trailing edge clamp open/close position sensor 1)
LED6A : PH24-2 (Trailing edge clamp open/close position sensor 2)
E.Reference
LED7A : PH10A (Balancer weight detection sensor (Away))
LED7H : PH10H (Balancer weight detection sensor (Home))
LED8A : LS28-1 to LS28-6 (Hook lever switch) (PT-R4000 S/N35 or lower)
LED9A : PH27-1 (Trailing edge clamp presence detection sensor 1)
LED13A : PH30A (Leading edge clamp open/close origin sensor (Away))
LED13H : PH30H (Leading edge clamp open/close origin sensor (Home))
LED14A : PH31A (Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Away))
LED14H : PH31H (Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Home))
LED15A : PH50 (Plate pass sensor on the plate-loading path)
LED15H : LS4H (Scanning start point limiter)
LED16A : PH52 (Nip rollor origin sensor)
LED16H : LS4A (Scanning end point limiter)
LED17H : PH2 (Scanning origin sensor)
LED19A : PH54 (Plate pass sensor on the plate transport path)
LED20A : PH53 (Shutter origin sensor)
LED21A : PH55 (Transport path change lower limit sensor)
LED21H : PH51 (Sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of the plate)
LED22A : PH56 (Transport path change upper limit sensor)
LED22H : Reserve input
LED23A : SB60-5 (Punch 5 origin sensor)
LED23H : SB60-1 (Punch 1 origin sensor)
LED24A : SB60-6 (Punch 6 origin sensor)
LED29A : PH61A (Sensor for detecting the Away side edge of a plate for side alignment)
LED29H : PH61H (Sensor for detecting the Home side edge of a plate for side alignment)
LED30A : PH63 (Side alignment origin sensor)
LED30H : PH62 (Plate edge detection sensor for the punch unit)
LED31A : PH70 (AT unit plate detection sensor)
LED32A : LS56 (Operation door interlock switch)
LED33A : Operation door interlock switch
LED34A : Operation door interlock switch
LED42A : PH57 (Transport path punch position sensor)
LED43A : PH29A (Plate top side detection sensor (Away))
LED44A : PH29H (Plate top side detection sensor (Home))

E.Reference
3-16. Laser Head CPU board (PT-R4300, PT-R4000, PT-R4000II)
X819 X820
+15V AGND 24GA +24VB
-5V 24GB
X813 X811 X815 X814 X810
-15V X812 DGND +24VA
-5VG
+5V JP1-7
CLK1 CLK2
DSW1
ALTERA
U2
VR2 VR1 SW1
HL2 HL1
U2 : DATA ROM
X810 : Image data from the RB31 board

X811 : RS232C for command communication
X812 : Calibration sensor input
X813 : Laser diode block sensor input (from the laser head relay board)
X814 : Focus motor drive output
X815 : Zoom motor drive output
X819 : Mother board connection
SW1 : CPU reset switch
VR1 : For the temperature sensor input adjustment (Resolution)
VR2 : For the temperature sensor input adjustment (Offset values)
JP1 : Switches the methods for resetting the CPU

JP2 : Switches the methods for command communication

E.Reference
Laser Head CPU3 board (PT-R4100)
X819 X820
AGND 24GA +24VB
24GB
X813 X811 X815 X814 X810
-5VG X812 +24VA
DGND
-5V +5V
+15V
CLK1 CLK2
-15V DSW1
ALTERA
U2
VR2 VR1 SW1
HL2 HL1
U2 : DATA ROM
X810 : Image data from the RB31 board

X811 : RS232C for command communication
X812 : Calibration sensor input
X813 : Laser diode block sensor input (from the laser head relay board)
X814 : Focus motor drive output
X815 : Zoom motor drive output
SW1 : CPU reset switch
VR1 : For the temperature sensor input adjustment (Resolution)
VR2 : For the temperature sensor input adjustment (Offset values)

E.Reference
3-17. Laser Head Driver board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II/PT-R4100)
X832 X833
+24GP AGND DGND

+5V
+15V -15V -5VG -5V
+24V
X831
VR2 VR1
X830
X830 : LD drive signal output

X831 : Peltier element control signal connection
X832 : Mother ba\oard connection
X833 : Mother ba\oard connection
VR1 : For adjusting the Peltier element’s control voltage to 0V

VR2 : For adjusting the Peltier element’s control voltage to it’s maximum
value
Drive board and it’s supporting LD channels (PT-R4300/4000II/4000)

Driver board 1 :26, 19, 12, 05, 06, 13, 20, 27
Driver board 2 :28, 21, 14, 07, 00, 15, 22, 29
Driver board 3 :08, 01, 30, 23, 16, 09, 02, 31
Driver board 4 :24, 17, 10, 03, 04, 11, 18, 25
(The driver boards are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4, from
the one closest to the CPU board)
Drive board and it’s supporting LD channels (PT-R4100)

Driver board 1 :12, 05, 13, 06, 15, 00, 07, 14
Driver board 3 :08, 01, 09, 02, 04, 11, 03, 10
(The driver boards are numbered 1 and 3 from the one closest to the
CPU board)

E.Reference
3-18. Laser Head Mother board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
X808 X801 X800
X802 X803 X807 X806 X804 X805
X819 X820
X832-1 X833-1
X832-2 X833-2
X832-3 X833-3
X832-4 X833-4
X800 : LD drive power supply (-5V)

X801 : Power supply input for substrate control
X802 : Cooler fan’s power supply for Peltier element
X803 : Fan power supply (for cooling the driver board)
X804 : Fan power supply (for cooling the driver board) (Not used)
X806 : Head cover switch input
X807 : Power supply control output for LD drive
X808 : Power supply input for a peltier drive
X819_X820 : For CPU board

X832-1_X833-1 : For driver 1 board

E.Reference
Laser Head Mother board (PT-R4100)
X808 X801 X800
X802 X803 X807 X806 X804 X805
X819 X820
X832-1 X833-1
X832-3 X833-3
X800 : LD drive power supply (-5V)

X801 : Power supply input for substrate control
X802 : Cooler fan’s power supply for Peltier element
X804 : Fan power supply (for cooling the driver board) (Not used)
X806 : Head cover switch input
X807 : Power supply control output for LD drive
X808 : Power supply input for a peltier drive
X819_X820 : For CPU3 board


E.Reference
3-19. Laser Head Relay board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-r4000II)
LD1
X840
X844
X849
X843
X842
X841
TH1
X845 X847 X848
XCH04 XCH11 XCH18 XCH25
XCH03 XCH10 XCH17 XCH24 XCH31

E.Reference
X841 : LD drive signal 1 input

X840 : Sensor signal output (to CPU)
X849 : Socket for inserting the short-circuit connector to prevent static
electricity
LD1 : -5V power supply monitor
X845 : Temperature sensor input for the LD block

X847 : Sensor input for detecting tha Fin temperature on the Peltier unit
X848 : Sensor input for detecting dew condensation in the LD block
XCH00 to XCH31 : LD (laser diode) channels

E.Reference
Laser Head Relay board (PT-R4100)
LD1
X840
X849
X843
X841
TH1
X845 X847 X848
XCH04 XCH11
XCH03 XCH10
XCH02 XCH09
XCH01 XCH08 XCH15
XCH00 XCH07 XCH14
XCH06 XCH13
XCH05 XCH12

E.Reference

X840 : Sensor signal output (to CPU3)
X849 : Socket for inserting the short-circuit connector to prevent static
electricity
LD1 : -5V power supply monitor
X845 : Temperature sensor input for the LD block

X847 : Sensor input for detecting tha Fin temperature on the Peltier unit
X848 : Sensor input for detecting dew condensation in the LD block
XCH00 to XCH15 : LD (laser diode) channels

E.Reference
3-20. Laser Diode Array Block (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
Ch11 Ch25
Ch4 Ch18
Ch31
Ch0
Ch5 Ch19
Ch12 Ch26

E.Reference
Laser Diode Array Block (PT-R4100)
Ch4 Ch11
Ch15
Ch0
Ch5
Ch12

E.Reference
4. Maintenance software RMLight4
4-1.Outline
The RMLight4 maintenance software is installed in the following machines to perform data
downloading and uploading.
*PT-R8600 *PT-R4300
*PT-R8000II *PT-R4000II
*PT-R8100 *PT-R4100
*PT-R8000 *PT-R4000
The RMLight maintenance software that has been used for the PT-R8000 and PT-R4000
cannot be used with the PT-R8600, PT-R8000II, PT-R4000 (Ver. 4.00 or later), PT-R4000II,
PT-R4300 or PT-R4100.
4-2.Requirements
1) Terminal
Terminal environment
OS: Windows 95 or Windows 98
2) Cable
Cable specification
Specification : RS232C straight cable (Normal)
Model : D-sub9P plug, D-sub9P plug
Connection : All
3) RMLight4 maintenance software for PT-R

RMLight4.exe, RMLight.cfg
CATION!
The RMLight.cfg file is a cfg file for RMLight4 and is prepared for each machine type.
When using the RMLight.cfg file for another machine type, change the contents of
the file as noted below.
[ID]
Product="PT-RXXXX"
Vendor="SCREEN"
Protectcode="SUPERSONIC"
For PT-R4000 For PT-R8000

Product = “PT-R4000” Product = “PT-R8000”
For PT-R4000II For PT-R8000II

E.Reference
4-3.Terminal setting
Terminal setting is not necessary as it is set automatically.
4-4.Installation of RMLight4
1) Prepare the following two files. (Total: 49 kbyte)
RMLight4.exe, RMLight.cfg
CATION!
The RMLight.cfg file is a cfg file for RMLight4.
2) Save the above two files in the same directory on the terminal.
4-5.Connecting the terminal to the main unit
1) Connect the communication cable to the communication port of the terminal.
2) Connect the communication cable to the “PC” port, which is circled in the figure below.
Rear side of the main unit(PT-R4XXX)

E.Reference
4-6.Procedure for downloading the PT-R firmware
CATION!
1. Confirm that all DIP switches on the RCP board are off.
2. When the panel data is also downloaded at the same time, first download the panel
data.
3. Be sure to perform downloading while the main unit panel displays the following
screen, which appears immediately after the power is supplied to the main unit.
0101
P T- R 4 X X X
'01.05.01
START V1.00
1) Prepare the following PT-R4XXX firmware files. There are two files for the PT-R4300 and
PT-R4000II and one file for the PT-R4000.
For PT-R4300 (Ver. 1.00, As of May 7, 2002)
F43_100.dat: Main firmware
S43_100.dat: Messages
For PT-R4000II (Ver. 4.03, As of April 4, 2002)
Fir4_403.dat: Main firmware
Str4_403.dat: Messages
For PT-R4000 (Ver. 3.05, As of April 4, 2002)
Fir4_305.dat: Main firmware
2) Execute RMLight4.exe. The window shown in step 3 appears.
3) Upload UserData and MachData by referring to ”8-2 Procedure for data upload”.

E.Reference
4) After UserData and MachData have been uploaded, click Download in the window below.
5) Select the data to be downloaded and click the Open button. The window shown in step 6
appears.
The figure above is an example of the PT-R4300 Ver. 1.00.

As mentioned earlier, there are two firmware files for the PT-R4000 (Ver. 4.00 or later) and the
PT-R4000II. You can install either file first.
The PT-R4000 requires one file only.
6) Click OK to start downloading of the selected data.
During downloading, the following window is displayed.

E.Reference
The following screen is displayed in the main unit panel during downloading.
7) When the data has been downloaded, the following window appears. Click OK to display
the window shown in step 8.
PT-R4300 Ver. 1.00

F43_100.dat (Approx. 12 min.)
S43_100.dat (Approx. 3 min.)
8) When the following window appears, turn the power supply to the main unit off and then on
again.
9) For the PT-R4000 (Ver. 4.00 or later) and the PT-R4000II, download the other file by
following from step 4 onwards.
Download for the PT-R4000 has been completed.
10) Download UserData and MachData that were uploaded in step 3 as necessary by referring to
“4-8-3 Procedure for data download”.

E.Reference
4-7.Procedure for downloading the PT-R panel data

CATION!
2. When the panel data is also downloaded at the same time, first download the panel
data.
3. Be sure to perform downloading while the main unit panel displays the following
screen, which appears immediately after the power is supplied to the main unit.
0101
P T- R 4 X X X
'01.05.01
START V1.00
1) Prepare the following file for the PT-R panel data.

For PT-R4000 (Ver. 4.00, As of May 7, 2002)
PanelDif_v506_v500.dat
3) Click Download in the window below. The window shown in step 4 appears.

E.Reference
appears.
The figure above is an example of the PT-R4000 Ver. 3.01.
5) Click OK to start downloading of the selected data.

E.Reference
Download time
PT-R4000 Ver. 3.01: Approx. 4 min.
again.

E.Reference
4-8.Uploading or downloading the PT-R’s machine specific value data
4-8-1.Data types that can be uploaded or downloaded

Exposure condition settings, error logs, and consumable timer data cannot be up-
loaded.
CATION!
The NV RAM data (exposure conditions, error logs, and consumables timer) cannot be
uploaded.
To transfer the NV RAM data, refer to page C-72.
1) UserData
User data
· Printing machine setting (1 to 15)
· Plate setting (1 to 15)
· Plate type setting (1 to 15, 30 to 45)
· Punch data (punch name and “Set punch data” setting in the Service Maintenance screen)
2) MachData
The data saved in the following menus of the Service Maintenance screen.
· Initialize data / Select brand
· Machine option select
· Input parameter / Set Correction data
· Input parameter / Drum base position
· Input parameter / Punch adjust
· Input parameter / Calibration position
· Input parameter / Set misc. data
· Input parameter / Set resolution
· Input parameter / Set weight
· Input parameter / RH parameter / Auto calibration
3) HeadData
A binary file that is composed of the three data types (HeadData_CPU, HeadData_DRV1,
and HeadData_DRV2) described in 4, 5, and 6 below.
The recording head data of the PT-R4300, PT-R4000, PT-R4000II, PT-R8000, or PT-R8000II
are saved in HeadData.
Only the PT-R8600 can save each datum individually.

E.Reference
7) LogList
A list of the dates and times when the sequence log data Log 0 to Log 23 described in 8
below are obtained. A sample LogList is shown below.
0 08/28 08:47:00
1 08/27 16:21:01
2 08/27 16:13:51
3 08/27 15:00:42
4 08/27 14:09:34
5 08/27 13:45:45
6 08/27 12:18:03
7 08/24 15:46:00
8 08/23 17:19:00
9 32767 byte
10 08/23 16:44:17
11 empty
12 empty
13 32767 byte
14 08/23 15:41:00
15 08/23 13:51:00
16 08/23 09:52:00
17 08/23 08:54:00
18 32767 byte
19 08/22 13:22:00
20 08/17 10:53:27
21 08/17 10:14:58
22 08/16 18:16:21
23 empty
8) Log 0 to Log 23
Sequence log data. A maximum of 23 log data can be stored in the PT-R’s memory. Note
that the size of each log data is 33 kbyte.

E.Reference
4-8-2.Procedure for data upload
CATION!
2. Be sure to perform uploading while the main unit panel displays the following screen,
which appears immediately after the power is supplied to the main unit.
0101
P T- R 4 X X X
'01.05.01
START V1.00
2) Click Upload in the window below. The window shown in step 3 appears.
3) Select the data to be uploaded in the following window and click OK.
For data types, refer to the previous section (8-1). The window shown in step 4 appears.

E.Reference
4) Select the directory in which the data is to be saved, enter the file name, and then click the
Save button. The window shown in step 5 appears.
Default file name: “type of data”_“date”.dat

The sample window above is displayed when UserData is uploaded.
5) Click OK in the following window to start uploading of the data.
During uploading, the following window is displayed.
The following screen is displayed in the main unit panel during uploading.

E.Reference
6) When the data has been uploaded, the following window appears.
Upload time of each data

- UserData: Approx. 1.5 min.
- MachData: Approx. 30 sec.
- HeadData: Approx. 2.5 min.
- LogList: Approx. 10 sec.
- Log 0 to Log 23: Approx. 1 min. for each
For PT-R8600 only

-HeadData_CPU: Approx. 1 min.
-HeadData_DRV1: Approx. 1 min.
-HeadData_DRV2: Approx. 1 min.
CATION!
Do not rewrite or change the uploaded files.
When a file is downloaded, RMLight checks the file and confirms the type of data, then
automatically determines where to save the data.

E.Reference
4-8-3.Procedure for data download

CATION!
2. Be sure to perform uploading while the main unit panel displays the following screen,
which appears immediately after the power is supplied to the main unit.
0101
P T- R 4 X X X
'01.05.01
START V1.00
3. Do not rewrite or change the uploaded files.

When a file is downloaded, RMLight checks the file and confirms the type of data,
then automatically determines where to save the data.
2) Click Download in the window below. The window shown in step 3 appears.

E.Reference
appears.
The sample window above is displayed when UserData is downloaded.
4) Click OK to start downloading.

E.Reference
- UserData: Approx. 1.5 min.

- MachData: Approx. 30 sec.
- HeadData: Approx. 2.5 min.
For PT-R8600 only

-HeadData_CPU: Approx. 2 min.
-HeadData_DRV1: Approx. 30 sec.
-HeadData_DRV2: Approx. 30 sec.
again.

E-82
FU1
1φ AC200-240V
0.5A
50/60Hz
LS57-1 S1
LS56
U9(24V/30W) LS57-2
XT0 LS57-3
LD Driver
LS57-4
U6(5V/300W)
Main Switch S1 RC KA1 KA3
S0
Head CPU
Surge Protector Board AC Servo Driver LS57-1： Rear cover interlock switch
LS57-2： Front cover interlock switch
KA2 LS57-3： Home cover interlock switch
LS57-4： Away cover interlock switch
SRGE LS56： Operation door interlock switch
S1： Maintenance key switch
E1A
24V Head
U4(24V/300W) Sensor,Limit Switch,Panel
Fan
E.Reference
XT1
U5(24V/300W) Actuator
-15V
Circuit Protector U3(15V/75W)
QF1 KA3
15A
15A
PIO,Temperature sensor
KA1 +15V
U2(15V/75W)
5. Power supply and interlocks (for PT-R4300/4100)
Noise Filtter
Z1
5V
RCP2,RB31,PIO
U1(5V/100W)
5V
CON,Head CPU

F. Error list
F.Error list PT-R4300 : Ver1.0X
1. Error list (PT-R4300 : Ver1.0X)
Ex101 : Nip roller does not ascend.

Ex102 : Nip roller does not descend.
Ex103 : Transport unit does not ascend.
Ex104 : Transport unit does not descend.
Ex105 : Trail clamp arm does not ascend.
Ex106 : Trail clamp arm does not descend.
Ex107 : Squeeze roller does not descend.
Ex108 : Squeeze roller does not ascend.
Ex109 : Trail clamp cannot be locked. PH24-1/2 or M24 is illegal.
Ex10a : Trail clamp cannot be unlocked. PH24-1/2 or M24 is illegal.
Ex10b : Balancer drive pin cannot be initialized.
Ex10c : The both of Home and Away side drive pin for the balancer can not be pulled
out.
Ex10d : The both of Home and Away side drive pin for the balancer can not be inserted.)
Ex10e : Bar for releasing the lead clamp does not ascend.
Ex10f : Bar for releasing the lead clamp does not descend.
Ex110 : Shutter does not open.
Ex111 : Shutter does not close.
Ex112 : Plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter than the set value.
Ex113 : When the plate is unloaded, the plate pass sensor (PH54-2) does not switch to
ON.
Ex114 : Not bring down squeeze at loading.
Ex115 : Plate size (in the Y direction) is longer than the set value.
Ex116 : Servo status is illegal.
Ex117 : Servo status is error.
Ex118 : Servo alarm.
Ex11a : Drum speed is set beyond the permitted rate of the servo controller.
Ex11b : Current drum's encoder pulse is beyond 4000.
Ex11c : Error has occurred during drum positioning.
Ex11d : When the clamp is locked, some tail clamps are detected on the clamp arm, or
when the clamp is unlocked, some tail clamps are not detected on the clamp
arm.
Ex11e : Drum's encoder pulse is beyond the permitted range after drum positioning.
Ex11f : Plate cannot be transferred into the transport unit.
Ex120 : Home side balancer pin cannot be detected before insertion
Ex121 : Home side balancer pin cannot be detected before pulled out (The balancer is
not moving).
Ex122 : Clamp arm and squeeze roller do not descend.
Ex123 : Trail clamp is half-locked.
Ex124 : The plate passing-sensor for unloading (PH54) does not switch to ON.
Ex125 : Time-out error has occurred when the squeeze roller ascends and clamp cam
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL F-1
PT-R4300 : Ver1.0X F.Error list
descends simultaneously.
Ex126 : There was no plate to move to the shutter.
Ex127 : Servo controller does not enter the "Ready" status.
Ex128 : The balancer search sensor has not detected a balancer.
Ex129 : Error has occurred on the Home side of the alignment plate (while the alignment
plate is returning to its origin).
Ex12a : Error has occurred on the Away side of the alignment plate (while the alignment
Ex12b : Error has occurred on the Home and Away sides of the alignment plate (while
the alignment plate is returning to its origin).
Ex12c : Error has occurred on the Home side of the alignment plate (while alignment is
performed).
Ex12d : Error has occurred on the alignment plate (while alignment is performed).
Ex12e : Error has occurred on the Home and Away sides of the alignment plate (when
alignment is performed).
Ex12f : Plate has not transferred to the punch unit.
Ex130 : Plate does not leave the punch unit.
Ex131 : Time-out error has occurred when Punch 1 is activated.
Ex139 : After a plate is transferred to the gripper clamp, the plate detection sensor
(PH29H/A) does not switch to ON.
Ex13a : When the clamp arm is lowered, the sensor (to detect whether the clamp arm
pins are hooked on the clamp properly) has been turned ON.(Home side)
Ex13b : The specified encoder pulse for the drum is beyond 4000.
Ex13c : The transport unit's Away side is not moving during its operation.
Ex13d : The transport unit's Home side is not moving during its operation.
Ex13e : Error has occurred on the Home side of the alignment plate (while the alignment
plate is finely returning to its origin).
Ex13f : Error has occurred on the Away side of the alignment plate (while the alignment
Ex140 : Error has occurred on the Home and Away side of the alignment plate (while the
alignment plate is returning to its origin).
Ex141 : A plate remains in the transport unit when the machine received a request
command.
Ex142 : A plate remains in the transport unit during error handling.
Ex143 : A plate remains on the discharge table in the transport unit.
Ex144 : A plate remains on the insertion table in the transport unit.
F-2 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Ex145 : Plate cannot be moved onto the discharge table during initialization.
Ex146 : Plate cannot be moved onto the insertion table.
Ex147 : Balancer search operation has not been completed properly.
Ex148 : When the transport unit descends, only the Home side Down sensor in the
transport unit is turned ON.
Ex149 : When the transport unit descends, only the Away side Down sensor in the
Ex14a : When the transport unit ascends, only the Home side UP sensor in the transport
unit is turned ON.
Ex14b : When the transport unit ascends, only the Away side UP sensor in the transport
unit is turned ON.
Ex14c : Front, rear or side cover is open.(Some interlock switches are OFF.)
Ex14d : A fuse on the relay board was blown. (home)
Ex14e : Thumbscrew is not tightened securely on the rear cover. (The servo stop switch
is ON.)
Ex14f : A plate exists on the discharge table in the transport unit during initialization.
Ex150 : A plate exists on the insertion table in the transport unit during initialization.
Ex151 : Number of balancers is not sufficient. (The number of balancers checked by the
balancer search sensor was one, two or three for both the Home and Away
sides.)
Ex152 : Clamp arm is not in the UP position.
Ex153 : A fuse on the relay board was blown. (away)
Ex154 : Blower is turned off, but signal does not change.
Ex155 : Tail clamps are missing during initialization.
Ex156 : The size check program of the cetering function detects that the measured plate
size is longer than the expected one.
size is shorter than the expected one.
Ex158 : Both of Home and Away size check sensors are on before starting the centering
program.
Ex159 : Auto-loader is stopped by a interlock OFF.
Ex15a : This hardware matching is illegal.
Ex15b : The balancer is not moved to the target position.
Ex15c : The drum can not be spun up because the Home-Upper sensor of the Lead
clamp release bar is off.
Ex15d : During plate loading, double plate loading is detected.
Ex15e : The loaded plate is detected to be floating while drum spinning.
Ex15f : The drum cannot be spun up because the Upper sensor of the clamp arm is off.
Ex160 : The drum can not be spined up because the Home-Upper sensor of the clamp
arm is off.
Ex161 : The drum cannot be spun up because the balancing pin on the (Away side) is
not in the waiting position.
Ex162 : The drum cannot be spun up because the balancing pin on the (Home side) is

Ex163 : The drum cannot be spun up because the Upper sensor of the squeeze roller is
off.
Ex164 : The drum can not be spun up because the Away-Upper sensor of the Lead
Ex165 : The drum is rotated to the "lead clamp position", but the status of the Servo
controller (SVC) has not changed to "Ready".
Ex166 : The drum is rotated to the "tail clamp position", but the status of the Servo
Ex167 : The drum is rotated to the "squeeze position", but the status of the Servo
Ex168 : The drum is rotated to the "balance pin before inserted", but the status of the
Servo controller (SVC) has not changed to "Ready".
Ex169 : The drum is rotated to the "balance pin after inserted", but the status of the
Ex16a : The drum is rotated to the "pick up tail clamp position", but the status of Servo
Ex16b : The drum is rotated to the "plate removal position", but the status of the Servo
Ex16c : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the lead clamp.
Ex16d : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the tail clamp.
Ex16e : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the squeeze.
Ex16f : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the balance pin insertion.
Ex170 : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the balance pin pull out.
Ex171 : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the picking up tail clamp.
Ex172 : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the plate removal.
Ex173 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Lead clamp position)
Ex174 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Tail clamp position)
Ex175 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Squeeze position)
Ex176 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Balance pin before
inserted)
Ex177 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Balance pin after
inserted)
Ex178 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Pick up tail clamp)
Ex179 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Plate removal)
Ex17a : After verifying the removal of the plate, press the OK button.
When the OK button is pressed, initialization begins.
Ex17b : PH62A-sensor is illegal. The sensor detects a plate during initialization.
Ex17c : PH29H-sensor is illegal. The PH29H-sensor does not turn ON during
initialization.
Ex17d : PH61H-sensor is illegal. The sensor detects a plate during initialization.
Ex17e : PH61A-sensor is illegal. The sensor detects a plate during initialization.
Ex17f : PH29A-sensor is illegal. The PH29A-sensor does not turn ON during

initialization.
Ex180 : Drum does not start rotating at high-speed.
Ex181 : Drum does not rotate at the specified high-speed.
Ex182 : Error has occurred after the drum rotated at the specified high-speed.
Ex183 : Drum cannot be stopped when rotating at high-speed.
Ex184 : Drum operation is stopped with an emergency stop command.
Ex185 : Drum operation is stopped with an abort command.
Ex186 : Drum's vacuum pressure is not sufficient. Please confirm connection of the
blower-hose, or the Vacuum-sensor is illegal.
Ex187 : Error has occurred on the blower, or the power supply of the blower is OFF.
Ex188 : Drum operation is stopped due to low pressure in the drum.
Ex189 : Door is open.
Ex18a : Door does not open.
Ex18b : Transport tasks: Parameter error
Ex18c : Error has occured on the blower. Please turn off this machine, and turn on after
waiting 10 seconds. Also, confirm whether or not the connector doesn't come
off.
Ex18d : The drum can not be spun up, because some of the interlock switches are OFF,
or some of the actuator's sensors are damaged, or the blower is damaged.
Ex18e : Door does not open, because some of the interlock switches are OFF(front
cover or rear cover is open).
Ex190 : Clamp arm does not descend.(Home side)
Ex191 : Clamp arm does not descend.(Away side)
Ex192 : Clamp arm does not ascend.(Home side)
Ex193 : Clamp arm does not ascend.(Away side)
Ex194 : When the clamp arm is lowered, the sensor (to detect whether the clamp arm
pins are hooked on the clamp properly) has been turned ON.(Away side)
Ex195 : Trail clamp cannot be locked.(Home side)
Ex196 : Trail clamp cannot be locked.(Away side)
Ex197 : Trail clamp cannot be unocked.(Home side)
Ex198 : Trail clamp cannot be unocked.(Away side)
Ex199 : Balancer drive pin cannot be inserted.(Home side)
Either of PH11-1H,PH11-2H or M11H is illegal.
Ex19a : Balancer drive pin cannot be inserted.(Away side)
Either of PH11-1A,PH11-2A or M11A is illegal.
Ex19b : Balancer drive pin cannot be pulled out.(Home side)
Ex19c : Balancer drive pin cannot be pulled out.(Away side)
Ex19d : Balancer pin cannot be detected before insertion.(Away side)
Ex19e : Balancer pin cannot be detected before pull out (the balancer is not
moving).(Away side)
Ex19f : The balancer search sensor has not detected a balancer.(Home side)

Ex1a0 : The balancer search sensor has not detected a balancer.(Away side)
Ex1a1 : Number of balancers is not sufficient. (Home side)
Ex1a2 : Number of balancers is not sufficient. (Away side)
Ex1a3 : Soft-interlock or drum-stop swtich is OFF during drum spining.
Ex1a4 : The cover-interlock switch is OFF during drum spining.
Ex1a5 : The interlock switch-3 is OFF during drum spining.
Ex1a6 : A plate cannot be carried into the transport unit.
Ex1a7 : A plate cannot be carried to sensor PPH50-2.
Ex1a8 : Auto-loader is not turned on, or some interlock switches on Auto-loader are
OFF. Please turn on Auto-loader, or all interlock switch.
Ex1a9 : Cassete carrier was removed. Please set cassette carrier.
Ex1aa : The door of the cassette part is open.
Ex1ab : Maintenance-cover of Auto-loader was opend. Please clode
maintenance-cover.
Ex1ac : Bridge cover-2 was opened. Please clode bridge cover-2.
Ex1ad : An interleaf under a plate was detected. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is
shorter than the set value.
Ex1ae : An interleaf was detected on a plate. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter
than the set value.
Ex1b0 : Trail clamp is not detected on the clamp arm before the plate loading.
Ex1b1 : Trail clamp is detected on the clamp arm before the plate unloading.
Ex1b2 : Trail clamp cannot be set correctly.
Ex1b3 : This plate can't be transed. Because something error has occured when the
transfering to AT.
Ex1b4 : This plate can't be transed. Because trans path position is down.
Ex1b6 : The bridge-passing sensor does not turn OFF.(for Jig mode)
Ex1b7 : A plate remains on the plate detection sensor(PH70).
Ex1b8 : When detects the front of a plate, the detection area is not brought.
Ex1b9 : When detects the front of a plate, the detection of Home or Away is not brought.
Ex1ba : PH11-2H-sensor is illegal. The PH11-2H-sensor does not turn ON during
initialization.
Ex1bb : PH11-2A-sensor is illegal. The PH11-2A-sensor does not turn ON during
initialization.
Ex1c0 : Lead clamp release bar cannot be driven. Either PH30H or PH31H is illegal.
Ex1c1 : Lead clamp release bar cannot be driven. Either PH30A or PH31A is illegal.
Ex1c2 : Trans path cannot be driven. Either PH55, PH56, or PH57 is illegal.
Ex1c3 : Trans path cannot be driven. Either PH56, or, PH57 is illegal.
Ex1c6 : Trail clamp arm cannot be driven. Either PH20 or PH21 is illegal.
Ex1c7 : Trail clamp arm cannot be driven. Either PH20 or M20 is illegal.
Ex1c8 : An interleaf was detected under a plate.
Ex1c9 : When centering alignment is performed, the plate set position is out of range.

Ex1ca : Error has occured on the punching unit. The punch hole could not be opened
correctly.
Ex1cb : Opened shutter obstructs trans path driving.
Ex1cc : Trail clamp arm obstructs trans path driving.
Ex1cd : A plate remains in a maichine.
Ex1d0 : Transfer operation is halted with an abort command.
Ex1d1 : Transport tasks are being processed.
Ex1d2 : Transport tasks are not being processed.
Ex1d3 : Transport tasks: Message order error
Ex1d4 : Transport system is not initialized.
Ex1e0 : SVC user parameter breakdown
Ex1e1 : SVC user parameter setting error
Ex1e2 : SVC over-current
Ex1e3 : SVC detection of regenerative error
Ex1e4 : SVC postion error pulse overflow
Ex1e5 : SVC Main circuit voltage error detection
Ex1e6 : SVC overspeed
Ex1e7 : SVC overloaded (high load)
Ex1e8 : SVC overloaded (low load)
Ex1e9 : SVC stauts 99h
Ex1ea : SVC heat sink has overheated.
Ex1eb : SVC stauts b1h
Ex1ec : SVC is out of control.
Ex1ed : SVC phase error has been detected in the encoder.
Ex1ef : SVC A and B phase for the encoder has broke down.
Ex1f0 : SVC C phase for the encoder has broke down.
Ex1f1 : SVC some phases of power line is open.
Ex1f3 : SVC An instantaneous loss of power has occurred
Ex1f4 : SVC unknown error
Ex200 : Exposure operation is interrupted with an abort command.
Ex201 : Exposure processing task is now processing another command.
Ex202 : Cancellation was requested while processing was not being performed.
Ex203 : PGON is not asserted.
Ex204 : START signal is not asserted.
Ex205 : START signal is not negated.
Ex206 : Test pattern; Data is not transferred.
Ex207 : Test pattern; Data transfer is not completed.
Ex208 : Reset procedure for RB31 board is not completed.
Ex209 : The set value for the drum rotation speed is too large.
Ex20a : No plate edge is detected (when the plate edge sensor moves to the Away
side.)
Ex20b : No plate edge is detected (when the plate edge sensor is returning to the Home

side.)
Ex20c : Recording head has traveled beyond the limit (on the Away side).
Ex20d : Recording head has traveled beyond the limit (on the Home side).
Ex20e : Recording head positioning range error
Ex20f : Recording head has not been positioned at its origin. (Origin sensor does not
turn OFF.)
Ex210 : Recording head has not been positioned at its origin. (Origin sensor does not
turn ON.)
Ex211 : Emergency stop is requested for the secondary-scanning motor.
Ex212 : Secondary-scanning motor is deactivated with an abort command.
Ex213 : Secondary scanning motor is illegal.
Ex214 : Exposure in the secondary scanning direction exceeds the effective image
output range.
Ex215 : FPGA sequence error.
Ex216 : Time-out error has occurred when the secondary scanning motor is activated.
Ex217 : EZ search has not detected the ORG sensor.
Ex218 : EZ search has not detected the EZ sensor.
Ex219 : When the CAL sensor search was executed, the maximum light intensity was
less than 50 mW.
Ex21a : Light intensity at the measurement starting point was at maximum when the
CAL sensor search was executed.
Ex21b : Light intensity at the measurement end point was at maximum when the CAL
sensor search was executed.
Ex21c : Over travel at recording head's Home side when the CAL sensor search was
executed.
Ex21d : Test pattern parameter error
Ex21e : PGON signal is not negated.
Ex21f : Secorndary direction origin point setup procedure failure.(The calibrated origin
point is not the same as logical origin point)
Ex220 : After an image data transfer from RIP is interrupted, it isn't resumed.
Ex221 : Drum rotation error was detected. This plate will be unloaded because it could
not be exposed correctly.
Ex300 : Both of plate pad and paper pad are not in original point.
Ex301 : After an interleaf is removed, plate cannot be detected.
Ex302 : An interleaf was detected on a plate. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter
than the set value.
Ex303 : Plate pad cannot be initialized.
Ex304 : Plate pad cannot carry a plate.
Ex305 : While carring a plate, the plate pad dropped the plate.
Ex306 : Paper pad cannot be initialized.
Ex307 : Air pressure in the plate pad does not go down.
Ex308 : Air pressure in the paper pad does not go down.
Ex309 : PCL time-out error has occurred when plate pad was moved.

Ex30a : PCL time-out error has occurred when paper pad was moved.
Ex30b : Time-out error has occurred when plate pad was moved by stepping.
Ex30c : Time-out error has occurred when paper pad was moved by stepping.
Ex30d : A plate cannot be carried into the transport unit.
Ex30e : PH90 does not switch to ON while removing the interleaf.
Ex30f : PH90 does not switch to OFF while removing the interleaf.
Ex310 : Maintenance cover of auto-loader is open. Please close maintenance cover.
Ex311 : Bridge cover-2 of auto-loader is open. Please close bridge cover-2.
Ex312 : Cassette carrier is not set. Please set cassette carrier.
Ex313 : A plate remains in the bridge unit.
Ex314 : An interleaf remains in the paper exit.
Ex317 : Auto-loader is not turned on, or some interlock switches on Auto-loader are
Ex318 : A plate cannot be carried to the bridge-passing sensor.
Ex319 : The plate pad went down from the original point.
Ex31a : The paper pad went down from the original point.
Ex31b : Maintenance-cover of Auto-loader was opend. Please clode
maintenance-cover.
Ex31c : Bridge cover-2 was opened. Please clode bridge cover-2.
Ex31d : Door was opened. Please close the door.
Ex31e : Cassete carrier was removed. Please set cassette carrier.
Ex31f : The paper pad dropped the interleaf while carrying the it.
Ex320 : Plate pad dropped a plate before the plate pad reached the intermediate
sensor.
Ex321 : An interleaf in front of a plate was detected.
Ex322 : A plate remains on the sensor-2 of the bridge.
Ex323 : Intermediate sensor is OFF.
Ex324 : Power switch was turned off while Auto-loader was moving.
Ex325 : A plate cannot be carried to the intermediate sensor.
Ex326 : An interleaf under a plate was detected. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is
Ex327 : The bridge-passing sensor does not turn OFF.(for Jig mode)
Ex32c : The nip-roller for paper discharge cann't be opened.
Ex341 : The interlock switch-3 is OFF.
Ex344 : A fuse on the relay board at home side has blown.
Ex345 : A fuse on the relay board at away side has blown.

Ex360 : A plate remains on the bridge's sensor-1.
Ex361 : No plate exists on the bridge's sensor-3.
Ex363 : A plate size in the Y direction is too long when its transferring to the AT.
Ex364 : A plate size in the Y direction is too short when its transferring to the AT. Or an
interleaf in front of a plate was detected.
Ex365 : After the paper pad is descended, the metal sensor does not switch to ON.
Ex366 : Plate pad dropped the plate, before this initialize.
Ex367 : A teaching of plate size in the Y direction (1st) is finished.
Ex368 : A teaching of plate size in the Y direction (2nd) is finished.
Ex369 : This plate can't be transed. Because something error has occured when the
transfering to AT.
Ex36a : Air pressure in the plate pad does not go down after retry.
Ex36b : A plate remains on the insertion table in the transport unit.
Ex36c : This plate is judge as a paper during judgement operation.
Ex36d : This plate can't be transed. Because trans path position is down.
Ex380 : The door of the cassette part is open.
Ex381 : Time-out error has occurred when lift was initialized.
Ex382 : Time-out error has occurred when lift was moved.
Ex383 : Though the lift was initialized, the origin sensor is not ON.
Ex384 : The lift is not in the position where it is specified.
Ex385 : Already, there has been a cassette on the lift.
Ex386 : There are some cassettes which aren't being set properly.
Ex387 : MA-L can't be initialized because some cassettes are not in the lift or the
cassette properly.
Ex388 : There is no cassette in the specified cassette slot.
Ex389 : There is no cassette on the lift.
Ex38a : Lift has traveled beyond the limit (on the Up side).
Ex38b : Lift has traveled beyond the limit (on the Down side).
Ex38d : A cassette is already in the place to return a cassette.
Ex38e : A lift can't be raised and lowered because some cassettes are not in the lift or
the cassette properly.
Ex38f : Time-out error has occurred when a cassette was moved to cassette part.
Ex390 : Time-out error has occurred when a cassette was moved to lift.
Ex391 : Either plate pad or paper pad is not in original point.
Ex392 : An ineffective cassette number was indicated.
Ex393 : Cassette has traveled beyond the limit (on the Lift side).
Ex394 : Cassette has traveled beyond the limit (on the Cassette side).
Ex395 : MA-L can't be initialized because some cassettes can't be returned to the origin.
Ex396 : Though there is a cassette on the lift, the place to return the cassette isn't

vacant.
Ex397 : Though the movement of the lift was finished, the lift position sensor at the
target position is not on.
Ex398 : MA-L Servo alarm
Ex399 : Time-out error has occurred when arm was moved.
Ex39a : Time-out error has occurred when a cassette was moved to cassette part by
arm.
Ex39b : Arm jut-out sensor (LS210E) is off.
Ex39c : A cassette is in illegal position of the cassette slot.
Ex39d : Arm is not in original point.
Ex39e : SQ210A sensor is illegal.
Ex400 : Plate has already been loaded.
Ex401 : Plate has not been loaded.
Ex403 : Dump interleaves from the collection box.
Ex600 : Either the conveyor, processor, or stocker is not turned on, or is in the busy
status or error status.
Ex602 : The plate cannot be transferred into the AT unit.
Ex603 : The plate cannot be transferred completely into the AT unit.
Ex606 : Error
Ex607 : Busy
Ex608 : Error
Ex609 : Busy
Ex60a : Error
Ex60b : Busy
Ex60c : Error occurred in ATM while a plate was carried to ATM.
Ex80c : The result of the calculation "Initial value + increment value * (repetition - 1)"
exceeds the upper limit value.
Ex80d : (The result of the calculation "Exposure starting point + (pattern width + gap) *
(repetition - 1)" exceeds the plate size.
Ex80e : The specified plate is not linked with the printing-machine's data.
Ex80f : Perform initialization at the service screen.
Ex810 : No plate is set at inlet of transport unit.
Ex811 : Plate (printer) size specified by the host computer is not registered.
Ex812 : Image size specified by host computer is larger than allowable output image
size.
Ex813 : Current offset of printing machine settings cause image to extend off plate.
Ex814 : Current paper-position of printing machine settings cause image to extend
outside of allowable exposure area.
Ex816 : Some LD is nearing the end of its usable life.
Please contact our office or agency and ask to replace them.

Ex817 : There are some punch blocks, which have been used for more than the endur-
ance time.
Ex819 : It failed to read the cassette number.
It considers that the cassette number is No.1.
Ex81a : Some LD's cannot be calibrated to the target power. These LD's be calibrated to
lower target power.
Ex81b : Some LD's cannot be calibrated to the target power. Temporary to work half
channels of recording head.
Ex81c : Some LD's cannot exposed by setting power due to be calibrated to lower target
power.
Ex81d : The temperature of the environment is greater than 28degrees.
Ex81e : The temperature of the environment is less than 18degrees.
Ex81f : Sensor for the temperature of the environment has not been connected.
Ex820 : Trail clamps are nearing the end of its usable life.
Ex821 : Trail clamps have been used for more than the endurance time.
Ex822 : Backup/restore of the data on NVRAM can't be performed, because the Dip-Sw
2 is not on.
Ex823 : The backup of the data on NVRAM is not in Flash-Memory.
Ex824 : Calibration must be done because there is some LD which doesn't reach the
target power.
But, LD calibration can not processed because temperature of LD block is too
low.
Ex825 : The direction where a connected conveyer can't be changed is set up in the
plate types setting.
Ex826 : No respons was returned from the conveyer.
Ex827 : An error was returned from the conveyer toward the switching command.
Ex828 : The conveyer can't be changed to the direction that is set up in the plate types
setting.
Ex82a : Since the light intensity of laser diodes is detected as having deviated more than
+-5% from the specified value, the equipment executes the calibration.
Ex82b : Communication with the RAS server was interrupted. (RAS server was turned
off, or RS-232C cable was drawn out)
Ex82c : No response come from DNS.
Ex82d : Communication with the RAS server has resume.
Ex82e : It failed in the connection to the rotating light server.
Ex82f : The name of the mail server isn't right.
Ex830 : It failed in the connection to the mail server.

Ex831 : Mail account was rejected.

Ex832 : An error occurred in the transmission of DATA command.
Ex833 : An error occurred in the transmission of header.
Ex834 : An error occurred in the transmission of body.
Ex835 : An error occurred in the transmission of attached file.
Ex836 : An error occurred in the transmission of TO command.
Ex837 : A command was sent to the SMTP server. But, no answer was returned from
the server.
Ex839 : The cable between RB31 board and recording head is disconnected.
Ex880 : Servo pack: Time-out error occurred while receiving data.
Ex881 : Servo-Pack:Address error
Ex882 : Servo-Pack:Data error
Ex883 : Servo-Pack:Check sum error
Ex884 : Servo-Pack:Undefined error code
Ex885 : Servo-Pack:Number of received characters are insufficient.
Exe01 : Excessive current in the LD drive (driver 1 board)
Exe05 : Driver board temperature error or Head FPGA Version Error
Exe06 : -5 V power supply error
Exe07 : Calibration sensor is not connected.
Exe08 : Offset error in the calibration sensor
Exe09 : Irregular 5 V power supply
Exe0a : Irregular +15 V power supply
Exe0b : Irregular -15 V power supply
Exe0c : Irregular 24 V power supply
Exe0d : Cover switch is OFF.
Exe0e : BL command error (counter value is 0)
Exe0f : Zoom sensor is not detecting.
Exe10 : Focus sensor is not detecting.
Exe11 : Time has expired for home return.(Zoom or focus motor)
Exe12 : Power supply irregular while the motor is driving
Exe13 : Pulse motor has traveled beyond the limit. (Zoom or focus motor)
Exe14 : Irregular power supply(instantaneous loss)
Exe20 : Temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
Exe21 : Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit is greater than 35degrees.
Exe22 : Temperature of the radiating fin of the Peltier element is greater than 55
degrees.
Exe23 : Dew condensation error
Exe24 : Sensor for LD block has not been connected.
Exe25 : Sensor for the periphery of the optical unit has not been connected.

Exe26 : Sensor for the radiating fin of the Peltier element has not been connected.
Exe27 : The dew condensation detection sensor has not been connected.
Exe28 : Temperature of the LD block is low.
Exe30 : Power supply error occurred when the recording head received the DW com-
mand.
Exe31 : Command error occurred when the recording head received the DW command.
Exe32 : Download error occurred when the recording head received the DP command.
Exe33 : Download error occurred when the recording head received the DF command.
Exe34 : Download address error occurred.
Exe35 : Error occurred when the recording head received the BU command.
Exe36 : Error occurred when the recording head received the BD command.
Exe40 : Writing error occurred when the recording head received the AC command.
Exe41 : Writing error on EEPROM
Exe42 : RAM error
Exe43 : ROM check sum error
Exe44 : FPGA error
Exe45 : Data error due to a divide-by-zero error
Exe60 : LD Current setting Error
Exe61 : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit > 35degrees. Temperature of
the environment <= 28degrees.)",
(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit <= 35degrees. Temperature of
the environment > 28degrees.)",
Exe64 : The temperature at the periphery of the optical unit is greater than 35degrees.
(Temperature of the environment <= 28degrees.)
Exe65 : The temperature of the radiating fin is greater than 55degrees.
(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit>35degrees. Temperature of
the environment <= 28degrees.)
(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit >= 35degrees.)
Exe67 : The LD block has dew.
(Temperature of the LD block < 22degrees. Temperature at the periphery of
the optical unit >= 18degrees.)
the optical unit < 18degrees.)
Exe69 : The temperature of the LD block is less than 5degrees.
Exe6a : The temperature of the LD block is less than 5degrees.

(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit < 17degrees. Temperature of

the environment >= 18degrees.)
Exe6b : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
Exe6c : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
the environment > 28degrees.)
Exe6d : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
Exe6e : The temperature inside the machine is greater than 35degrees.
Exe6f : The temperature of the radiating fin is greater than 55degrees.
(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit <= 35degrees.)
Exe71 : It is just before a recording head has dew.
(Temperature of the LD block < 22degrees. Temperature of the environment
>= 18degrees.)
(Temperature of the LD block < 22degrees. Temperature of the environment <
18degrees.)
Exe73 : The temperature of the LD block is in between 5degrees and 17degrees.
(Temperature of the environment >= 18degrees.)
(Temperature of the environment < 18degrees.)
Exea0 : Light intensity adjustment error 0ch
Exeaa : Light intensity adjustment error 10ch
Exeab : Light intensity adjustment error 11ch
Exeac : Light intensity adjustment error 12ch
Exead : Light intensity adjustment error 13ch
Exeae : Light intensity adjustment error 14ch

Exeaf : Light intensity adjustment error 15ch
Exeb0 : Light intensity adjustment error 16ch
Exeba : Light intensity adjustment error 26ch
Exebb : Light intensity adjustment error 27ch
Exebc : Light intensity adjustment error 28ch
Exebd : Light intensity adjustment error 29ch
Exebe : Light intensity adjustment error 30ch
Exebf : Light intensity adjustment error 31ch
Exee0 : Incorrect command has been input.
Exee1 : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
Exee2 : Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit is greater than 35degrees.
(Temperature of the environment > 28degrees.)
Exee3 : The temperature of the radiating fin is greater than 55degrees.
Exee4 : It is just before a recording head has dew.
(Temperature of the LD block >= 22degrees.)
Exee5 : The temperature of the LD block is less than 5degrees.
the environment < 18degrees.)
Exef0 : Recording head processing task is now processing another message.
Exef2 : Recording head unit is not running.
Exef3 : Recording head data check sum error occurred when data was uploaded.
Exef4 : Recording head data address error occurred when data was uploaded.
Exef5 : LD calibration cannot process because temperature of LD block is too low.
Exef6 : A command was sent to the exposure head. But, no answer was returned from
the exposure head.
Exfa0 : System error(stack overflow).
Exfa1 : Floating point arithmetic error
Exfa2 : Divide-by-zero error
Exfa3 : System error (semaphore)
Exfb0 : Flash memory erase error

Exfb1 : Flash memory erase error (during verification).

Exfb2 : Flash memory write error.
Exfb3 : Incompatible flash memory

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
PT-R4000II : Ver4.0X F.Error list
2. Error list (PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X , PT-R4000II : Ver4.0X)

out.
ON.
arm.
not moving).
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list PT-R4000II : Ver4.0X
performed).
command.

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
unit is turned ON.
unit is turned ON.
is ON.)
sides.)
program.
arm is off.

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X

off.
Ex167 : The drum is rotated to the "squeeze position", but the status of the Servo
Ex176 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Balance pin before
inserted)
Ex177 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Balance pin after
inserted)
Ex17c : PH29H-sensor is illegal. The PH29H-sensor does not turn ON during
initialization.
Ex17f : PH29A-sensor is illegal. The PH29A-sensor does not turn ON during

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
initialization.
off.
moving).(Away side)

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
Ex1ab : Maintenance-cover of Auto-loader was opend. Please clode maintenance
cover.
than the set value.
transfering to AT.
Ex1ba : PH11-2H-sensor is illegal. The PH11-2H-sensor does not turn ON during
initialization.
Ex1bb : PH11-2A-sensor is illegal. The PH11-2A-sensor does not turn ON during
initialization.

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
correctly.
side.)
side.)

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
turn OFF.)
turn ON.)
Ex214 : Exposure in the secondary scanning direction exceeds the effective image
output range.
less than 50 mW.
executed.
than the set value.

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
Ex31b : Maintenance-cover of Auto-loader was opend. Please clode maintenance
cover.
Ex320 : Plate pad dropped a plate before the plate pad reached the intermediate
sensor.

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X

transfering to AT.
Ex387 : MA-L can't be initialized because some cassettes are not in the lift or the
cassette properly.
vacant.

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
arm.
Ex606 : Error
Ex607 : Busy
Ex608 : Error
Ex609 : Busy
Ex60a : Error
Ex60b : Busy
size.
Ex814 : Current paper-position of printing machine settings cause image to extend
outside of allowable exposure area.
Ex817 : There are some punch blocks, which have been used for more than the

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
endurance time.
lower target power.
power.
2 is not on.
target power.
low.
setting.

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
the server.
Exe22 : Temperature of the radiating fin of the Peltier element is greater than
55degrees.

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
mand.
Exe42 : RAM error
Exe44 : FPGA error
Exe61 : The temperature of the LD block is greater than degrees.
(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit > degrees. Temperature of the
environment <= 28degrees.)"
Exe62 : The temperature of the LD block is greater than degrees.
the environment > 28degrees.)"
the environment <= 28degrees.)"

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
>= 18degrees.)
18degrees.)
(Temperature of the environment >= 18degrees.)

PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X

the exposure head.

F.Error list
3. Error list (PT-R4100 : Ver1.0X)

out.
ON.
arm.
not moving).
F.Error list
performed).
command.

F.Error list
unit is turned ON.
unit is turned ON.
is ON.)
sides.)
program.
arm is off.

F.Error list
off.
Ex167 : The drum is rotated to the "squeeze position", but the status of the Servo con-
troller (SVC) has not changed to "Ready".
Ex176 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Balance pin before in-
serted)
Ex177 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Balance pin after in-
serted)
Ex17c : PH29H-sensor is illegal. The PH29H-sensor does not turn ON during initializa-
tion.
Ex17f : PH29A-sensor is illegal. The PH29A-sensor does not turn ON during initializa-
tion.
F.Error list
off.
moving).(Away side)

F.Error list
Ex1ab : Maintenance-cover of Auto-loader was opend. Please clode maintenance-
cover.
than the set value.
transfering to AT.
Ex1ba : PH11-2H-sensor is illegal. The PH11-2H-sensor does not turn ON during initial-
ization.
Ex1bb : PH11-2A-sensor is illegal. The PH11-2A-sensor does not turn ON during initial-
ization.
correctly.
F.Error list
side.)
side.)

F.Error list
turn OFF.)
turn ON.)
Ex214 : Exposure in the secondary scanning direction exceeds the effective image out-
put range.
less than 50 mW.
executed.
than the set value.

F.Error list
Ex31b : Maintenance-cover of Auto-loader was opend. Please clode maintenance-
cover.
Ex320 : Plate pad dropped a plate before the plate pad reached the intermediate sen-
sor.

F.Error list
transfering to AT.
Ex387 : MA-L can't be initialized because some cassettes are not in the lift or the cas-
sette properly.
vacant.
F.Error list
arm.
Ex606 : Error
Ex607 : Busy
Ex608 : Error
Ex609 : Busy
Ex60a : Error
Ex60b : Busy
size.
Ex814 : Current paper-position of printing machine settings cause image to extend out-
side of allowable exposure area.
Ex817 : There are some punch blocks, which have been used for more than the endur-
ance time.

F.Error list
lower target power.
power.
2 is not on.
target power.
low.
setting.

F.Error list
the server.
Ex839 : The cable between RB31 board and recording head is disconnected.
Exe22 : Temperature of the radiating fin of the Peltier element is greater than 55
degrees.

F.Error list
mand.
Exe42 : RAM error
Exe44 : FPGA error
the environment > 28degrees.)",

F.Error list
>=18degrees.)
18degrees.)

F.Error list
Exee6 : 0-7ch in signal line is break detect.
Exee7 : 8-15ch in signal line is break detect.
Exee8 : 0-15ch in signal line or DOTCLK signal line is break detect.
the exposure head.

F.Error list

G. Supplement
G.Supplement
1. Punch List
Parts cord Parts Name

U1250039-00 HB-S220
U1250040-00 HB-S425
U1250041-00 HB-S220/425
U1250042-01 DS400
U1250043-01 DS500
U1250044-01 DS700
U1250045-01 DS400/700
U1250046-01 DS400/700
U1250047-01 DS500/700
U1250048-00 KM550
U1250049-01 HB-W425
U1250050-01 PC458
U1250051-01 PC757
U1250052-01 PC458/757
U1250057-00 HB-S425(UU)
U1250108-00 HB-S220(UU)
U1250060-01 DS400/KM550(8/9)
U1250061-01 DS400/KM550(7/9)
U1250058-00 HB-S425+KM550
U1250063-01 HB(W)425/393+KM550
U1250069-00 HB/DS(W)425/400(11/8)
U1250104-00 HB/DS(W)425/400(11/6.25)
U1250106-00 HB(W)425/393+DS550
U1250107-00 HB/DS(W)425/400(11/10)
U1250113-00 HB(W)425/393+DS700
U1250119-00 HB/DS(W)425/400(11/6)
U1250110-00 PC737/KM550
U1250121-00 PC458/KM550
U1250118-00 HB/PC(W)425/457(11/11)
U1250120-00 HB/PC(W)425/457(11/10)
U1250059-00 HB/DS(W)425/400+KM550(10/9)
U1250111-00 HB/DS(W)425/400+KM550(11/9)
U1250115-00 DS/KM(W)500/550+HB425(10/11,8)
* U1250039-00 to U1250052-01 is Standard option
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL G-1

G.Supplement
G-2 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

G.Supplement

G.Supplement

G.Supplement

G.Supplement

G.Supplement

G.Supplement

G.Supplement

G.Supplement

G.Supplement

G.Supplement
2. Recommend parts list

COMPATIBILITY
PARTS CODE PARTS NAME
PT-R4000/PT-R4000Ⅱ
U1254001-00 PULSE MOTOR ASSEMBLY
○
S.P.(103H6500-7011)
545259 SWITCH LIMIT
○
V-5214DK
U1254002-00 SENSOR DISTANCE ASSEMBLY
○
S.P.(Z4W-V25R)
70585434-00 COUPLING
○
MTD-25 D.6*D.12
62000908 PHOTO INTERRUPTER
○
GP1A05A
100027059V00 TIMING BELT
×
200S5M670
100028263V00 AC SERVO MOTOR
×
SGMPH-08AAA21
U1254004-00 ENCODER CABLE ASSEMBLY
○
S.P.(TS5207N564)
U1254005-00 SENSOR VACUUM ASSEMBLY
○
S.P.(PS40-102V-NAR)
100001077V00 PHOTO INTERRUPTER
○
GP1A25LC
U1254006-00 SENSOR PHOTO ASSEMBLY
○
S.P.(BGS-S08N)
U1254007-00 DC MOTOR CABLE ASSEMBLY
○
S.P.(TG-30F-BM 1/180HA)
○
S.P.(DME44B8HPB+8DG150)
110411 PHOTO SENSOR
○
GP2A22
○
S.P.(TG-38F-AG 1/250)
U1254024-00 Trail Edge Clamp Unit
○
Trail Edge Clamp Unit
115388 SENSOR PHOTO MICRO
○
EE-SY671
U1254010-00 BALANCER MOTOR UNIT HOME
○
PT-R4000 HOME
U1254011-00 BALANCER MOTOR UNIT AWAY
○
PT-R4000 AWAY
○
S.P.(DME44B6HPB+6DG36F)
70584840-00 AIR FILTER ELEMENT
○
NO.681142
U1254053-00 MICRO SWITCH
×
S.P.(SS-01GL2-F)
116187 MICRO SWITCH
○
D2MV-01L13-1C3
151656 THERMOMETER
○
TTM-10L-0-N-M2-Z01
151175 PULSE MOTOR DRIVER
○
PMM-MD-23221-10
○
GP2A20
U1254013-00 VACUUM PUMP CABLE ASSEMBLY
○
S.P.(G24/07-15W-V)
86401635-00 FIBER SET CABLE ASSEMBLY
○
X51-PH51
100012648V00 RELAY
×
HE1aN-S-DC24V
2002-05-23 present

G.Supplement
COMPATIBILITY
PT-R4000/PT-R4000Ⅱ
○
S.P.(103H6704-0442)
○
S.P.(TG-38F-AG 1/25)
U1254016-00 ROTARY SOLENOID CABLE
○
S.P.(6SL67.5-26*3)
U1254017-01 CLUTCH CABLE ASSEMBLY
○
S.P.(CYT-03-33-A-176)
U1254052-00 DC GEARED MOTOR ASSEMBLY
×
S.P.(TG-47B-LG 1/224)
U1254019-03 PIO-PTR4(2) PCB
○
S.P.(PIO-PTR4(2))
U1154005-00 SPX32 PCB
○
S.P.(SPX32)
U1254020-00 CON-PTR4 PCB
○
S.P.(CON-PTR4)
U1154007-01 RB31 PCB
○
RB31
U1254023-00 RCP2-PTR4 PCB
○
S.P.(RCP2-PTR4)
150367 POWER SUPPLY
○
ZWS100PF-5
152119 SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY
○
ZWS75PF-15
100023567V00 POWER SUPPLY 24V
○
JWS300-24
100023568V00 Power Supply 5V
○
JWS300-5
100002244V00 POWER SUPPLY 24V
×
ZWS30-24/J
100012677V00 SWITCH WITH KEY
×
AR22JR-2A22(A)
152130 PULSE MOTOR DRIVER
○
PMM-MD-53031-97 88-22-054
100028262V00 AC SERVO PACK
×
SGDH-08AE-SY202
152122 INVERTER
○
L100-004NFE
115971 SENSOR PHOTO
○
EE-SX670
○
S.P.(103H548-0440)
U1254022-00 CLEANING ROLLER
○
SUS304 D.35-882
70585537-11 REFERENCE PUNCH UNIT(H) PTR50-1
○
D.6.35+D.6.35 TYPE-C 88-0
70585538-11 REFERENCE PUNCH UNIT(H) PTR51-1
○
D.9.5W+D.6.35 TYPE-C 88-0
U1150073-00 LD BLOCK ASSEMBLY
○
32ch_Head
151199-01 COOLING UNIT
○
OCE-100PX2 #88-10-009
U1154008-00 HEAD CPU BOARD
○
32ch_Head
U1154009-00 HEAD DRIVER BOARD
○
32ch_Head
U1150042-03 HEAD MOTHER BOARD
○
86400759-00
2002-05-23 present

G.Supplement
COMPATIBILITY
PT-R4000/PT-R4000Ⅱ
151200 PULSE MOTOR
○
103H3505-7040
64001136 STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER
○
PMM-BD-5701
U1150074-01 ZOOM MOTOR ASSEMBLY
○
32ch_Head
U1154031-00 FAN MOTOR ASSEMBLY
○
PT-R8000
U1154032-01 DEW CONDENSATION SENSOR
○
32ch_Head
151238-01 THERMISTOR SENSOR
○
PBP-43-D2 #88-06-011
151207 PHOTO SENSOR
○
EE-SX673A
U1150075-01 CALIBRATION SENSOR
○
32ch_Head
70584846-00 OBJECTIVE LENS FOR ZOOM
○
LS32-02A #1400 88-00-136
U1150076-00 HEAD MAIN BODY
○
32ch_Head
S100015125V00 PANEL UNIT
PT-R8600 ○
100015691V00 SURGE PROTECT BOARD
×
SRGE(NON FUSE)
100022902V00 FUSE FOLDER ASSEMBLY
×
XFU1-FU1
U1254054-00 INTERLOCK SW ASSEMBLY
×
S.P.(D4GS-N2R)
100022903V00 SWITCH ASSEMBLY
×
XLS56S,56P-LS56
U1154039-00 PUNCH SENSOR ASSEMBLY1(SHORT)
○
PT-R8000
U1154040-00 PUNCH SENSOR ASSEMBLY2(LONG)
○
PT-R8000
○
LG-203L #88-06-004
107323 RELAY
×
G2R-1-S DC24V
U1254027-00 32ch DATA CABLE ASSEMBLY
○
X103-X810 PTR4
U1254028-00 RS232C CABLE ASSEMBLY
○
X158-X811 PTR4
U1254029-00 -5V FOR LD CABLE ASSEMBLY
○
XT4-X800 PTR4
U1254030-00 HEAD POWER SUPPLY CABLE ASSEMBLY
○
XT4-X801 PTR4
U1254031-00 -5V CONTOROL CABLE ASSEMBLY
○
U6-X807 PTR4
U1254032-00 PELTIER P.S CABLE ASSEMBLY
○
XT4-X808 PTR4
U1254033-00 LD CAL CABLE ASSEMBLY
○
XT3,X812-X850 PTR4
U1254034-00 BLOWER UNIT
○
PT-R4000
60200129 GLASS FUSE
×
218.500 250V 0.5A 5*20
U1254056-00 BALANCER DRIVE UNIT(H)
○
PT-R4000 HOME
2002-05-23 present

G.Supplement
COMPATIBILITY
PT-R4000/PT-R4000Ⅱ
U1254057-00 BALANCER DRIVE UNIT(A)
○
PT-R4000 AWAY
4-65223005-00 SWITCH CAM
×
T0-2-1/EA/SVB
2002-05-23 present

Plate Thermal Recorder
4300
SERVICE MANUAL
May,23,2002 First Edition
Publication
Quality Promotion Department
Media Technology Company
DAINIPPON SCREEN MFG.CO.,LTD.
Printed in Japan

PTR4100 4300

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PTR4100 4300

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Plate Thermal Recorder

2002 10-25 Ver2.0

Quality Promotion Department

: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided

: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided

When exporting the machine

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL i

C. Replacement & Adjustment

ii PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL iii

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL v

vi PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

1-1.When using the PT-R4XXX

• The following descriptions of safety precautions and operating

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL § -1

1-2.Precautions for electricity

2) Switching operation of power supply

§ -2 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Power supply switch

Power supply switch

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL § -3

4) Processing after power failures

§ -4 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

While these doors are open, releasing interlocks or performing

Door interlock switch

Back side cover

Right side cover

§ -6 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

6) Forced drum stop switch

• The PT-R4XXX is equipped with a forced drum stop switch that

Forced drum stop switch

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL § -7

1-3.Precautions for equipment operation

• Do not turn on the PT-R4XXX’s power supply or start operation

Wear clothing that

Hands are wet.

• Whenever you notice anything abnormal, report it immediately to

§ -8 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

• Maintenance must always be performed by specially trained and

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL § -9

1-5.Caution labels on the equipment

• Caution labels are attached to potentially hazardous parts or areas

Label indicating the power supply specifications of the PT-R4XXX.

Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX complies with CDRH

§ -10 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX is a Class 1 laser product.

Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX complies with FCC and

Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX complies with CE standards.

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL § -11

Label indicating that this unit contains laser radiation.

Label showing the location of an ground terminal.

Label indicating the technical classification of the laser head (for

§ -12 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Label warning that this equipment contains a high leakage current

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL § -13

1-6.Using the laser safety

Notices concerning the safe use of the unit.

3) For European model

§ -14 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

• You will not be exposed to laser beam radiation during ordinary

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL § -15

§ -16 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL § -17